JP6539996B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hitting gaming state or the like is triggered by the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. To be done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the lottery being performed, and the stop result according to the lottery result is obtained when the final stop display of the variable display is performed. A display effect of one game cycle to be displayed is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably enhancing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
Launching means for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry section;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers as an upper limit;
An assignment determination unit that sequentially determines whether to award a bonus to the player for the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit;
Privilege giving means for giving the player the privilege, based on the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means being a giving correspondence result corresponding to giving the player the privilege;
Based on the application judgment by the application judging means, the game notification operation is started by the predetermined notification means, and the game operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Game time control means for controlling the predetermined notification means such that the game time operation is performed, where
Destination specifying means for specifying information about predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing prior to the predetermined special information becoming the target of the addition determination;
Corresponding to the result of the assignment determination in the case where the predetermined special information that has become the target of the particular has become the target of the assignment determination based on the fact that the identification result by the prior identification means has become a predetermined result. Special notification execution means for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means;
Based on the special notification being performed by the special notification execution means, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round related to the special information different from the predetermined special information that has triggered the execution of the special notification. Predetermined effect execution means capable of
Condition setting means capable of setting a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of a period in which the predetermined effect is executed, without considering that the special condition is established;
Condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is established;
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first means for performing a first effect, which is a notification corresponding to performing the predetermined effect based on the special notification being performed by the special notification execution means;
Second means for starting the predetermined effect after the first effect is performed by the first means;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, the degree of attention to games can be suitably increased.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents on a display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process for operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of change display time. It is an explanatory view for explaining a change display time table. It is a flow chart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing after completion | finish of open / close execution mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a presentation control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation processing for pending | precast notice in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process of pending | holding display control in MPU of a production control apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining a reservation notice and a special reservation notice. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relativity of the effect pattern and the image for suspension display. It is a flow chart which shows special reservation notice setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows grasp processing of reservation information. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing at the time of time specification possible. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables for special reservation notices. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a normal pattern. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables for special reservation notices. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables for special reservation notices. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a time specific pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a premiere pattern. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing at the time of time identification impossible. It is a flow chart which shows an effect setting process at the time of disengaging. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables for special reservation notices. It is a flow chart which shows special reservation notice control processing in MPU of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows timer management processing. 5 is a flowchart showing shift subtraction processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for reservation display. It is a flow chart which shows change display control processing in MPU of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a while. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of a shift in 2nd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables for special reservation notices. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of change display time in a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a change display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process for pending control. It is a flow chart which shows special reservation notice setting processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a change display time table in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process of pending | holding control in the modification of 4th Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing shift subtraction processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer management process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows subtraction value adjustment processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline for a notice for special reservation. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline for a notice for special reservation in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation corresponding | compatible process in MPU of a production control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary for the special reserve notification in the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation corresponding subtraction process in MPU of a production control apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for a lottery etc. in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows data setting processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a modification for a special reservation notice. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of a special reservation notice in an 8th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of a special reservation notice. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of a special reservation notice. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of a special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process for pending control. It is a flow chart which shows special reservation notice setting processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables about a special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a while. It is a flow chart which shows processing for a special reservation notice at the time of stop. It is a flowchart which shows a privilege provision process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special reservation notice at the time of shift. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of a special reservation notice in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process for pending control. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of a special reservation notice in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process for operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process for pending control.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) disposed behind the inner frame.

  An inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. In addition, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated backward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

  The gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip and has a function to lock the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. And has a function to lock the front door frame 14 against the inner frame in an unopenable manner. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  The game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

  The gaming board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In each opening, a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, a display unit 44 and the like are provided. ing.

  When the ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating opening 33 and the lower operating opening 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24. A payout of a predetermined number of winning balls is executed based on the detection result.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls which did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and it is discharged not only from the gaming area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the gaming area after passing through the opening Not included. However, in the following description, the variable winning device 32, the upper operation opening 33, the lower operation opening 34 or the entry of the game ball to the through gate 35 is clearly distinguished from the entry of the game ball to the out port 37. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating opening 33 and the lower operating opening 34 are unitized as an operating opening device and installed on the game board 24. The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 33 and 34 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower operating port 34 is provided with a motorized part 34 a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supporting state or non-guided state) of the motorized part 34a, the gaming ball can not win in the lower operating port 34, and the lower operating port is set by the motored part 34a being opened (supported or guided). It is possible to win 34.

  The variable winning device 32 has a large winning opening 32a communicating with the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win or is difficult to win, and the game ball can easily win when it is won in the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when a big hit is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening aspect of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit, with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings. There is an aspect to be done.

  The main display portion 43 and the character display portion 44 are provided on the decoration member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board of the game board 24. More specifically, the front face of the decorative member 39 is opposed to the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 to make the gaming area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display 43 and a character display 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the display unit 44 for prizes are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is in front of both display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display unit 43, a change display of a pattern is performed triggered by winning on the upper operating opening 33 or the lower operating opening 34, and as a result of stopping the variable display, winning on the upper operating opening 33 or the lower operating opening 34 The result of the internal lottery made on the basis is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, winning in the upper actuation opening 33 and winning in the lower actuation opening 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the row is based on the winning in the upper actuation opening 33 or the lower actuation opening 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated on the main display 43 which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined display result is After being displayed and the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode.

  In addition, although the main display part 43 is comprised by the segment display which the some segment light emission part is arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display, It may be configured by a CRT, a dot matrix, or another type of display device. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which the color of the species is switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the prize display portion 44, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is Explicitly shown. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning on the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electronic part opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the role display 44 and the fluctuation display After being stopped, shift to the open state. In the open state, the motorized accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) symbols that are a kind of symbols. Further, a center frame 42 is disposed on the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and does not cause a problem that the visibility of the display screen is reduced by the drop of the game ball. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower positions, and these symbols are displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variable display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning on the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with that. Then, for example, in the game turn to shift to the opening and closing execution mode in which opening of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is performed as the opening and closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is set on an effective line set in advance. The symbols of the predetermined combination are stopped and displayed.

  By the way, based on the winning of any of the operation openings 33, 34, the variable display is started by the main display 43 and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game play.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a main hold light emitting unit 45 is provided which emits light and displays the number of holdings corresponding to the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. The main storage light emitting unit 45 is configured of an LED. The number of game balls winning in the upper operating opening 33 or the lower operating opening 34 is held at a maximum of four, and the number of the held holdings is displayed by the lighting of the main holding light emitting unit 45.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 42, there is provided a bonus holding light emitting unit 46 for displaying the number of holdings in a light emitting manner corresponding to the bonus display unit 44. The special product holding light emitting unit 46 is configured of an LED. The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 35 is suspended up to four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by the lighting of the feature reserved light emitting unit 46.

  The inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 constitute a guide rail, and the inner frame is mounted below the game board 24 in the inner frame The game balls fired from the played game ball launch mechanism (not shown) are guided to the top of the game area. In the gaming ball launch mechanism, the launching operation of the gaming ball is performed by operating the launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 which allows almost the entire game area to be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted. The window panel 62 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited thereto and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various light emitting portions are provided. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various light emitting units. These various light emission parts are comprised from LED. In addition, on both left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are vertically juxtaposed. An upper plate 71 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 similarly opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper tray 71 has a function for temporarily storing game balls paid out from a later described payout device and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing gaming balls that have become surplus in the upper tray 71. The gaming balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper tray 71 and the lower tray 72.

  An operation unit 75 operable by the player is provided above the emission handle 54 in the front door frame 14. The operation unit 75 is connected to an effect control device described later, and a predetermined effect is executed by operating the operation unit 75.

  On the back side of the inner frame, a main control device, an effect control device, and a display control device are mounted. In addition, a back pack unit is provided on the back of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a dispensing mechanism including a dispensing device, a dispensing control device, a power supply and a firing control device. Is mounted. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Basic Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 203 and the RAM 204 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 202 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. The same applies to the MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211, and the like are connected. In this case, a power and emission control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring substrate 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring substrate 205. In addition, as part of the various detection sensors 211, for the winning entry portion (payout entry portion) such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operation opening 33, the lower operation opening 34 and the through gate 35 A plurality of detection sensors provided in a one-to-one correspondence are connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a prize determination (entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, the MPU 202 executes a big hit occurrence lottery based on winning on the upper operation opening 33 or the lower actuation opening 34, and executes a support generation lottery based on winning on the through gate 35.

  At the output side of the MPU 202, the disconnection monitor substrate 205, the payout control device 97, and the effect control device 82 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the result of the winning determination on the winning support ball entry unit. In this case, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When a prize in the general winning opening 31 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a prize in the variable prize device 32 is specified, 15 prize balls are specified. When the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the gaming ball is output and the winning in the upper operation port 33 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three gaming balls is output, and to the lower operating port 34 When a winning is identified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four gaming balls is output.

  To the effect control device 82, various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and a variation end command are output. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  In addition, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive 32c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower operation opening 34, and a main display The part 43 is connected. The main control substrate 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays the main control board 201 and the power supply and emission control device 98, and also monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the winning ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like generate necessary operation power for each, and the generated operation power is supplied through a predetermined power path. Do. Further, the power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism based on the launch permission signal output from the main control board 201, and the game ball launch mechanism is in a predetermined launch condition. In case it is driven.

  The effect control device 82 is based on the various commands input from the main control device 81, the respective pending light emitting units 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit provided in the front door frame 14. Drive control 64. Further, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212. The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the effect control device 82.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 4 is a view showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas are set. Specifically, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 at the upper, middle, and lower levels are set as the plurality of variable display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order.

  Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the display screen G is such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be

  Further, on the display screen G, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set. Then, the variation display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is finished, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a probability variation jackpot result described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "specific symbol", and when the probability variation jackpot occurs, a combination of the same specific symbols Is stopped. Also, the main symbol with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to the "non-specific symbol", and when a big hit usually occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed Ru.

  In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the type of pattern variably displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the symbol attached with a number as described above, for example, the number itself may be variably displayed, and the symbol itself May be displayed in a variable manner.

  In the lower part of the display screen G, a hold display area Ga is set. In the reserve display area Ga, unit reserve display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum reserve number when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and sectioned display It is provided. Specifically, the maximum number of holdings is four when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34, and the first unit holding display area Ga1 is made to correspond to this in the holding display area Ga. A second unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball is won in the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 is one, a predetermined image for holding is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is displayed In the case where the number of holding in the case of winning in the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 is four, predetermined images for holding are displayed in all of the first unit holding display area Ga1 to the fourth unit holding display area Ga4. Be done.

  Furthermore, in the lower part of the display screen G, an execution display area Gb is set in parallel with the hold display area Ga. In the execution display area Gb, the above-described predetermined holding image corresponding to the currently-used game play is displayed.

<About various counters and holding ball storage area>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses a variety of counter information during game play to set a jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the symbol display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery of jackpot occurrence, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, Change in reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when symbol display device 41 moves out, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of big hit random number counter C1, and fluctuation in main display portion 43 and symbol display device 41 The variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Furthermore, the electric combination release counter C4 used in the drawing of whether or not the electric combination 34a of the lower operation opening 34 is in the electric combination release state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and returns to 0. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204. Among them, in the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS is when winning in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 occurs. , And is stored in the holding ball storage area 232 as acquisition information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE is provided with a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3 and a fourth reserve area RE4, according to the winning history to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. The numerical value information of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is stored as hold information in any one of the hold areas RE1 to RE4. Ru.

  In this case, the first reserve area RE1 → the second reserve area RE1 → the second reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 when a plurality of winnings in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 occur consecutively in a plurality of times. Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of RE 2 → third reserve area RE 3 → fourth reserve area RE 4. By providing four reserve areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, the game ball's winning history of the upper operating opening 33 or the lower operating opening 34 is reserved and stored up to four. In addition, the storage ball storage area 232 includes a storage number storage area NA, and the storage number storage area NA specifies the number of storages of winning history to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Information for is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started. Based on the various numerical value information stored in the execution area AE, the determination of success or failure is performed.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the upper operating opening 33 or the lower operating opening 34.

  The value of the random number to be the jackpot win is stored as a yes / no table (win / fail information group) in a yes / no table storage area 221 as a yes / no information group storage unit in the ROM 203.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the hit / fall lottery means. Then, the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode are different, and the former is smaller in number than the latter. As a result, the high probability mode has a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the upper operating opening 33 or the lower operating opening 34.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Then, as the distribution destination, usually, the jackpot result and the probability variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the probability drawing mode becomes the low probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends. In addition, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success or failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” usually corresponds to the big hit result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability big hit result, but the distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types, for example, set a plurality of modes so that the expected acquisition value of the game ball becomes high and low in the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing execution The type of the jackpot result may be increased more than the above two types by providing a difference in the mode transition destination mode.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether or not the reach should be generated. For example, the reach table is set such that “200 to 239” becomes numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence winning.

  By the way, in the game time to shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and in the game session where the variable winning device 32 is in the open / close execution mode In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (pattern) in the symbol display device 41 is started and then the stop display result is derived and displayed The display state to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41 as a step before the variable display of symbols is ended. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and the variation display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents of FIG. 4 will be specifically described. First, high-speed variable display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed. After that, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 switches from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol being displayed or is easy to recognize. And while the fluctuation | variation display of upper pattern row Z1 is complete | finished, the fluctuation | variation display aspect of lower figure pattern row Z3 switches from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display. After that, the variation display of the pattern row Z3 shown below ends. In this case, the reach line is formed by the stop display of the main symbol attached with the same number to any one of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, when the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display and the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line Are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is ended.

  Furthermore, in reach display, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, fluctuation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. What performs a reach effect is included by displaying a predetermined character etc. as a moving image in the substantially whole display screen, after reducing or displaying the thing of performing a reduction and the combination of a reach symbol reduced. In addition, when reach display is performed or before advance display, it is determined whether to display advance notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the fluctuation display time on the main display unit 43 and the fluctuation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. When the fluctuation display time is determined using the fluctuation type counter CS, the fluctuation display time table stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

  For example, the motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 249, and to return to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold hold area of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the motorized jack 34a is to be controlled to the open state by the value of the stored motorized jack release counter C4.

<Various processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed when the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 advances the game of each game play will be described.

  In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process activated upon power-on, and generates a power-off signal from the power-off monitor substrate 205 to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Although the NMI interrupt process activated by the input is executed, the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is started up periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 202.

  In step S101, a reading process is performed. In the reading process, the state of the sensor corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the sensor is determined to save detection information (winning detection information) .

  After the reading process is performed in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric character release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4 are respectively incremented by one, and cleared to zero when their counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S104, a winning process for through is carried out accompanying the winning of the through gate 35. In the through winning process, the value of the motorized product release counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electronic combination holding condition on the condition that the number of stored relation holdings stored in the electronic combination holding area is less than four. Store in the area. In addition, the effect control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the prize holding light emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of prize holding memories.

  After that, in step S105, a winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating port 33, 34 is executed, and then the timer interrupt process is ended.

<Prize process for operation port>
The winning process for the operation opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S201, it is determined whether or not the upper operation opening winning flag is stored in the upper operation opening winning flag storage area in the various flags storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The upper operation opening winning flag is stored in the reading process (step S101) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) when the game ball is hit in the upper operation opening 33. If the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S207 without executing the process of steps S202 to S206. If the upper operation opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S202.

  In step S202, the upper actuation opening winning flag is deleted. In the following step S203, the value stored in the number-of-holdings storage area NA of the holding ball storage area 232 is read out, and the number of pending storages N pending-stored in the pending area RE is the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). ) Is determined. If the pending storage number N is equal to or more than the upper limit value, the process directly proceeds to step S207. If the number of pending storages N is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S 204, and the number of pending storages N is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S205, the values (each numerical value information) of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS updated in the previous step S103 The first reserved area among RE1 to RE4, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved memories N added at 1 in step S204 is stored.

  In the subsequent step S206, the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are control devices on the sub side (secondary side), are made to recognize that a winning on the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 has occurred. At 82, a confirmation process for holding notice, which is a process for executing holding notice, is executed. Such processing will be described in detail later.

  If the negative determination is made in step S201, the negative determination is made in step S203, or after the process of step S206 is executed, the lower operation opening prize flag storage area in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is lowered in step S207. It is determined whether the operation opening winning flag is stored. The lower operation opening winning flag is stored in the reading process (step S101) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) when the game ball is hit in the lower operation opening 34. If the lower operation opening winning flag is not stored, the present winning process is ended as it is. When the lower operation opening winning flag is stored, after the lower operation opening winning flag is erased in step S208, the processing of steps S203 to S206 is executed. In this case, a negative determination is made in the processing of step S207 after the processing of step S203 to step S206, and the present winning processing is ended.

  In the configuration in which the upper operating opening 33 and the lower operating opening 34 are provided as operating openings in the game area and winnings to both operating openings 33 and 34 can occur simultaneously, the upper operating opening is one processing cycle of timer interrupt processing It is determined whether or not a winning on 33 has occurred, and whether or not a winning on the lower operating opening 34 has occurred, and when a winning on both operating openings 33, 34 is occurring at the same time, In response to the winning, the information acquisition process of step S203 to step S205 and the information transmission process to the control device on the sub side based on the winning of step S206 are executed. Thereby, even when winning in both operation ports 33 and 34 occurs simultaneously, acquisition of suspension information based on winning in upper operating port 33 and acquisition of suspension information based on winning in lower operation port 34 While being able to carry out correctly, the information transmission process to the control device on the sub side can be executed at an early timing.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated in response to the power-on is performed. In the normal process, the main process of the game is performed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S301 to S306 is executed as periodic processing of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S308 and S309 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 97. Also, when rendering commands such as various hold commands, variation commands, type commands, and variation end commands are set, they are transmitted to the rendering control device 82.

  Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by one, and the counter value is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S303, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S304, game number control processing for controlling the game in each game number is executed. In this game number control process, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. The game number control process will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S305, a game state transition process is performed to shift the game state. By this gaming state transition processing, the gaming state is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the like.

  In the subsequent step S306, a process for supporting the combination for driving and controlling the motorized part 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is performed. In this electronic-support-support process, it is determined whether or not the motorized combination 34a is in the open state, and display control of the combination display 44 is performed. In this case, as described above, a lottery is made at the time of winning on the through gate 35, and the drive control of the motorized jack 34a is performed based on the lottery result.

  In the following step S307, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has come, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process (steps S308 and S309). That is, in step S308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S309, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of step S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using such remaining time. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game number control process shown in FIG. 9, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing, and is deleted when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition processing.

  When in the opening / closing execution mode, the main game is performed without executing the processing of step S402 and subsequent processing, that is, the processing for starting the game play of step S402 to step S405 and the processing of the game play progression for step S406 to step S409. End the control process. That is, when in the open / close execution mode, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not a winning on the operation openings 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If the open / close execution mode is not in effect, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 43 is displaying variable. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started on the main display unit 43, and is erased when the variation display is ended.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in the variable display mode, the process proceeds to the processing for starting the game play of steps S403 to S405. In the game number start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether the number of stored memories N is "0". The case where the pending storage number N is “0” means that the pending information is not stored in the pending ball storage area 232. Therefore, the game number control process ends.

  If the pending storage number N is not "0", data setting processing for setting data stored in the pending ball storage area 232 for variable display in step S404 is executed, and the main processing is further performed in step S405. The variation start process for starting the variation display on the display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. When the fluctuation start process is executed, the game number control process is ended.

  Here, the data setting process of step S404 and the fluctuation start process of step S405 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process of step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, at step S501, the number of reserved memories N is decremented by one. In the following step S502, the data stored in the first reserve area RE1 of the reserve area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S503, processing is performed to shift the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the respective hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first reserve area RE1, and Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as reserve area RE2 → first reserve area RE1, third reserve area RE3 → second reserve area RE2, fourth reserve area RE4 → third reserve area RE3.

  In the subsequent step S504, a shift command, which is information for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the data of the reserved area has been shifted, is set. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended. The shift command set in step S504 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). By receiving the shift command, the effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display on the main storage light emitting unit 45 in accordance with the reduction in the number of storages. Further, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute processing for changing the display in the hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  Next, the change start process of step S405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S601, a process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the change start process of this time corresponds to a big hit is executed. In the success or failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 221, information for success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, It is determined whether the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the value corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the probability table for the low probability mode among the tables stored in the probability table storage area 221 It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

  After the success or failure determination process is executed in step S601, it is determined in step S602 whether or not a jackpot has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 or not. If the jackpot information is stored, the type determination process is executed in step S603.

  In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for type determination, that is, information acquired from information updated by the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Also, information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot information is acquired from the distribution table of the ROM 203. Then, the two pieces of information are compared, and it is specified whether or not the information corresponds to the definite variation jackpot information.

  In the subsequent step S604, it is determined based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S603 whether or not the type of the current big hit is a probability change big hit result. If the result is a definite variation big hit result, the stop result setting process for the definite variation big hit is executed in step S605, and if it is not the definite variation big hit result, a termination result setting process for normal jackpot is executed in step S606. If it is determined in step S602 that the jackpot has not been won, in step S607, stop result setting processing for disconnection is executed.

  In each stop result setting process of step S605 to step S607, the information of the pattern aspect to be finally displayed on the main display unit 43 as a stop is specified from the information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Remember. Further, in steps S605 and S606, the various flags storage area 234 of the RAM 204 stores information for specifying with the MPU 202 that the success or failure judgment result of the current game round is the probability change big hit result or the normal big hit result ( Store the "1" information in the corresponding area). Specifically, in step S605, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S606, the normal jackpot flag is stored.

  After one of the processes in step S605 to step S607 is performed, in step S608, a setting process of the variable display time is performed.

  Here, setting processing of the variable display time will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12, in the setting process of the variable display time, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not a big hit is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the jackpot has been won, the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 for the big hit is acquired from the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 in the subsequent step S702. If the jackpot is not a jackpot but an outlier, in step S703, the outlier display table is acquired from the change display time table storage area 222.

  In each fluctuation display time table, the fluctuation display time is determined by the reach random number counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS, and the number N of pending storages at the start of fluctuation. That is, as shown in FIG. 13, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern is determined by the value of the variation type counter CS. In this embodiment, the fluctuation display time is determined according to the pending number non-correspondence pattern for which the fluctuation display time is determined regardless of the number N of pending storages at the start of fluctuation and the number N of suspension storages at the start of fluctuation. A pending number handling pattern is defined.

  More specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 0 to 4 in the variable display time table at the time of jackpot, it is set as the reach non-occurrence game times. Among them, the case where the value of the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as the variation pattern of reach non-occurrence A, and this is the variation pattern of the number of non-supporting patterns. In this case, the fluctuation display time is set to 10 seconds regardless of the value of the number of pending memories N at the start of fluctuation. Further, among the reach non-occurrence, when the value of the change type counter CS is 25 to 49, it is set as the reach non-occurrence B change pattern, and this is the change pattern of the number-of-holds correspondence pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 10 seconds when the number of pending storages N at the start of variation is 0 to 1, and the variable display time is set to 5 seconds when the number of pending storages N is 2 to 3.

  When the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 5 to 99 in the big hit variation display time table, it is set to the game occurrence of reach occurrence. Then, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 5 to 19, the game number for which normal reach occurs is set, and when the value for the reach random number counter C3 is 20 to 99, the game number for which super reach occurs is set. Be done.

  Here, super reach is a reach display in which the degree of expectation of jackpot winning is set higher than that of normal reach. Furthermore, Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C are set for Super Reach. In Super Reach A to C, Super Reach C is set to have the highest expectation of jackpot winning, and is set to increase the expectation of jackpot winning in the order of C, B, and A. These Super Reaches A to C have different presentation contents, and Super Reach A and B are set to play animation movies, and Super Reach C are set to play live-action movies. ing. Note that different animation movies are set for Super Reach A and B. The super reach A to C are different in the variable display time, and the super reach C is set to have the longest variable display time, and the variable display time is set to be longer in the order of C, B, and A. More specifically, Super Reach A is set to 45 seconds, Super Reach B to 60 seconds, and Super Reach C to 90 seconds. The game times generated by these Super Reaches A to C are fluctuation patterns of the number-of-holds non-correspondence pattern in which the game times are performed in the fluctuation display time set regardless of the value of the number of reserved memories N at the start of fluctuation. .

  In the game round where normal reach occurs at the time of big hit, the case where the change type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as the change pattern of normal reach A, and this is the change pattern of the number of non-supporting patterns. In this case, the fluctuation display time is set to 20 seconds regardless of the value of the number of pending memories N at the start of fluctuation. In addition, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 25 to 49 among the game times in which normal reach occurs, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach B is set, and this is the fluctuation pattern of the number-of-holds correspondence pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 20 seconds when the number of pending storages N at the start of variation is 0 to 1, and the variable display time is set to 15 seconds when the number of pending storages N is 2 to 3. In these normal reach A and normal reach B, although the effect pattern after reaching is the same, the effects such as reaching until reach are generated, ie, the contents such as the notice effect etc. are different as effects until the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stop. ing. That is, the variation display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is based on the length of time until reach occurrence, and the length of time from reach start to end is the same regardless of normal reach A or B. It is set to.

  On the other hand, although non-reach A, non-reach B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super reach C are set in the fluctuation display time table at the time of out-of-the-box, The probability of occurrence is different. That is, when out of reach, reach random number counter C3 is set to reach non-occurrence in the case of 0 to 59, in the case of reach to 60 to 99 is set to reach occurrence, the probability of reach occurrence is set lower than at the time of big hit There is. The reach non-occurrence A is set as the reach non-occurrence A when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 24 when the reach non-occurrence, and the reach non-occurrence B is set as 25 to 49.

  Out of reach occurrence at the time of out of reach, reach random number counter C3 is set to normal reach in case of 60 to 89, and in case of 90 to 99 is set to super reach, the incidence rate of super reach among reach occurrence is from big hit Is also set low. In normal reach, the case where the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as normal reach A, and 25 to 49 are set as normal reach B. In addition, in the case of the super reach, the case where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 15 is set as the super reach A, the case of 16 to 33 is set as the super reach B, and the case of 34 to 49 is set as the super reach C It is done.

  In the present specification, the fluctuation display time will be described in relation to the display on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation display time (operation period) refers to the fluctuation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the start of the fluctuation display. In addition to the time until the end of the variable display, the so-called fixed time in which the variable display ends and the stop result (game result) is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the variable display time setting process (FIG. 12), after obtaining one of the variable display time tables at step S702 or step S703, the variable display time table obtained at step S704 and each parameter The fluctuation display time (operation period) corresponding to (reach random number counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS, number of reserved memories N) is set in the fluctuation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process of the variable display time is ended.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game is determined using the game result, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS as parameters. As the fluctuation patterns to be determined, as described above, reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C are set. Furthermore, the pending number correspondence pattern in which the pending storage number N is added as a parameter and the pending number non-matching pattern in which the pending storage number N is not added as a parameter are set, and the variation patterns of reach non-occurrence B and normal reach B described above Is the hold number correspondence pattern, and the other variation patterns are hold number non-corresponding patterns.

  In addition, about the setting method of the fluctuation display time of each game time, it is not limited to said thing. For example, when the jackpot is not included, the reach may be generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, the reach occurrence and the type thereof may be determined using not only the reach random number counter C3 but another counter. As another counter, for example, a stop pattern counter that determines a stop symbol of a predetermined line (for example, the middle line L2) can be considered if it is out, and if it is a big hit, a symbol to stop and display the same symbol combination is determined A big hit symbol counter etc. can be considered. In this case, for example, the reach random number counter C3 may determine the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, and the other counter may determine the type.

  Further, the variation display time may be different depending on the height of the support mode or the height of the success or failure lottery mode. For example, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, it may be configured to be easy to select a short variation display time even if it is the same game result or a long variation display time is easy to be selected It is also good. In the high frequency support mode, since the hold information is obtained relatively frequently, it is possible to realize a smooth game by making it easy to select a short variation display time. In this case, it is preferable to add a process of determining the level of the support mode in the setting process of the variable display time, and acquire the variable display time table corresponding to the support mode.

  Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 11), after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step S608, the fluctuation command and the type command are set in step S609. The fluctuation command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on fluctuation display time. Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the category command includes information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on outlier results, etc., as information on game results.

  The variation command and type command set in step S609 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the game turn based on the received command for variation and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The contents of this effect include the fluctuation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41, and the fluctuation display mode of the determined symbol is output from the presentation control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Ru. In the display control device 212, based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the fluctuation display of the symbols corresponding to each game number is performed. Thereafter, after the variation display of the pattern is started in the main display section 43 in step S610, the present variation start processing is ended.

  Returning to the explanation of the game number control process (FIG. 9), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display mode, the game number progression process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the processing for game progression, first, at step S406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S608). Also, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) is activated.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, processing for variable display is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode in the result display unit according to the current game run is changed. Thereafter, the game play control process ends.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, fluctuation end processing is executed in step S408. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any one of the steps S605 to S607, and the main display unit 43 displays the pattern aspect corresponding to the information. The display control of the unit 43 is performed.

  In the following step S409, a change end command is set. The change end command set here is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 ends the effect in the game play based on the received change end command. In addition, the fluctuation end command is transmitted from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the fluctuation end command to determine and display the combination of the final stop symbols in the game run (final Stop display). After execution of step S409, the game number control process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the gaming state transition process executed in step S305 of the normal process will be described.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern of one game cycle is finished. When it is not the timing when the variable display ends, the main game state transition processing ends.

  If it is the timing when the variable display has ended, it is determined in step S803 whether the game result of the current game play corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the random variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If any of the above-described flags is stored, start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start process, an opening standby time (start standby period) for waiting without starting opening of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 for opening in the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the standby time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the standby time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) is executed.

  In the subsequent step S805, start processing of round display for notifying of the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the start process of the round display, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the round count is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the contents of the confirmed round number are output to the round display section RS in the main display section 43. Thereby, the round display unit RS displays the information on the round related to the output.

  In the following step S806, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that a display (for example, a moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  In the subsequent step S807, after the external signal setting process is executed, the present gaming state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set as the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. You can understand what you did.

  On the other hand, if the open / close execution mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, this game state transition processing is ended as it is. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the special winning opening / closing process is executed in step S809. In the special winning opening and closing process, the large winning opening 32a is controlled to open and close according to the unit opening time of each round and the waiting time between rounds, and the number of winnings to the large winning opening 32a reaches the upper limit winning number in each round If it is, the variable prize drive section 32c is drive-controlled so as to close the special winning opening 32a even if the unit opening time has not elapsed.

  After executing the special winning opening / closing process in step S809, it is determined in step S810 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0", and whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed in step S811 It is determined whether or not. When the value of the round counter area RC is not "0" or when the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the present gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S812.

  Here, the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores the probable variation jackpot flag. If the probability variation big hit flag is stored, a flag erasing process for erasing information for specifying a game state is executed in step S902. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are erased, and if they are not stored already, the state is maintained. In the following step S903, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S904, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a special advantageous state). After executing the process of step S904, the present migration process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S901 that the probable variation jackpot flag is not stored, the flag erasing process is performed in step S905. Thereafter, in step S906, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S907, "100" is set in the number-of-playings counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. Thereby, the gaming state shifts to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode ends when the game play continues 100 times, and thereafter, it shifts to the normal gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. After the process of step S 907 is performed, the present transition process is ended.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 14), after the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode of step S812 is finished, the round display termination process is executed in step S813. In the process, the display control of the round display unit RS is ended so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. Thereafter, in step S814, the processing for ending the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition processing is ended. In the closing process of the open / close execution mode, the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is erased.

<For notice of pending>
Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the hold notification corresponding to the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 has a predetermined probability at a timing prior to the start of the game cycle related to the hold information. It is configured to be Such a suspension notice is performed by executing predetermined control in the effect control device 82 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81. The electrical configuration and processing configuration relating to the suspension notice will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 16, an MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A certain RAM 244 and an interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. The same applies to the MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command described later is received. Also, a game play control command (information for game play control) such as a change start command, a type command, and a change end command is received. Also, it receives an opening / closing execution mode command (opening / closing execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command.

  On the output side of the MPU 242, as described above, the reserved light emitting units 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected. In addition, the display control device 212 is connected.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256 and a video RAM 257 are mounted. There is.

  The MPU 252 is a hold display control command (hold display control information) for performing hold display control from the effect control device 82, a game turn control command (game turn control information) for changing the symbol display, An open / close execution mode command (information for open / close execution mode) for displaying a moving image in the open / close execution mode is received. Then, the received command is analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received command, and control of the VDP 255 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 255) is performed.

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 252 executes various programs. These work data, flags and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is formed into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining the expression color in each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store image data etc. in a shared manner in each character ROM 256. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 256 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 253.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<About the process about pending notice>
Next, a process relating to a suspension notice performed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. As the processing relating to the suspension notice on the main control device 81 side, a confirmation process (step S206) for the suspension notice in the winning process for the operation port (FIG. 7) is set. This process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6), and is executed at the timing when a winning on the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs.

  Hereinafter, the confirmation process for the suspension notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the jackpot random number counter C1 is the hold information stored in the hold area RE, which is the hold information acquired in step S205 based on the current winning of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. Value (information for big hit judgment), value of big hit type counter C2 (information for big hit type judgment), value of reach random number counter C3 (information for judgment of reach occurrence) value of fluctuation type counter CS (fluctuation type Information on the

  In the following step S1002, it is determined whether or not the hold high probability flag is stored in the RAM 204.

  Here, the high probability flag for holding will be described. While the hold information stored in the hold area RE is sequentially digested, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed at a timing different from the digest timing of the hold information. In this case, a situation may occur in which the drawing mode differs depending on the timing at which the predetermined holding information is subjected to the confirmation process for holding notification and the timing at which the holding information is digested. For example, even if the drawing mode is the low probability mode at the timing when the predetermined holding information becomes the target of the confirmation process for holding notification, the probability variation jackpot between that timing and the timing when the predetermined holding information is digested When the corresponding hold information is digested, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. The suspension high probability flag is a flag for grasping the change of the lottery mode by the MPU 202, and reflecting the content thereof in the judgment of success or failure in the confirmation processing for the suspension notice.

  By providing a high probability flag for holding, the confirmation process for holding notice in the correct lottery mode is also performed when the lottery mode changes with respect to the held information to be subsequently digested by the held information stored in the holding area RE. It becomes possible to do it and to grasp grasp of a yes or no decision correctly.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, a success or failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1004, a propriety determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed.

  After execution of step S1003 or step S1004, a process of temporarily storing the determination result information of the pass / fail determination in step S1003 or step S1004 in step S1005 in the determination result storage area provided in the RAM 204 is executed. As a result, by grasping the judgment result information stored in the judgment result storage area, it is possible to grasp the judgment result of the current judgment of acceptance or rejection.

  In the subsequent step S1006, it is determined whether or not the current hold information corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the determination result information is the jackpot information and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, the flag is set by storing "1" in the high probability flag for suspension in step S1007.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1006, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the current hold information corresponds to the normal jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the determination result information is the big hit information and the value of the big hit type counter C2 is a value that generally corresponds to the big hit result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the high probability flag for holding is cleared to "0" in step S1009.

  If one of steps S1007 and S1009 is not executed or if the determination in step S1008 is negative, in step S1010, the process of setting the hold command is performed, and the check process for the hold notification is ended.

  The setting process of the hold command executed in step S1010 is a process for causing the effect control device 82 to grasp information of the game result and information of the variable display time as the contents of the hold information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, in step S1101, a process of grasping information on the game result among the hold information acquired this time, that is, the values of the big hit random number counter C1 and the big hit type counter C2 Run. In the subsequent step S1102, a process of grasping information on the fluctuation display time, that is, the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS among the suspension information acquired this time is executed. Then, in step S1103, processing for setting a hold command including the information grasped in steps S1101 and S1102 as an output target to the effect control device 82 is executed, and setting processing of the hold command is ended. The hold command is output to the effect control device 82 in step S301 of the normal process (FIG. 8). It should be noted that instead of setting the values of the counters C1, C2, C3, CS, etc. as information on the game result and information on the fluctuation display time in the hold command, information on the game result and the fluctuation display time itself is set It is good also as composition. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent acts in which the values of the counters C1, C2, C3 and CS are read from the command input / output between the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82. The same applies to other commands (variation command, type command, fluctuation end command, etc.) input / output between the main control device 81 on the main side and the presentation control device 82 on the sub side. It is preferable to set information set from the value of the counter, not the value itself, to these commands. Even with these commands, if the value of the main random number counter involved in the player's profit is output to the sub side, it is possible that the random number update timing is grasped and an illegal action is performed. is there.

  Next, processing relating to the suspension notice on the side of the effect control device 82 will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control device 82 is roughly classified into a suspension control command handling process and a special suspension notice control process. The hold control command handling process is a process for handling a hold control command (hold command or shift command) from the main control device 81. The special hold notice control process is a special hold set in the hold notice. It is a process for controlling an advance notice. Each of these processes is set to be activated every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec). Then, in the effect control device 82, in addition to the above-described processes, the variable display control process for controlling an effect for game play is set. The variation display control process is also set to be activated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, the suspension control command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether a hold command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, in step S1202, the secondary storage storage number SN stored in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S1203, a pending display setting process is executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as pre-reading effect which is a kind of pending notice, an effect is set in which the pending image P to be displayed in the pending display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 is made to correspond to the pending information. A plurality of types of images P for holding are set corresponding to the jackpot expectation of the holding information, and as the pre-reading effect, the images P for holding corresponding to the jackpot expectation of the holding information are displayed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20 (a), the first holding image P1 (A), the second holding image P2 (B), and the third holding image P3 (C), as the holding image P, The fourth storage image P4 (D) and the fifth storage image P5 (E) are set, and the respective storage images P1 to P5 are set to have different colors and shapes, for example, so that they can be distinguished. ing. In the present embodiment, for example, the first holding image P1 is rainbow color, the second holding image P2 is gold, the third holding image P3 is red, the fourth holding image P4 is yellow, and the fifth holding image P5. Is set to display in blue. In the figure, the hatch settings are displayed differently.

  In the hold display setting process of step S1203, a process for setting the hold image P corresponding to the received hold command out of the respective hold images P1 to P5 is performed. In this case, the hold display pattern table stored in the ROM 243 is acquired, and the corresponding hold images P1 to P5 are set from the information included in the hold command. As the hold display pattern table, as shown in FIG. 21, a hold display pattern table at the time of big hit and a hold display pattern table at the time of removal are set. And based on the information (big hit random number counter C1) of the game result among the information included in the hold command, it is judged whether or not the hold information corresponding to the hold command is a big hit result, with the big hit result In some cases, a big hit hold display pattern table is obtained, and otherwise (if it is a fallout result), a hold display pattern table when off is obtained.

  In the big hit reserve display pattern table, the reserve image P1 according to various fluctuation patterns (reach non occurrence A, reach non occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super reach C) The selectivity of ~ P5 is set to be different. The first holding image P1 is set to have a low probability of being selected most, and is set to have a low probability of being selected in the order of P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5. In addition, when Super Reach A to C is compared with Normal Reach A, B, the image for holding on the side with a smaller number is more easily selected in Super Reach A to C, and Normal Reach A, B and reach non-occurrence A, B In comparison, the normal reach A and B are set so that the image for holding on the side with the smaller number is more easily selected.

  Super Reach A is set so that Super Reach C is most easily selected, and C, B, and A are selected in the order of Super Reach A to C. . In the normal reach A and B, the normal reach A is selected more easily than the normal reach B, and in the reach non-occurrence A and B, the reach non-occurrence A is selected more easily than the reach non-occurrence B. Note that in the reach non-occurrence B, the first holding image P1 is set so as not to be selected.

  The same variation pattern (reach non occurrence A, reach non occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super in comparison with the big hit pending display pattern table) Even in the case of reach C), it is set so that it is difficult to select the holding image on the smaller number side. For example, the first holding image P1 to the third holding image P3 are not selected in reach non-occurrence A and B at the time of detachment, and the fourth holding image P4 and the fifth holding image P5 are for the fifth holding The image P5 is easier to select than the fourth image P4 for holding. Further, the first reserve image P1 and the second reserve image P2 are not selected in the normal reach A and B at the time of detachment, and the fifth reserve image P5 is the third reserve image P3 to the fifth reserve image P5. It is the easiest to select, and it is easy to select in the order of P5, P4 and P3. Furthermore, the first holding image P1 is set so as not to be selected at the time of deviation even in any variation pattern.

  That is, in the suspension display pattern table at the time of the big hit and the suspension display pattern table at the time of the disconnection, the image for suspension with a smaller number is more easily selected as the jackpot expectation degree is higher. A small holding image is set to be easily selected. Therefore, by displaying the hold image on the smaller number side, the player expects the jackpot result in the game turn corresponding to the hold image, and the game judgment regarding which the pass / fail judgment is held is It is possible to preferably raise the attention degree before the execution of the game time.

  On the other hand, with regard to the hold information in which the hold image on the side with the larger number is displayed, it can be predicted that the result is not the jackpot result but the outlier. Therefore, the game times related to such holding information can be game times awaiting for the player. In particular, when an effect pattern having a long variable display time is selected in such a game, an effect is performed for a long time despite the player predicting that the effect is an out-of-place result, and the effect May feel redundant. Further, with regard to the hold information to be subjected to the determination of a decision after the hold information corresponding to the hold image on the side where the number is larger, for example, when the hold image for which the number is smaller is displayed, etc. While the degree of attention to the game times pertaining to the hold information on the smaller side increases, the effect of making the game times pertaining to the hold information on the side with large numbers feel redundant is considered to be enhanced. On the other hand, when the effect pattern with a short variation display time is selected in the game times that are predicted to be a jackpot result, the result is different despite the fact that it is predicted to be a jackpot result There is a possibility that the result may be suspected. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the special hold notice is set as a kind of the hold notice, in order to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience due to the lengthening of the variable display time.

  That is, after the hold display setting process is executed in step S1203 in the hold control command corresponding process (FIG. 19), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether the hold notification counter YK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is less than "3". The hold notice counter YK is a counter for adjusting the number of executions of the special hold notice.

  Here, the special suspension notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (d).

  In the special holding notice, which is a kind of holding notice, a predetermined holding image is set to change to another holding image based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. More specifically, the predetermined holding image is changed to a holding image having a smaller number than the predetermined holding image based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

  Specifically, the condition for changing the image for suspension is a condition related to the passage of time from the start to the end of the special suspension notice. The special hold notice is started from the start of the display of the hold image, that is, the acquisition of the hold information, and in the game turn of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the lower figure pattern row Z3 is displayed from high speed It is set to end at the timing of switching to the low speed fluctuation display. Then, a predetermined set time is displayed at the start of the special hold notice, and the predetermined set time elapses before the special hold notice ends, that is, the hold that is the target of the special hold notice. The image for suspension displayed about the suspension information which is the target of the special suspension notice by the lapse of this predetermined set time before the lower figure pattern row Z3 switches to the low speed fluctuation display in the game time of the information Changes to a holding image on the side of a smaller number than the displayed holding image. In the following description, the condition for changing the image for suspension in the special suspension notice is also referred to as a special condition.

  As the special hold notice, for example, a time display for displaying the predetermined set time above the hold image so as to be displayed corresponding to the hold image of the third unit hold display area Ga3 in FIG. An area GE is set, and the time display image Gp is displayed in the time display area GE. In this time display area GE, the time display image Gp and the hold image are displayed, for example, with a balloon so that the player can recognize which hold image is the hold information for which the special hold notification is to be made. Are displayed in association with each other. This time display image Gp is associated with a predetermined set time, and is displayed so as to be able to be updated in, for example, “68.40” and 0.01 sec units, and counts down every 0.01 sec from the start time to the end time of the special hold notice. The display is updated in the form.

  In the special hold notice, the fourth hold image P4 is displayed uniformly at the start of the special hold notice, and the fourth hold image P4 has a smaller number than that of the hold image (for example, the third hold). It can be changed to the image P3). For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), in the game time of the suspension information which is the target of the special suspension notice, the time before the pattern row Z3 below switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display When the display image Gp is "00.00" and the special condition is satisfied, the image for suspension for which the special suspension notice is given in the display area for execution Gb changes from the fourth image for suspension P4 to the third image for suspension P3. Change.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), in the game time of the suspension information which is the target of the special suspension notice, the time before the pattern row Z3 below switches from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display When the display image Gp can not be "00.00" and the special condition is not established, the image for suspension for which the special suspension notice is targeted in the display area for execution Gb is for the fourth suspension. It remains unchanged as image P4.

  In this case, the time display image Gp at the end of the high-speed fluctuation display is continuously displayed even after the end of the special suspension notice, that is, even after the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower figure design row Z3 is ended. However, the countdown of the time display image Gp is stopped, and the remaining time at the end of the special suspension notice is continuously displayed as it is.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the image for suspension displayed as the special suspension notice changes to the image for suspension on the side with a high jackpot expectation (the side with a smaller number) based on the establishment of the special condition. An effect can be produced as to whether the jackpot expectation level has increased for the hold information corresponding to the changed hold image. And, because it is decided that a predetermined set time elapses from the start to the end of the special hold notice, the special condition is that the variation display time of the game cycle from the start to the end of the special hold notice is longer The set time of time becomes easy to pass, and the special condition becomes easy to hold. Therefore, as a player, when the special hold notice is started, it is expected that the variation display time of the game times which is digested by the end of the special hold notice is long.

  Here, setting a predetermined effect (for example, a super reach display or the like) having a high jackpot expectation degree during game play is considered to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game. And, as the predetermined effect is made more flashy, the degree of attention is considered to increase. However, even if the rendition of the game time becomes flashy and the rendition continues for a long time, the game result does not change, and for a player who wants to know the game result as such, such It may not be desirable to prolong the production.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, as already described, the jackpot expectation can be predicted from the relevance to the suspension notice, and there may be cases where the jackpot can not be expected just by the occurrence of a predetermined effect. . That is, for example, even if the spar reach occurs in the game time when the reserve preview image P of the reserve notice described above is the side with a large hit expectation, the reserve image P with a high jackpot expectation degree As compared with the case where the super reach occurs in the game time which is, it can not be expected to the jackpot. Therefore, if super reach is developed in the case where it is predicted that the result is out like this, the time between them is simply a waiting time for the player, and the inconvenience due to the longer rendering is more It can be noticeable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the variation display time of the game times to be digested during the period when the special suspension notice is performed is long, the special conditions are easily established, thereby the variation display time of the game times It is possible to avoid the inconvenience due to the long time.

  Returning to the explanation of the hold control command handling process (FIG. 19), when the hold notice counter is less than “3” in step S 1204, the special hold notice setting process is executed in step S 1205. The special hold advance notice setting process is a process of performing various settings for the effect when executing the above-mentioned special hold advance notice. Hereinafter, the special hold notification setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, based on the information included in the hold command received this time, it is determined whether the hold information triggered by the hold command is any of the jackpot results. If the result is any of the jackpot results, the process advances to step S1302 to execute stored processing of holding information.

  The hold information grasping process of step S1302 is a process of grasping the fluctuation display time of the hold information stored in the hold storage area 250 provided in the RAM 244. The storage area 250 for storage is a storage area corresponding to the storage sphere storage area 232 on the main control device 81 side, and can store information included in the received suspension command in association with the respective suspension information.

  In the hold information grasping process of step S1302, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, it is determined in step S1401 whether unconfirmed hold information exists in the hold storage area 250 or not. If unconfirmed hold information exists, the variable display time table is acquired in step S1402, and a process of grasping the variable display time for unconfirmed hold information is executed in step S1403. Here, the same variable display time table as the variable display time table (FIG. 13) on the main control device 81 side is stored in the various table storage area 245 in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82. The information on the fluctuation display time included in the hold command, that is, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS are stored in the hold storage area 250 in a hold increase process (step S1208 in FIG. 19) described later. Therefore, based on the information stored in the storage area for suspension 250 or the information included in the received suspension command, and the information of the various table storage area 245, the variation control display time of the suspension information also on the effect control device 82 side It is possible to grasp.

  However, as already described, the number-on-hold pattern and the number-on-off pattern are set in the effect pattern in each game number, and in the case of the number-on-number pattern, the hold memory at the start of the game number The variable display time is determined based on the number N (the number of secondary side reserved storages SN). Then, the pending storage number N at the start timing of the pending information grasping process (FIG. 23) may be different from the pending storage number N at the start timing of the game times of the stored pending information. Therefore, there is a possibility that the variable display time can not be specified (held) in step S1403.

  Therefore, in step S1404, it is determined based on the processing result of step S1403 whether or not the fluctuation display time can be identified. If it can be specified, that is, if the game times related to the pending information confirmed this time is the effect pattern of the pending number non-correspondence pattern, the process returns to step S1401, determines the presence or absence of unconfirmed pending information, and unconfirmed pending If there is information, the process advances to step S1402 again, and if there is no unconfirmed hold information, the hold information grasping process is ended.

  In addition, as a specific example of the determination process of step S1401, for example, a counter for confirmation is set, and the counter is incremented by one each time the determination of step S1401 is performed. Then, the hold information is stored in the area of the hold storage area 250 corresponding to the value of the counter (for example, the area where the hold information to be subjected to the second pass / fail judgment is stored if the value of the counter is 2) Check if it is If the hold information is stored in the area corresponding to the value of the counter, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, and if the hold information is not stored in the area corresponding to the value of the counter, the hold information is stored in the subsequent areas. Is not stored in step S1401. When the determination in step S1401 is negative, the counter is set to the initial value (1). This makes it possible to perform confirmation processing from the first area of the holding storage area 250 in the next processing cycle.

  If it is determined in step S1404 that the variable display time can not be specified, that is, if the game number relating to the hold information checked this time is the effect pattern of the hold number correspondence pattern, the process proceeds to step S1405. After storing the time indeterminate flag in the flag storage area 234, the process of grasping the hold information is ended. The time indeterminate flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern is included.

  Returning to the description of the special hold advance notice setting process (FIG. 22), after executing the hold information grasping process in step S1302, whether or not the fluctuation display time of the hold information already stored in step S1303 can be specified Execute processing to determine Specifically, it is determined whether or not a time indeterminate flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244.

  If the time identification impossible flag is not stored in step S1303 and the variable display time of the stored suspension information can be specified, the effect setting process is executed when the time identification is possible in step S1304. Then, the special hold notification setting process ends. Further, when the time indeterminable flag is stored in step S1303 and the fluctuation display time of the stored hold information can not be identified, the effect setting process when the time indeterminacy is impossible is performed in step S1305. After execution, the special hold notification setting process ends. On the other hand, if in step S1301 the hold information related to the hold command received this time is not a jackpot result but an outlier, the effect setting process at the time of out is executed in step S1306. The hold notification setting process ends.

  Hereinafter, the effect setting process when time specification is possible in step S1304, the effect setting process when time specification is impossible in step S1305, and the effect setting process when out of step S1306 will be described.

<Effect setting process when time can be specified>
First, the effect setting process when time can be specified will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1501, the special hold notification table for which time specification is possible is acquired from the special hold notification table for the big hit from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. In step S1501, the effect pattern counter EK is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the special hold notification table at the time of which time specification is possible has set therein a time specification pattern, a normal pattern, and a premier pattern as the contents of the special hold notification. The contents of these effects will be described together with the description of each processing. The effect pattern counter EK is, for example, a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one at a predetermined cycle within a range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in step S1502, based on the special hold notification table at the time of which time can be specified acquired in step S1501 and the effect pattern counter EK, the contents of the effect of the special hold notification of this time are the normal pattern (EK = It is determined whether or not 500 to 699).

  In the case of the normal pattern, the process proceeds to step S1503, and timer input processing at the time of the normal pattern is executed as processing for setting effects for the normal pattern.

  Here, timer input processing at the time of the normal pattern will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1601, a process of setting a summary of the special hold notice is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal pattern is selected as the special hold notice, the outline of the special hold notice as the normal pattern is first set, and then the time display area GE is started at the start of the special hold notice. A detailed predetermined set time to be displayed as the time display image Gp is set. Then, in this step S 1601, as a summary of the suspension notice to be set, the number N of storages pending (sub-storage number SN of the secondary side) immediately before the reception of the current suspension command, that is, just before acquisition of suspension information Whether or not the special hold notice is executed, based on the special hold counter TK provided in and the special hold notice table (FIG. 27A) stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and shown in FIG. And, when executing a special hold notice, a rough length (short time, medium time, long time) of a predetermined set time is set. The special hold counter TK is, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one at a predetermined cycle within a range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27A, when the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 0 in the special pending notification table at the time of big win (pending storage after the current pending information is obtained) When the number N is 1) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 699, the special hold notice is not executed. Also, if the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 0, and the special pending counter TK is 700 to 999, the special pending notification is executed, among which the special pending counter TK In the case of 700 to 799, the predetermined set time is set to be a medium time, and in the case of 800 to 999, it is set to be a short time.

  Also, the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 1 (when the number of pending storages N after acquisition of the current pending information is 2), and the special pending counter TK is 0 to 399. In some cases, the special hold notice is set not to be executed. Also, if the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 1, and the special pending counter TK is 400 to 999, the special pending notification is executed, among which the special pending counter TK In the case of 400 to 499, the predetermined setting time is set to be a long time, in the case of 500 to 699, it is set to be a medium time, and in the case of 700 to 999, it is set to be a short time.

  When the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 2 (when the number of pending storages N after acquisition of the current pending information is 3) and the special pending counter TK is 0 to 299 Is set to not execute the special hold notice. Also, if the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 2, and the special pending counter TK is 300 to 999, the special pending notification is executed, among which the special pending counter TK Is 300 to 599, the predetermined setting time is a long time, and if it is 600 to 899, it is a medium time, and if it is 900 to 999, a short time is set.

  When the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 3 (when the number of pending storages N after acquisition of the current pending information is 4) and the special pending counter TK is 0 to 199 Is set to not execute the special hold notice. Also, if the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 3, and the special pending counter TK is 200 to 999, the special pending notification is executed, among which the special pending counter TK Is 200 to 549, the predetermined set time is long, 550 to 899 is medium, and 900 to 999 is short.

  That is, in the special hold notification table, the smaller the number N of pending storages immediately before acquisition of the hold information, the lower the probability of executing the special hold notification. In other words, the larger the number of stored hold information, the higher the probability of executing the special hold notice. Since the time from the start to the end of the special holding notice may be longer as the number of the holding information is larger, the possibility of the special condition being established is higher. Therefore, by performing as described above, it is suppressed that the special suspension notice that the special condition is hard to be established is generated.

  In the timer input process (FIG. 26) at the time of the normal pattern, after setting the outline of the suspension notice in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether to execute the special suspension notice based on the processing result in step S1601. judge. When it is determined not to execute, this timer input processing is ended as it is. If it is determined to execute, the process proceeds to step S1603, and the rough setting time set in step S1601, the time selection counter JK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. Based on the stored jackpot time selection table (FIG. 27B), the details of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice are set. The time selection counter JK is, for example, a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one at a predetermined cycle within a range of 0 to 19 and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0.

  After setting the detailed set time in step S1603, in step S1604, numerical information corresponding to the set time set in step S1603 is input to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Execute the process to After the process of step S1604 is performed, the timer input process is ended. The timer counter T is a counter for managing subtraction and update of a predetermined set time in the special hold notice.

  Returning to the description of the effect setting process (FIG. 24) when the time specification is possible, after performing the process of step S1503, it is set in step S1504 that the special hold notification is set to be performed in the process of step S1503. Determine if When it is set to non-execution, the main effect setting process is ended as it is. If it is set to execute, the process advances to step S1505.

  That is, in this embodiment, the process (step S1601 in the timer input process at the time of the normal pattern in step S1503) of determining whether or not to execute the special suspension notice is a process (step S1501) for setting the effect pattern of the special suspension notice. And step S1502). Here, as a configuration of setting processing of the normal effect in the field of gaming machines, after performing processing of whether or not to execute the effect, when performing the effect, the effect pattern of the effect is set after that The configuration to perform the processing is common. This is because if setting processing of the rendering pattern is performed even when the rendering is not performed, useless processing will be performed by that amount, which may cause complication of the processing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the process of setting the rendering pattern, processing of whether to perform rendering is performed. If it is configured to determine the presence or absence of presentation execution at an early stage, the difference in the number of processing between the case of presentation non-execution and the case of presentation execution may be large. In this case, the difference in time required for processing also increases, and even in the case of effect execution, there may be a delay in the timing of effect generation, and the presence or absence of effect execution may be realized before the effect occurs. . If this is done, there is a concern that it will not be possible to suitably provide the effects of the prepared effects. Therefore, the difference between the number of processes and the processing time can be reduced by configuring the determination of the presence or absence of the effect execution after the setting process of the effect pattern, and the possibility that the presence or absence of the effect execution will be realized before the start of the effect Can be reduced, and an effect of improving the degree of attention by executing the special suspension notice can be suitably achieved.

  If it is determined in step S1504 that the special hold notification is to be performed, the process advances to step S1505 to acquire a jackpot subtraction pattern table. As the subtraction pattern table for the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 28A, as a subtraction pattern of the value input to the timer counter T in step S1604, default subtraction, shift subtraction, and specific timing subtraction are performed. One of them is set to be selected based on the value of the subtraction counter GK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244.

  The default subtraction is a method in which the subtraction of the time display image Gp is subtracted in accordance with the lapse of the actual time in the special suspension notice, and for example, when 1 sec elapses, the display of the time display image Gp is also subtracted by 1 sec and updated. Ru. The subtraction unit is 0.01 sec corresponding to the minimum display unit of the time display image Gp. The shift subtraction is a subtraction method in which a predetermined number is subtracted at the timing when one game cycle is finished and the hold information is shifted to the lower area in the hold ball storage area 232, and this shift subtraction is selected. Is the subtraction in addition to the subtraction by default subtraction. The specific timing subtraction is a subtraction method of subtracting a predetermined number based on the fact that the display of the time display image Gp has become a predetermined predetermined display time and has become a specific timing, and this specific timing subtraction is selected. Is the subtraction in addition to the subtraction by default subtraction.

  The subtraction counter GK is, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one at a predetermined cycle within a range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. More specifically, for the subtraction pattern table, default subtraction is selected when the subtraction counter GK is 0 to 249, shift subtraction is selected if it is 250 to 699, and it is specified if it is 700 to 999. Timing subtraction is set to be selected. In step S1506, the subtraction pattern of the timer counter T is set based on these parameters.

  After the process of step S1506 is executed, it is determined in step S1507 whether the subtraction pattern set in step S1506 is shift subtraction. In the case of shift subtraction, in step S1508, a process of storing shift flags in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed. The shift flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that shift subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1507, or after the process of step S1508 has been executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the subtraction pattern set in step S1505 is specific timing subtraction. In the case of the specific timing subtraction, in step S1510, processing of storing the specific timing flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 244 is executed. The specific timing flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the specific timing subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1509, or after the process of step S1510 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, the special hold command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The special hold command includes information of the effect contents of the special hold notice set in each of the above processes, and is output to the display control device 212 in the command output process activated in a predetermined cycle. The display control device 212 that has received the special hold command controls the symbol display device 41 such that the special hold notice is displayed on the display screen G based on the information included in the command. After the process of step S1511 is executed, the effect setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the effect pattern of the special on-hold notice is not the normal pattern, the process advances to step S1512, and it is determined whether it is a time identification pattern. If it is a time specific pattern, the process advances to step S1513 to execute timer input processing for the time specific pattern.

  In this timer input process, based on the respective hold information stored in the hold storage area 250, the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time, and the remaining fluctuation display time in the currently-played game run. The time from the start to the end of the special hold notice is grasped, and the timer counter T is set based on the grasped information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, it is first determined in step S1701 whether unconfirmed holding information exists in the holding storage area 250. As a specific configuration for confirmation of unconfirmed suspension information, the same configuration as the configuration of step S1401 can be considered. If unconfirmed hold information is present, a variation display time table at the time of removal is acquired in step S1702. In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of holding information corresponding to any of the jackpot results in the holding ball storage area 232 (storage area for holding 250), an event occurs in which the special holding notice based on these jackpot results is duplicated It does not have composition. In addition, when there are a plurality of pieces of suspension information corresponding to the jackpot results, the special suspension notice can be executed only for the suspension information to be subjected to the determination of the first. Although the process for doing this will be described later, since it is set in this way, each piece of suspension information grasped in the timer input process at the time of the specific pattern of time is an out result. Therefore, in step S1702, a process of acquiring a variation display time table (see FIG. 13B) at the time of removal is executed. Then, in step S1703, processing is executed to grasp the fluctuation display time of the hold information based on the fluctuation display time table acquired in step S1702. In the subsequent step S1704, a process of adding the fluctuation display time grasped in step S1703 to the timer counter T is executed.

  After the process of step S1704 is executed, the process returns to step S1701, and it is determined whether unconfirmed suspension information exists. If it exists, the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 are repeated. If unconfirmed hold information does not exist, the process proceeds to step S1705, and the fluctuation display time table (see FIG. 13A) at the time of big hit is acquired in order to grasp the fluctuation display time corresponding to the hold information acquired this time Execute the process to In the following step S1706, the effect pattern is grasped on the basis of the fluctuation display time table acquired in step S1705, and the time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower drawing pattern row Z3 is finished in the game round related to the hold information is grasped Execute the process

  Here, in the present embodiment, from the information on the game result and the information on the variable display time, at least the pattern of the time until the high-speed variable display of the lower pattern row Z3 ends among the effect patterns of the corresponding game times. It is possible to grasp. Specifically for this configuration, in various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82, effect pattern tables for determining effect patterns of the respective game times are stored. And this effect pattern table is set so that the pattern of time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the pattern row Z3 in the lower figure ends is uniquely determined from the information of the game result and the information of the fluctuation display time. In step S1706, based on the effect pattern table, the time until the high-speed variation display of the lower row design pattern Z3 ends is grasped. In this effect pattern table, in addition to the time until the high-speed variation display of the lower row pattern row Z3 ends, detailed effect patterns of each game round are also defined. Then, in the fluctuation start processing in the fluctuation display control processing described later, the setting of the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is performed based on the information of presence / absence of reach, information of fluctuation display time, information of gaming result, etc. Based on the information on the stop result and the information on the variable display time, the details of the corresponding effect pattern are read out from the effect pattern table, and set as the effect pattern in the current game run.

  That is, the process of step S1706 is a process of specifying the effect pattern of the game turn at a timing earlier than the start of the game turn, and the setting process (processing for variation start) of the effect pattern to be performed at the start of the game turn It is performed at timing earlier than the start timing of the cycle. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect according to the effect pattern of the game play at a timing earlier than when the game play is performed. And, in this embodiment, since the effect pattern is specified at a timing earlier than the start of the game turn using the effect pattern table for setting the effect pattern at the start of the game turn, the effect pattern is selected. Simplification of the configuration to identify first is achieved.

  In addition, the structure for specifying the presentation pattern of a game times in the timing before the start of a game times is not limited to said thing, Another structure may be sufficient. For example, the effect pattern table may be prepared separately for the table for the time until the high-speed change display ends and the table for which the detailed effect pattern is set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which specifies not a part of effect pattern of a game times but all in an earlier timing. Furthermore, the time until the end of the high-speed variable display is determined using a counter or the like is determined by lottery or the like, this lottery or the like is performed at the earlier timing, and the details of the lottery or the like are taken The effect pattern may be determined. That is, if the effect pattern is determined at the start of the game, it is sufficient if at least a part of the effect pattern to be determined can be specified at a timing earlier than that, and the effect pattern is at the start of the game If the configuration is determined at a timing earlier than that, it is possible to specify the effect pattern determined at the earlier timing, and set the effect based on the determined effect pattern at the start of the game round. Good.

  Then, in step S1707, processing for adding the time grasped in step S1706 to the timer counter T is executed.

  After executing the process of step S1707, in step S1708, a process of grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the currently-played game play is executed. Incidentally, in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, there is provided an elapsed counter for grasping the progress of the fluctuation display time of the game play being executed, and the numerical information corresponding to the fluctuation display time at the start of the game play is this It is input to the progress counter. Also, this progress counter is decremented and updated every predetermined cycle, and becomes 0 at the end of the game run. In step S1708, by grasping the numerical information of the progress counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time of the game play being executed. After the process of step S1708, in step S1709, a process of adding the remaining time grasped in step S1708 to the timer counter T is executed.

  After executing the process of step S1709, the adjustment process is performed for a predetermined time in step S1710, and then the timer input process is ended. In this predetermined time adjustment process, adjustment is performed by increasing or decreasing the predetermined set time specified in steps S1701 to S1709. That is, by increasing or decreasing the specified actual time by lottery or the like, it becomes possible to give randomness to whether or not the predetermined set time elapses before the high-speed fluctuation end, that is, the success or failure of the special condition.

  Note that the time to be increased or decreased in step S1710 is not limited to the configuration in which the time for increasing or decreasing the time is randomly determined by lottery or the like, for example, depending on the game result or the type of jackpot of the suspension information targeted for the special suspension notice. It may be determined in accordance with the game situation (for example, the number of held pieces, the lottery mode or the like). In addition, the increase and decrease in step S1710 may be randomly determined by lottery or the like, or may be determined according to the game situation in execution of the special hold notice. By doing this, it is possible to further reflect the gaming situation with respect to the possibility of establishing the special condition, and it is possible to suppress giving an impression such as a so-called finished race.

  Returning to the description of the effect setting process (FIG. 24) when the time specification is possible, after executing the timer input process for the time specific pattern in step S1513, the special hold notification command is output and set in step S1511. The effect setting process ends. If it is determined in step S1512 that the time pattern is not the time specific pattern but the premier pattern, timer input processing for the premier pattern is executed in step S1514. After the process of step S1514, the effect setting process is ended after executing step S1511.

  In the timer input process at the time of the premiere pattern in step S1514, which of the plurality of set premiere effects is to be executed is set, and each process corresponding to the set effects is performed. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, in step S1801, a premium effect lottery process is executed. In the premiere effect drawing process, an effect selection table (FIG. 25 (b)) for the premiere pattern stored in various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and a premiere counter PK for the premiere effect drawing from various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 ,, And set which premier rendering to be performed. In the effect selection table at the time of the premiere pattern, as the premiere effect, a determined time display effect that makes it possible to grasp that the jackpot result is at the display time at the start of the special hold notice, and the time at the predetermined end during subtraction. There are set an end specific change presentation in which a jackpot determination presentation is performed, and a one-shot reversal presentation in which a special condition is forcedly established by performing a significant subtraction at a predetermined timing during subtraction. The premier counter PK is, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one at a predetermined cycle within a range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the effect selection table at the time of the Premier Pattern, the case where the Premier Counter PK is 0 to 333 corresponds to the fixed time display effect, the case from 334 to 666 corresponds to the end specific change effect, and the case from 667 to 999 It is set to correspond to one-shot reverse production.

  After the effect lottery process is executed in step S1801, it is determined whether or not one-shot reverse effect is set in step S1802 based on the process result. The one-shot reverse presentation is a timing before the end of the special hold notice as the predetermined timing during subtraction as described above, for example, the start of the game cycle of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice. Sometimes, it is an effect that forces a special condition to be established by subtracting until the set time becomes zero. When the one-shot reversal effect is set, one-shot reversal flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 so that the MPU 242 can recognize that the one-shot reversal effect is set at step S1803. Execute processing to store

  The execution timing of the one-shot reverse production is not limited to the above as long as it is a timing before the end of the special hold notice. For example, it may be before the start of the game cycle of the hold information which is the target of the special hold notice (during the game cycle of the hold information which is digested earlier than the target hold information). Also, it may be timing when new hold information is acquired during execution of the special hold notice. However, it is possible to improve the unexpectedness when one-shot reverse presentation occurs as the timing of the end of the special hold notice is closer.

  In the following step S1804, an effect time setting process for one-shot reverse rotation is performed. In this effect time setting process, the time selection table at the time of one-shot reverse effect is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the time corresponding to the pending storage number N immediately before obtaining the current pending information is grasped. As shown in FIG. 25C, in the time selection table at the time of one-shot reverse, the rendering time is set corresponding to the number of reserved memories N, and the larger the number of reserved memories N, the longer the rendering time It is set. In addition, a plurality of effect times are set so that the effect time to be selected may differ even with the same pending storage number, and which effect time is to be set is randomly selected by lottery or the like. The variable display time in one game time is set longer than the variable display time which is usually easy to be selected, and the special hold is performed in the one selected in the time selection table at the time of one-shot reverse. When the advance notice is executed, it is set such that the special condition is less likely to be established only by the normal default subtraction. It should be noted that the special condition may not be established only by the default subtraction even if any presentation time is selected.

  After the process of step S1804 is performed, in step S1805, a process of inputting the time grasped in step S1804 to the timer counter T is performed. After executing the processing of step S1805, the present timer input processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1802 that the effect is not one-shot reversal effect, in step S1806, it is determined whether the effect set in step S1801 is an end specific change effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display of the display image Gp for the predetermined time during subtraction is “7” in the present embodiment, and the display for the time display image Gp is “X7.77” (X Is set to generate an effect of jackpot determination at a timing (hereinafter, also referred to as end specific timing in the following description) that becomes an arbitrary number. When it is determined in step S1806 that the end specific change effect is set, various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 are provided so that the MPU 242 can recognize that the end specific change effect is set in step S1807. A process of storing the end specific change flag in 234 is executed.

  The end specifying timing is not limited to the above. For example, as in “X7.70”, “X7.00”, “XY.70” or “XY.Z7” (Y and Z are arbitrary numbers) The predetermined end may not be all eyes. Further, the predetermined end is not limited to one type, and may be a plurality of types. In this case, the number of occurrences of the end identification timing can be increased.

  In the subsequent step S1808, effect time setting processing for end specific change is performed. In this effect time setting process, the time selection table at the time of end specific change effect is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the time corresponding to the pending storage number N immediately before obtaining the current pending information is grasped. As shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the time selection table at the end specific change time, the rendering time is set corresponding to the number of reserved memories N, and the larger the number N of reserved memories, the longer the rendering time It is set. In addition, a plurality of effect times are set so that the effect time to be selected may differ even with the same pending storage number, and which effect time is to be set is randomly selected by lottery or the like. These rendering times are set so that the above-mentioned predetermined end timing is included at least once. Specifically, the rendering time shorter than the predetermined ending time is not set. In addition, it is set such that the probability that a predetermined number of end identification timings at a predetermined tail end is more than one may be higher than the probability that a predetermined number of tail identification timings becomes predetermined during subtraction. More specifically, for example, assuming that the end identification timing is “XY.Z7”, “XY.Z0 to XY.Z6” is selected as the probability that “XY.Z8 to XY.Z9” is selected. It is set to be higher than the probability.

  In the case where a plurality of end specifying timings are selected during the subtraction in step S1808, a process of randomly setting a timing for generating a jackpot determination at any timing is also performed by lottery or the like. Note that among the plurality of end identification timings, the timing at which the occurrence timing is later may be set so that the probability of generating a jackpot determination effect is higher. In this way, the probability of passing through the end identification timing a plurality of times becomes high until the jackpot determination effect is performed, and the number of times the player pays attention to whether or not the same jackpot determination effect is performed at the end identification timing. Can also be high. Further, in this case, setting a scout effect in which the step-up is performed each time the end specifying timing is reached can more preferably raise the attention degree toward the later timing. Note that as the jackpot determination effect, the subtraction of the time display image Gp may be ended at the above-described end specific timing, and the subtraction may not be performed thereafter. In this way, it is considered that the player is expected to finish the subtraction at the end specifying timing, and the degree of attention to the special hold notice can be raised. As the timing for ending the subtraction, when there are a plurality of tail specific timings as described above, a value more suggesting a hit such as “XY. 77” than “XY. Z7”, or It may be a timing that corresponds to a value that suggests an advantage to the player in comparison with other values, such as odd (corresponding to probability variation big hit result) rather than even (usually corresponding to big hit result). Furthermore, the time display image Gp may be enlarged at the end specifying timing, the color may be changed to a noticeable color, or the shape may be sharpened to enhance the image. This can further increase the interest in the time display image Gp. It is also possible to combine this highlighting with the arrangement for stopping the subtraction as described above. In this case, it may be configured to be performed a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds before) the end specific timing (the timing when the subtraction can end), and in this way, the end specific timing (the timing when the subtraction can end) approaches It is possible for the player to easily grasp the presence of the game by changing the time display image Gp.

  After the process of step S1808 is executed, in step S1809, a process of inputting the time grasped in step S1808 to the timer counter T is executed. After executing the processing of step S1809, the present timer input processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1806 that the end specific change effect is not set, the process proceeds to step S1810. The case where the negative determination is made in step S1806 is a case where the determined time display effect is set as the premier effect. For example, “77.77”, “7.77”, and “3.41” can be determined as the determined time when it is possible to determine that the jackpot result is the display time at the start of the special suspension notice. Is set (see FIG. 25 (e)), and any one of these determined times is displayed at the start of the special hold notice, whereby the player is subject to the special hold notice. It is possible to grasp that the pending information is any jackpot result.

  Needless to say, the type of decision time in the decision time display is not limited to the above. Further, as in the case of the end specific change effect, the subtraction may not be performed while the determined time display is performed, or the time display image Gp may be changed (emphasized) in the determined time display.

  Then, in step S1810, processing of storing the determined time display flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed so that the MPU 242 can grasp that the determined time display effect is set. In the following step S1811, an effect time setting process for displaying a fixed time is performed. In this effect time setting process, a time selection table at the time of effect display is obtained from various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and a fixed time to be displayed this time is selected. Of the plurality of determination times, which determination time is to be set is randomly determined by lottery or the like. The plurality of jackpot results may be set in association with the determined time to be displayed. In this way, by displaying the determined time, it is possible to not only understand that it is a big hit result, but also to understand the type, and it is possible to more preferably pay attention to this determined time display It is possible to enhance.

  After the process of step S 1811 is executed, in step S 1812, the process of inputting the time grasped in step S 1811 to the timer counter T is executed. After the process of step S1812, the timer input process is ended.

<Effect setting setting process when time can not be specified>
Next, the effect setting process when time identification is impossible in step S1305 in the special hold advance notice setting process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The effect setting process when the time is not specified is substantially the same process as the effect setting process when the time can be specified. That is, first, in step S1901, the special hold notification table for when time identification is impossible is acquired from the various hold table for the large hold at the time of the large hit from the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243. In step S1901, the effect pattern counter EK is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the special holding notice table at the time of time indetermination being impossible is set with the normal pattern and the premier pattern as the contents of the special holding notice. That is, in comparison with the special hold notification table when the time can be specified, the special hold notification table when the time can not be specified is set so that the time specifying pattern is not selected.

  After the effect pattern of the special suspension notice is set in step S1901, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the normal pattern is set, and if the normal pattern is set, steps S1503 to S1511 are performed. Similar to the processing of step S1901, the processing of steps S1903 to S1911 is performed, and then the effect setting processing ends. If it is determined in step S1902 that the normal pattern is not set, the premium pattern is set. In this case, the same process as the process of step S1514 is performed in step S1912, and then, After the process of step S1911 is performed, the effect setting process is ended.

<Effect setting process at the time of off>
Next, an effect setting process at the time of removal of step S1306 in the special hold advance notice setting process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The effect setting process at the time of disconnection is substantially the same as the process when the special hold notice of the normal pattern is set in each effect setting process (steps S1304 and S1305) at the time of the big hit. That is, at step S 2001, the number N of pending storages immediately before reception of the current pending command, ie, immediately before acquisition of the pending information, the special pending counter TK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and various table storages of the ROM 243 A process of acquiring the special hold notification table (FIG. 33A) at the time of removal stored in the area 245 is executed. Then, in step S2002, a process of setting a summary of the special suspension notice is executed.

  In the special hold notification table at the time of removal, as shown in FIG. 33A, when the number of pending storages N immediately before obtaining the pending information is 0 (the number of pending storages N after obtaining the current pending information is 1) If the special hold counter TK is 0 to 679, the special hold notice is not executed. Also, if the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 0, and the special pending counter TK is 800 to 999, the special pending notification is executed, among which the special pending counter TK Is 800 to 949, the predetermined setting time is long, in the case of 950 to 989, it is medium time, and in the case of 990 to 999, it is short.

  Also, the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 1 (the number of pending storages N after acquisition of the current pending information is 2), and the special pending counter TK is 0 to 599. In some cases, the special hold notice is set not to be executed. Also, if the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 1, and the special pending counter TK is 600 to 999, the special pending notification is executed, among which the special pending counter TK Is set to a long time in the case of 600 to 799, a medium time in the case of 800 to 969, and a short time in the case of 970 to 999.

  When the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 2 (when the number of pending storages N after acquisition of the current pending information is 3) and the special pending counter TK is 0 to 399 Is set to not execute the special hold notice. Also, if the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 2, and the special pending counter TK is 400 to 999, the special pending notification is executed, among which the special pending counter TK Is set to a long time in the case of 400 to 699, a medium time in the case of 700 to 949, and a short time in the case of 950 to 999.

  When the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 3 (when the number of pending storages N after acquisition of the current pending information is 4) and the special pending counter TK is 0 to 199 Is set to not execute the special hold notice. Also, if the number of pending storages N immediately before acquisition of the pending information is 3, and the special pending counter TK is 200 to 999, the special pending notification is executed, among which the special pending counter TK Is set to be a long time in the case of 200 to 599, a medium time in the case of 600 to 949, and a short time in the case of 950 to 999.

  That is, comparing the off-time and the big hit special hold notification table, the off-time is more likely to be set to non-execution. In addition, it is easy to select a long time as the predetermined set time at the time of disconnection, and as a result, even if the special hold notification is executed, the special condition is less likely to be satisfied at the time of disconnection.

  After the process of step S2002 is performed, it is determined in the subsequent step S2003 whether or not to execute the special hold notification based on the process result of step S2002. If not executed, the effect setting process ends. In the case of execution, in step S2004, as in the process of step S1603, a process of setting the details of the set time is executed. That is, in step S2004, the special hold is performed based on the rough setting time set in step S2002, the time selection counter JK of the RAM 244, and the time selection table (FIG. 33B) at the time of removal of the ROM 243. Set the details of a predetermined set time in advance notice. After setting the detailed setting time in step S2004, in step S2005, processing is executed to input numerical information corresponding to the setting time set in step S2004 to the timer counter T of the RAM 244.

  In the following step S2005, a subtraction pattern table for deviation is acquired. As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the subtraction pattern table for out-of-place specification, like the subtraction pattern table for the big hit, is based on the value of the subtraction counter GK of the RAM 244, default subtraction, shift subtraction, and identification The timing subtraction is set to be selected.

  More specifically, for the subtraction pattern table for deviation, default subtraction is selected when the subtraction counter GK is 0 to 749, and shift subtraction is selected if it is 750 to 874, and 875 to 999. Specific timing subtraction is set to be selected in the case. That is, the probability of default subtraction being selected is set high when out of the jackpot as compared to the jackpot. In other words, the jackpot time has a higher probability that shift subtraction or specific timing subtraction is selected than out time.

  In step S2006, the subtraction pattern of the timer counter T is set based on the values of the subtraction pattern table and the subtraction counter GK acquired in step S2005.

  The processes of step S2007 to step S2011 are similar to the processes of step S1507 to step S1511 described above, and the process when shift subtraction or specific timing subtraction is selected (processing of storing the corresponding flag) is executed.

  After the process of step S2011 is performed, the process of adding “1” to the hold notification counter YK and updating is performed in step S2012, and then the effect setting process is ended.

  Returning to the description of the hold control command handling process (FIG. 19), after the special hold notice setting process is executed in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether the pending command received this time corresponds to any of the jackpot results. If it corresponds to any of the jackpot results, the process proceeds to step S1207, and processing for updating by adding "3" to the hold notification counter YK is executed. Thus, the determination in step S1204 is negative.

  That is, when the hold information corresponding to any of the jackpot results is stored, the special hold notice is not executed in the hold information that is digested after the hold information. This is because, as described above, the special hold notice is the subject of the special hold notice based on the time from the start of the special hold notice to the predetermined timing in the game times pertaining to the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice. It is directed to indicate whether or not to change the image for suspension relating to the suspension information, and if any of the jackpot results are included in the suspension information to be digested between the start and the end, the interval to the end The open / close execution mode will be included. That is, depending on the length of the open / close execution mode, the possibility that the special condition is satisfied is extremely high, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a case, when the open / close execution mode is performed during the execution of the special hold notice, the special hold notice is not performed.

  However, even if the open / close execution mode is performed during the special hold notification, if the setting time subtraction in the special hold notification is not performed during the open / close execution mode, the possibility of establishing the special condition is extremely increased. In such a case, it is considered possible to avoid the decline in interest even if the special hold notice is executed in such a case. By doing this, it is also possible to increase the frequency with which the special hold notice is performed.

  Further, the special hold notice may be performed when the open / close execution mode and the special hold notice overlap, and the special hold notice may be subtracted in the open / close execution mode. In this case, for example, if the establishment probability of the special condition is set using the length of time during which the open / close execution mode is performed, not only the length of the fluctuation display time during the game but also the open / close execution mode It can be a new effect that the establishment probability of the special condition of the hold information is different depending on the length. In particular, in the open / close execution mode, the length of the execution may vary depending on the game mode of the player as well as the setting on the game machine side. Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, since the round is completed when the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening 32a reaches the winning upper limit number of each round, the player's firing operation of the round The duration can vary. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game in which the special condition is more easily established as the timing of reaching the winning upper limit number is delayed by the operation of the player. This makes it possible to enjoy the open / close execution mode as much as possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1206, or after the process of step S1207 is performed, the process for increasing the amount of on hold is performed in step S1208, and the command corresponding process for on hold control is ended. In this process, the light emission control of the hold light emitting unit 45 is performed in response to the increase of the hold information, and a command corresponding to the increase of the hold information is output to the display control device 212. This command includes the information on the image for suspension determined in step S1203, the information on the special suspension notice determined in step S1205, and the information on the secondary storage number SN. Based on the received command, display control device 212 reads out the data corresponding to the image for suspension from the image data storage area for suspension stored in character ROM 256, and holds the unit corresponding to the number SN of auxiliary side storages. The symbol display device 41 is controlled to display on the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether a shift command has been received. If the shift command has not been received, the pending control command handling process is ended. If the shift command has been received, the process advances to step S1210 to execute a process of subtracting one from the secondary reserved storage number SN.

  In the following step S1211, it is determined whether a shift subtraction flag is stored. The shift subtraction flag is a flag that is stored when shift subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern in the special hold advance notice as described above. If this flag is stored, the process advances to step S1212 to execute shift subtraction processing. The shift subtraction processing will be described in detail later.

  If the shift subtraction flag is not stored in step S1211, or after the process of step S1212 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1213. In step S1213, shift processing is performed. In the shift process, data of each storage area in the storage area for holding 250 is shifted. That is, in the shift process, the hold information stored in each storage area of the hold storage area 250 is shifted from the upper area to the lower area. In the shift processing, the emission control of the suspension light emitting unit 45 is performed in response to the reduction of the suspension information, and a command corresponding to the reduction of the suspension information is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to change the display of the corresponding unit hold display areas Ga1 to Gs4 based on the received command. After the process of step S1213 is executed, the pending control command corresponding process is ended.

<Special hold notice control process>
Next, the special hold advance notice control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, in the special hold advance notice control process, it is determined whether or not the special hold advance notice is being executed in step S2101. If it is being executed, the predetermined setting is made in step S2102. A timer management process, which is a process related to time subtraction, is executed, and in step S2103, a process for holding display, which is a process related to the image for holding P, is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2101 or after the process of step S2103 is performed, the special hold advance notice control process is ended.

  The timer management process and the process for holding display will be described below with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 and 36.

  In the timer management process, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not an elapsed flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244. The elapsed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the timer counter T is “0” and the special condition is satisfied. If the elapsed flag is stored, the timer management process is ended as it is.

  If the elapsed flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S 2202, and it is determined whether the subtraction completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244. The subtraction end flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the subtraction of the predetermined set time in the special suspension notice is ended without the special condition being established. If the subtraction end flag is stored, the timer management process is ended as it is.

  If the subtraction end flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2203, and timer subtraction processing is performed. In this process, the timer counter T is decremented by "1" and updated. In the subsequent step S2204, a subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The subtraction command includes the information of the timer counter T updated in step S2203, and is output to the display control device 212 by command output processing activated in the MPU 242 at a predetermined cycle. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 reads the image corresponding to the information of the timer counter T included in the subtraction command from the character ROM 256 based on the reception of the subtraction command, and displays the time display area GE in the special suspension notice. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to update the time display image Gp.

  In the following step S2205, it is determined whether a specific timing subtraction flag is stored. If the specific timing subtraction flag is stored and the specific timing subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern, it is determined in step S2206 whether it is the timing at which the specific timing subtraction should be performed. As already described, the specific timing subtraction is a subtraction method of subtracting a predetermined number based on the fact that the display of the time display image Gp has become a predetermined predetermined display time and the specific timing has come.

  As shown in FIG. 28C, in the specific timing subtraction table stored in the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243, the specific timing which is a predetermined display time, the subtraction probability at the specific timing, and the subtraction are performed. The subtraction time for the case is set for each game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Specifically, regardless of the game result, the case where the setting time for the special hold notice is 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 40 seconds or 60 seconds remaining is set as the specific timing. Further, the subtraction probability is uniformly set to 25% at any specific timing when the game result is a big hit result, and the specific timing when the game result is an out result. The probability of winning is set to be lower (as the specific timing with the remaining setting time decreases) as The subtraction time is set to be a subtraction time that becomes shorter as the specific timing is later (as to the specific timing with less remaining setting time) regardless of the game result.

  In step S2206, the above-mentioned specific timing subtraction table is acquired, and it is determined whether it is a specific timing (remaining 10 sec, 20 sec, 40 sec or 60 sec). If it is the specific timing, the subtraction lottery process is executed in step S2207. In this process, a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and based on the subtraction probability of the specific timing subtraction table of the ROM 243, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not subtraction is to be performed at the current specific timing. Then, in step S2208, it is determined based on the processing result of step S2207 whether or not the subtraction lottery has been won. If the subtraction lottery is won, a timer subtraction process is executed in step S2209. In this process, a process of subtracting the current timer counter T from the value corresponding to the current subtraction time set in the specific timing subtraction table is performed. In the subsequent step S2210, a specific subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The specific subtraction command includes information on the subtraction time subtracted in step S2209 and the timer counter T after subtraction. The output mode of the specific subtraction command and the process on the side of the display control device 212 when the subtraction command is received are the same as in the case of the subtraction command described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different commands are provided for each subtraction timing such that information at the time of normal default subtraction is output as a subtraction command and information at the specific timing subtraction is output as a specific subtraction command. . Thus, the display control device 212 can recognize the subtraction opportunity by grasping the type of the command, and therefore, the processing configuration is simplified in setting the effect corresponding to the subtraction opportunity. be able to. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the type of command to be set to reduce the storage capacity on the side of the presentation control device 82 or reducing the number of input / output commands between the presentation control device 82 and the display control device 212, these commands May be common. Specifically, in step S2210, the subtraction command set in step S2204 may be updated. For example, assuming that information obtained by subtracting "1" from the timer counter T in step S2204 (step S2203) is set as a subtraction command, in step S2210, the information obtained by subtracting "1" and information subtracted at a specific timing (step S2210) S2209) is combined with the information on the subtraction value to be set at the subtraction command. In this way, it is possible to use the command at the time of subtraction regardless of any subtraction trigger, and the number of commands set in one timer management process is only one type, and the number of input / output commands is It can be reduced than the configuration.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2205, S2206, and S2208, or after the process of step S2210 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether the timer counter T has become "0". If the timer counter T has become "0", processing for storing the elapsed flag in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S2212, and this timer management processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S2211 that the timer counter T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2213. In step S2213, it is determined whether any one of the tail specific change flag and the one-shot reverse flag is stored in the RAM 244. If any flag is stored, it is determined in step S2214 whether or not it is time to execute an effect corresponding to the stored flag. Specifically, when the end identification change flag is stored, the end identification change effect is set as the present effect pattern, and in step S2214, the timing at which the end identification change effect should be performed (time display area It is determined whether or not the timing when the display of GE becomes "X7.77". Further, when the one-shot reversal flag is stored, one-shot reversal production is set as the present effect pattern, and in step S2214, the timing at which the one-shot reversal production should be performed It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game play of the holding information being reached.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2214 and it is time to execute an effect corresponding to the stored flag, the process advances to step S2115 to execute effect setting processing for executing the corresponding effect. In this process, the timer counter T is set to "0", and the tail specific change effect is executed when the tail specific change flag is stored, and when the one-shot reverse flag is stored. The drive control of the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is performed so that the one-shot reverse effect is performed, and the command display corresponding to the symbol display device 41 is performed by outputting a command to the display control device 212 Make it Thereafter, after the elapsed flag is stored in step S2212, the timer management process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S2213 or step S2214, the timer management process ends.

  As described above, in the timer management process, the regular subtraction process of the timer counter T, the subtraction process at a specific timing, and the process in the premiere effect such as the determined time display effect, the end specific change effect and the one-shot reverse effect Run. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, an elapsed flag is stored. In the suspension display process (step S2103) in the special suspension advance notice control process (FIG. 34), a process based on the fact that the elapsed flag is stored (the special condition is established) is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, shift subtraction is set as the subtraction pattern, in addition to default subtraction and specific timing subtraction. Therefore, prior to the description of the hold display process, a shift subtraction process for shift subtraction will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The shift subtraction process is a process executed based on the reception of the shift command from the main control device 81 in the hold control command correspondence process (FIG. 19) (step S1212).

  In the shift subtraction process, it is determined in step S2301 whether or not a shift win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244. The shift win flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that shift subtraction has already been performed. If it is determined in step S2301 that the shift win flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, a shift subtraction lottery process is executed. In this process, the shift subtraction table is obtained from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the lottery counters are obtained from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and it is lottery whether or not subtraction is to be performed at the current shift. . As shown in FIG. 28 (b), the shift subtraction table is based on the number of held shifts and the game result of the hold information which is the target of the special hold notice, and the winning probability of the shift subtraction and , And the subtraction time at the time of winning are set. Specifically, the winning probability of the shift subtraction is such that the shift subtraction is performed with a higher probability when the game result is a big hit result than when it is an out result regardless of the number of held pieces after the shift. It is set. Further, the subtraction time at the time of winning is set such that the longer the time, the longer the number of held pieces after the shift, regardless of the game result.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 28B, in this embodiment, the subtraction time at the time of shift is set to be different depending on the game result of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. Specifically, in the case where the number of reservations after shift is two or three, the subtraction time is 20 seconds if the game result of the relevant suspension information is the jackpot result, and 10 seconds if it is the deviation result And In this way, the game of grasping the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the shift is added, and it is possible to fully enjoy the special hold notice. In order to make it difficult to grasp the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift, the same subtraction time may be set regardless of the game result. Furthermore, in order to add the enjoyment of predicting the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift, for example, as a configuration in which the subtraction time is set by lottery, etc. You may

  In step S2303, it is determined based on the processing result in step S2302 whether or not a shift subtraction lottery has been won. If the shift subtraction lottery has been won, in step S2304, a process of storing a shift win flag is executed. As a result, at the time of the shift after the next time, an affirmative determination is made in step S2301.

  In the following step S2305, a timer subtraction process is performed. In this process, based on the shift subtraction table, the numerical information corresponding to the subtraction time corresponding to the number of shifted pieces and the game result is grasped, and the grasped numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information of the timer counter T. Execute the process Then, in step S2306, a subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The subtraction command includes information on subtraction time to be subtracted in step S2305 and information on the timer counter T after subtraction. The process in which the command at the time of subtraction is output to the display control device 212 side and the subsequent process on the display control device 212 side are as described above.

  If it is determined in step S2301 that the shift winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S2303 that the subtraction lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S2306 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, it is determined whether the timer counter T has become "0". If the timer counter T is "0", the elapsed flag is stored in step S2308, and if the timer counter T is not "0", the shift subtraction processing is ended as it is.

  Next, the suspension display process of step S2103 in the special suspension advance notice control process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether an elapsed flag is stored. The case where the elapsed flag is not stored means that the special condition is not satisfied yet, and in this case, the processing for pending display is ended. If the elapsed flag is stored, the process advances to step S2402. In step S 2402, it is determined whether the changed flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244. The changed flag is a flag stored when the image for holding is changed based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (the elapsed flag is stored) (step S2406 described later). If the changed flag is stored, the process for pending display ends. If the changed flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S 2403.

  In step S2403, the on-hold display after change is set. In this process, the hold image to be changed from the fourth hold image P4 is set based on the establishment of the special condition based on the game result of the hold information which is the target of the special hold notice. For example, the pattern table for the image for suspension after the special condition is established is stored in the ROM 243, and plural patterns of images for suspension to be changed when the special condition is established are set in the pattern table according to the game result. There is. Then, a counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and it is determined by lottery or the like which one of the holding images is to be changed. In the present embodiment, the hold image after change is uniformly set as the third hold image P3. In this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the image for holding. However, in order to diversify the change pattern, it is preferable to set a plurality of hold images after change and determine which hold image to change. In these cases, the image for suspension after change may be set to be the image for suspension on the side where the jackpot expectation is higher than the image for suspension before change.

  In addition, since it is the structure selected only when the 1st image P1 for holding in this embodiment is a big hit result, when setting the image for holding after a change, 1st holding as an image for holding after a change is set. It is preferable that the first image P1 be selected so that the first image P1 is not selected, or the first image P1 can be selected only when the suspension information targeted for the special suspension notice is the jackpot result. Further, in the present embodiment, the hold image before change is uniformly set as the fourth hold image P4, but this may be randomly determined from the hold images P1 to P5 by lottery or the like. In this case, the first holding image P1 is not selected as the pre-change holding image, or the first holding image P1 is displayed only when the holding information targeted for the special holding notice is the jackpot result. It is good to be able to be selected. In addition, when the second image for suspension P2 is selected as the image for suspension before change, the jackpot result is decided after the change (changes to the first image for suspension P1), so it is temporarily subjected to a special suspension notice. If a special condition is established despite the fact that the hold information being processed is out of order, a contradiction between the game result and the hold image may occur. Therefore, the second holding image P2 is configured to be selected only when the time can be specified, and in the case of a jackpot result, the time is set so that the special condition can be satisfied, and the out-of-order result In this case, if time is set so that the special condition is not established, contradiction with the game result can be avoided. It should be noted that the second holding image P2 is not selected as the second holding image P2 as the holding image before the change, or the second holding image P2 is displayed only when the holding information targeted for the special holding notice is the jackpot result. It may be selected.

  In the subsequent step S2404, an effect pattern at the time of change is set. In this process, an effect pattern in the case of changing the image for suspension is set based on the game result of the suspension information which is the target of the special suspension notice. For example, a pattern table for the effect pattern at the time of change is stored in the ROM 243, and a plurality of effect patterns according to the game result and the game situation when the special condition is established are set in the pattern table. Then, a counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and it is determined by lottery or the like in which effect pattern the holding image is to be changed. As the effect pattern, for example, the image for holding before change is temporarily made difficult to visually recognize or not visible by displaying smoke or the like, and then the effect pattern for making the image for hold after change visible is possible, or the change destination A plurality of candidate holding images may be displayed, and the plurality of holding images may be varied, and then one candidate may be displayed in a fixed manner and changed.

  In the following step S2405, based on the information set in step S2403 and step S2404, effect setting processing at the time of special condition satisfaction is performed. In this process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled to perform effects corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of change and the image for suspension after the change. In step S2405, a change time command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The change time command includes the information on the image for suspension after change set in step S2403 and the information on the effect pattern at the time of change set in step S2404, and is periodically activated. It is output to the display control device 212 in the command output process. The display control device 212 recognizes that the special condition is satisfied, the image for suspension after change, and the effect pattern at the time of change based on the reception of the change time command. Then, image data corresponding to these effects are read out from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the effects are displayed on the display screen G.

  In the subsequent step S2406, a process of storing the changed flag in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244 is executed. By performing this process, an affirmative determination will be made in step S2402 in the process for holding display from the next time onwards. After the process of step S2406 is performed, the process for pending display is ended.

  As described above, based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied, that is, the time display image Gp of the time display area GE in the special suspension notice becomes "00.00", the image P for suspension is different from the images up to that time It changes to an image (see FIG. 20 (c)). More specifically, among the plurality of holding images P set corresponding to the jackpot expectation, the holding image P on the side with the low jackpot expectation changes to the holding image P on the high side. Therefore, as a player, when the special hold notice is started, the time display image Gp becomes "00.00" by the end, that is, the game of the hold information targeted after the special hold notice is started. It is expected that the period until the high-speed variation display of the lower row design pattern Z3 ends (the display switches to the low-speed variation display) in the turn will be as long as possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player even if the variable display time of one game turn becomes long. Therefore, the effects during one game can be performed sufficiently, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  On the other hand, when the special condition is not established, that is, the time display image Gp is “00. If it does not become "00", the image P for holding does not change. Hereinafter, processing when the special condition is not established will be described. This process is performed as a part of the variable display control process for controlling the effect during the game. Therefore, first, the variable display control process will be described, and then, the process in the case where the special condition is not established will be described.

<Variable display control process>
The variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the fluctuation display control process, when the fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the fluctuation display of the symbols for one game cycle is started in the symbol display device 41 and transmitted from the main control device 81 When the variation end command is received, a process of performing final stop indication (confirmation stop indication) of the variation indication of the symbol is executed.

  That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, it is determined in step S2501 whether or not one game is being executed. If one game is not being executed, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not a variation command has been received. If the variation command has not been received, the variation display control process is terminated. If the variation command has been received, the variation start control process is ended after the variation start process is executed in step S2503.

  In the variation start process, based on the command received from the main control device 81, information on presence / absence of reach, information on variation display time, information on game result is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 242 . And based on the grasped information, the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the current game round is set. Specifically, five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and when any of the big hit results, the combination of big hit symbols on any valid line is Set the stop result so that the stop is displayed. In addition, when it becomes reach indication even if it is not the big hit result of that either, the combination of the reach design is stopped and indicated on the effective line, the design which is different from the reach design on the effective line is Set the stop result to stop. Furthermore, when it does not become reach display, the setting of the stop result is performed so that the combination of reach symbols is not displayed in any effective line. Then, the address information corresponding to the set stop result is read out from the stop information table stored in the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243, and the address information is stored in the storage area of the stop information address of the RAM 244.

  Further, in the variation start process, the effect pattern of the current game is set. In this effect pattern setting process, with reference to the effect pattern table provided in the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243, the information of the variable display time in the current game run and the address information stored in the stop information address storage area The effect pattern corresponding to both is specified, and it sets as an effect pattern in this game turn. Then, the control of the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is started based on the information of the stop result and the information of the effect pattern, and the display control device is outputted by outputting the command including the information to the display control device 212. It controls 212 to execute display effects for game times.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that one game is being executed in the variation display control process, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not a variation end command has been received. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, the fluctuation display control process is ended after the fluctuation-in-use process is executed in step S2105. If the fluctuation end command has been received, the fluctuation display control process is ended after the fluctuation end process is executed in step S2106. Processing for ending the game run by ending the fluctuation display in the game run and executing notification corresponding to the game result and deleting various counters and flags set during the game run in the process for end of change Run.

  The process when the special condition is not established in the special suspension notice is performed in the above-mentioned in-use process. Therefore, the during-variation processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

  First, in step S2601, it is grasped whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing of all symbol rows. Incidentally, the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are provided with an elapsed time counter for grasping the elapsed time from the start of the game run, and at the start of the game run (more specifically, at the start of the process for starting change) The update of the elapsed time counter is started. Then, the effect pattern determined in the process for start of change is associated with the information of the elapsed time counter, and the MPU 242 may specify the execution timing of various effects by referring to the elapsed time counter. it can. In step S2601, it is determined from the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern in the game run being executed whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing. In the following description, in the determination processing of whether or not it is the execution timing of each effect, the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern are referred to as in the process of step S2601.

  If it is the fluctuation start timing of all the symbol rows, high-speed fluctuation start processing of all the symbol rows is executed in step S2602. In this process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled corresponding to the start of high speed fluctuation display, and a command is output to the display control device 212 so that high speed fluctuation display of all symbol rows is performed by the symbol display device 41. To start. After the process of step S2602 is executed, the during-variation process is ended.

  When it is not the fluctuation start timing of all the symbol rows in step S2601, it is determined whether it is the deceleration timing of upper symbol row Z1 in step S2603. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration processing for the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S2604, and then the processing for during variation is ended. In the deceleration processing, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled corresponding to the deceleration of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, whereby the upper symbol row Z1 is generated by the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation display is switched from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S2603, it is determined in step S2605 whether it is the deceleration timing of the lower row symbol row Z3. If it is the deceleration timing, in step S2606, the deceleration processing of the lower figure design row Z3 is executed. In the deceleration processing, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled corresponding to the deceleration of the lower row design Z3 and the command is output to the display control device 212 so that the lower display row Z3 is displayed by the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation display is switched from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation.

  After the deceleration processing of the lower figure design row Z3 is performed in step S2606, the processing for special holding notification is performed in step S2607, and then the processing for fluctuation is ended. The special hold notification process will be described in detail later.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the lower figure design row Z3 in step S2605, it is determined in step S2608 whether it is the deceleration timing of the middle design sequence Z2. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration processing for the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S2609, and then the processing for during variation is ended. In the deceleration processing, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled corresponding to the deceleration of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation display is switched from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2608, it is determined in step S2610 whether it is the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1. If it is the stop timing, the process for stopping the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S2611, and then the processing for fluctuation is ended. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled corresponding to the stop of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, whereby the upper symbol row Z1 is generated by the symbol display device 41. Stop the fluctuation display.

  When it is not the stop timing of upper symbol row Z1 in step S2610, it is determined whether it is the stop timing of lower figure symbol row Z3 in step S2612. If it is the stop timing, after the stop processing of the lower figure design row Z3 is executed in step S2613, the processing for fluctuation is ended. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled corresponding to the stop of the lower figure design row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212 so that the lower figure design row Z3 is displayed by the design display device 41. Stop the fluctuation display.

  If it is not the stop timing of the lower figure design row Z3 in step S2612, it is determined in step S2614 whether it is the stop timing of the middle design row Z2. If it is the stop timing, the stop processing of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S2615, and then the processing for while moving is ended. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled corresponding to the stop of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212 so that the middle symbol row Z2 is generated by the symbol display device 41. Stop the fluctuation display.

  If it is not the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2614, the processing for various effects during fluctuation is executed in step S2616, and then the processing for fluctuation is ended.

  Here, in the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the time from the switching from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display and the time to stop, that is, the time when the low speed fluctuation display is performed, is basically predetermined. It's time. Specifically, it is a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) except for a period in which the low speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 in the reach display is performed. In the low speed change display, the player can clearly grasp the changing symbol. Therefore, the player can grasp, to a certain extent, which line the symbol is to be stopped at the timing when the high-speed variable display is switched to the low-speed variable display. Therefore, it is possible for the player to know whether or not a reach line is formed with the upper symbol row Z1 in the low speed fluctuation display in the lower figure symbol row Z3, that is, whether or not the reach display is generated. It can be said that it is the timing when high interest of Therefore, at this timing, the special condition of the special hold notice is determined, so that it is possible to avoid the situation where the player is overlooked or missed. In addition, since it is the timing at which each game is watched like this, this timing (the switching timing of the pattern row Z3 in the figure below) is to the player a certain amount of experience without looking at the fluctuation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is considered possible to grasp. Therefore, it can be said that the situation in which the determination of the special condition is missed is further suppressed.

  Next, the special hold notification process in step S2607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether a special hold notice is being executed. If it is not in progress, the special hold notification process is ended. If the special hold notice is being executed, it is determined in the following step S2702 whether or not the current game play is the game turn that is the target of the special hold notice being executed. If it is not the target game number, the special hold notification process ends. If it is the target game number, it is determined in the subsequent step S2703 whether or not an elapsed flag is stored, that is, whether or not a special condition is established. When the elapsed flag is stored, the special condition is satisfied even in the game period which is the target of the special holding notice, and the holding image P is displayed in the holding display process (FIG. 37). Processing to change is being performed. Therefore, when the elapsed flag is stored, the processing for notifying of special holding is ended as it is. In this case, since the image for suspension has already been changed, it is possible to terminate the special suspension notifying process after the display of the time display area GE is ended.

  If the elapsed flag is not stored, that is, if the high-speed variation display of the pattern row Z3 in the lower figure pattern ends without the special condition being satisfied in the game times of the suspension information targeted for the special suspension notice, step S2704 After the special hold notice termination process is executed in step S5, the special hold notice process ends. In this end process, a subtraction end flag is stored to stop the subtraction of the timer counter T. As a result, in the timer management process (FIG. 35), the timer subtraction process (step S2203) is not performed, and the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the end processing of step S2704, while the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped, the display of the time display image Gp of the time display area GE is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, as the time display image Gp, an image indicating the time at which the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped is displayed as it is (see FIG. 20C). Therefore, although the subtraction of the predetermined setting time is performed in the special hold notice, the player can grasp that the special condition is not satisfied even after the subtraction is finished (after the special hold notice is finished). . That is, even after the high-speed variable display of the pattern row Z3 in the figure below has ended in the game turn which is the subject of the special hold notice, the special hold notice was made until then, the special condition was not satisfied It becomes possible to grasp each and the time required until the special condition is established. By doing this, even if the image for holding P is not changed without the special condition being established, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention to the game time while leaving the afterglow.

  That is, in the suspension notice, which is implemented prior to the game times of the suspension information and corresponding to the suspension information, a presentation with a high degree of jackpot expectation as the staging of this suspension notice (special suspension notice in this embodiment) If it is possible to increase the attention to the reservation notice by setting, on the other hand, this high-hit expected high-precedence production is branched to the out-side production at the bifurcation point during production, for example (special in this embodiment) In the case where the condition is not established, the degree of attention to the game times of the suspension information that is the target of the suspension announcement as well as the suspension announcement may be extremely reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if it is branched to the effect on the out side as a branch point during the effect, an index indicating whether or not to branch to the effect on the hit side in the later (in this embodiment, The remaining time of the predetermined set time is displayed. In other words, not only are the bifurcation on the hit side and the off side at the branch point on the presentation, but also the degree of easiness or difficulty of the branch to the hit side at the branch point is displayed even after the branch, Even in the case of branching to the out side, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation, and it is possible to suppress that the degree of attention is extremely reduced thereafter.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  On the basis of the fact that the special condition is established after the predetermined set time has elapsed, the special hold notice for changing the hold image P as a bonus to the player is set. Thereby, in the situation where the special hold notice is performed, the predetermined setting time elapses and the special condition is satisfied, that is, the variation display time of the game times executed in the situation where the special hold notice is performed The players expect a long time. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the game times are felt to be redundant due to the increase of the variable display time during the game times.

  In particular, in the present gaming machine, an effect is set which causes the game result to be predicted earlier than the end of the game cycle using the type of the image P for suspension as the suspension notice. Therefore, in the game times that have been predicted to be out results due to this pending notice, even if the reach indication is performed, the player can be regarded as a mere waiting time without much expectation. There is also a possibility of Therefore, by associating the special condition in the special suspension notice with the variable display time as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to contribute to the establishment of the special condition even in the time when it is likely to be regarded as the mere waiting for digestion. It can be avoided that the degree of attention is extremely reduced.

  In the above configuration, the player can grasp the process of establishing the special condition and the process of establishment by displaying the special condition (time display image Gp in the time display area GE) as the special hold notice. it can. By doing this, it is possible to clearly understand the relationship between the special condition and the fluctuation display time, and it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of avoiding the inconvenience due to the fluctuation display time becoming longer.

  In particular, since the time display image Gp is configured to be updated as time passes, it is possible to clearly understand the process in which the probability of establishment of the special condition (establishment probability) changes. Can be entertained. Since the time display image Gp is configured to be updated and displayed from the start to the end of the special holding advance notice, it is possible to enjoy the above possibility of achieving the above possibility at the longest.

  When the special condition is not established in the special suspension notice, the remaining time at the determination time of the special condition (the end time of the high-speed change display) is displayed as the time display image Gp even after the special suspension notice is over Therefore, even if the special condition is not satisfied, the player can clearly understand how long it is satisfied, for example, in the case where the special condition is satisfied after a short time, it is simply satisfied. Not only the result of having not been present but also the degree of loneliness is displayed, so that it is possible to leave an afterglow of the special hold notice and to suppress an extremely low expectation.

  In the special hold notice, the predetermined setting time is set based on the hold information which is the target of the special hold notice, and the hold information which is digested earlier than the hold information which is the target. did. In this way, it is possible to draw attention not only to the suspension information that is the target of the special suspension notice but also to other suspension information, and it is possible to preferably raise the level of attention of each.

  Processing to grasp the variation display time of the game times related to the suspension information that is digested earlier than the suspension information that is the target of the special suspension notice, before the start of the game cycles that is related to the suspension information that is digested earlier By providing the timer input processing at the time of the specific pattern, it is possible to suitably execute the special hold notification by utilizing the length of the variable display time.

  On the other hand, the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information which is digested earlier than the hold information targeted for the special hold notice changes depending on the game situation (for example, the number of held pieces) at the start of the game times. obtain. That is, the hold number correspondence pattern and the hold number non-response pattern are set in the fluctuation display time of the game times, and in the case of the hold number correspondence pattern, it is difficult to grasp the fluctuation display time first . Therefore, in the case where the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern is included in the hold information to be digested first, the variable display time is not specified. As a result, in the effect using the variable display time, it is possible to avoid, as much as possible, the occurrence of inconvenience in the effect due to the previously-specified fluctuation display time being different from the actual time.

  Here, the benefit (change of the image P for suspension) based on the establishment of the special condition in the special suspension notice is a privilege on presentation, and does not contribute to the direct benefit of the player such as playing a ball. That is, for example, the special condition does not have to be satisfied when the pending information targeted for the special pending advance notice is the big hit result, and the special condition is not the case when the pending information concerned is the out result. It may be established, and vice versa does not affect the player's direct profit. Therefore, the success or failure of the special condition may not be determined at the start of the special hold notice, and it is not necessary to grasp all of the variation display time at the start of the special hold notice as described above. Therefore, in the case where the hold information corresponding to the hold number is included in the hold information to be digested first, the setting time of the special condition is set without grasping the variable display time. That is, regardless of the game result of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the special set at the start of the special hold notice according to the gaming status (acquisition status of the hold information) executing the special hold notice. The success or failure of the condition will be different. By doing this, the impression that the success or failure of the special conditions is determined according to the game situation is strengthened, and the degree of attention is prevented from being extremely lowered halfway as in a so-called "successful race" in which the result is determined first. It becomes possible.

  In the special hold notice, the setting of the special condition is mainly performed based on hold information different from the hold information targeted for the special hold notice. By doing this, it becomes possible to draw attention to other suspension information as well as the suspension information targeted in the special suspension notice, and it is possible to increase attention to games in a balanced manner. Become.

  In this case, since the variable display time of the other hold information can be set after the start of the special hold notice as described above, it can be said that the probability of the establishment of the special condition can also be set after the start of the special hold notice. . Therefore, in the special hold notice, not only the initial stage such as the start time but also the other timing can be noticed.

  Furthermore, as a method of subtracting the remaining time of a predetermined set time for a special condition, in addition to the default subtraction which is a periodic subtraction, as a method of changing the remaining time in the middle, shift subtraction or specific timing subtraction Provided. If it is only the above-mentioned default subtraction, at the start of the special hold notice or at a stage in the process, depending on the player, it is judged from experience that the special condition is easily established from the number of hold information and the remaining time of the current state. It can also be possible. In such a case, the degree of attention to the special hold notice may be extremely reduced. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the special hold notice until the end by including a pattern such as shift subtraction or specific timing subtraction, in which the accumulated time is subtracted at unexpected timings.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, among the subtraction patterns of the setting time in the special suspension notice, the configuration of subtraction at shift is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the shift subtraction process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

  In this embodiment, as in the process of step S2301 in the first embodiment, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not a shift win flag is stored. If the shift win flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, processing is executed to grasp the image P for suspension that is shifted to the display area for execution Gb in the current shift. Then, in step S2803, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not subtraction processing is to be performed at the current shift.

  In step S2803, a shift lottery table is acquired from the ROM 243, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the above subtraction process. After the process of step S2803, the processes of steps S2804 to S2809 are performed as in the processes of steps S2303 to S2308 in the first embodiment, and the shift subtraction process is ended.

  In the shift lottery table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the game result of the suspension information targeted for the special suspension notice, the number of suspension after shift, and the display area Gb for current execution are shifted The holding image P defines the probability of performing subtraction and the subtraction time for performing subtraction. Specifically, when the holding image P shifted to the execution display area Gb is compared, the holding image P having a lower jackpot expectation than the shifting of the holding image P having a high jackpot expectation is shifted. The probability of performing subtraction is set to be higher regardless of the game result. The probability is set to be higher when the game result is the jackpot result than the game result is the out result.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display time of each game is basically set according to the jackpot expectation, and is set so that the fluctuation display time may be longer as the jackpot expectation is higher. ing. Further, as described above, the image for holding P is set to display different images according to the jackpot expectation. Therefore, in the game time corresponding to the image P for suspension on the side where the jackpot expectation is low, the fluctuation display time basically becomes short. That is, in the situation where the special hold notice is performed, if there is a game play corresponding to the hold image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is low, not only can it be expected to be a jackpot result in this game play, The length of the variable display time of this game time is likely to be short, and the rate of contribution for establishing the special condition is also low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special condition at least in the special suspension notice is achieved by increasing the probability that the shift subtraction will be performed when the game times corresponding to the suspension image P having such low jackpot expectation are executed. Can be easily established. In this way, when the special hold notice is given, the degree of attention for the special hold notice is extremely reduced even if the jackpot expectation of the hold information that is digested before that is low. It is possible to avoid an event such as

  In the present embodiment, the probability of shift subtraction is increased when the variable display time is short, but the subtraction time when shift subtraction is performed may be extended. Further, the special subtraction may be facilitated by increasing the subtraction speed of the default subtraction. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Also, contrary to the above configuration, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability that shift subtraction is performed, the longer the subtraction time when shift subtraction is performed, or the faster the subtraction speed. Special conditions may be established easily. In this case, in addition to the effect of increasing the variable display time, special conditions are more easily established, which is preferable for the player.

  Furthermore, the special condition may be made difficult to be established by reducing the probability of performing subtraction at the time of shift, shortening the subtraction time when performing subtraction at the time of shifting, or reducing the speed of subtraction. By setting such a case, even when it is predicted that the special condition will be established at the initial stage of the special suspension notice, it is possible not to be established, and the special suspension notice until the end It is possible to make them watch closely.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the special hold notification is executed when the variable display time of the hold information can be specified. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the variable display time in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether the special mode is in progress. In this embodiment, the special mode is set to the special mode during the high frequency support mode, and specifically, the special mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 as the special mode. The special mode flag is stored when setting the high frequency support mode (step S903, step S906) in the transition process (FIG. 15) at the end of the open / close execution mode, and when setting the low frequency support mode (game number counter Is erased (if it becomes 0). Further, when the special mode flag is stored or deleted, a command including the information is output from the main control device 81 side to the effect control device 82 side. As a result, it is possible for the effect control device 82 to grasp that the special mode is in progress.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the special mode flag is not stored, in steps S2902 to S2905, the processing similar to the above steps S701 to S704 is executed, and the setting processing of the variable display time is ended. Do.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the special mode flag is stored, the fluctuation display time table in the special mode is acquired in step S2906, and the process proceeds to step S2905. As shown in FIG. 44, the variable display time table in the special mode is set so that the number-on-hold pattern is not set, and the number-on-hold pattern is selected in any case. . That is, in the special mode, it is possible to specify the fluctuation display time before the start of the game round of the hold information based on the information at the time of acquisition of the hold information (game result, reach random number counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS). It is possible.

  The suspension control command corresponding process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the processing of step S3001 to step S3003 is executed as in the processing of step S1201 to step S1203 in the first and second embodiments. Then, in step S3004, it is determined whether the special mode is in progress. If the special mode is in progress, the process advances to step S3005 to determine whether the hold notification counter YK is less than "3", as in the process of step S1204. If it is less than "3", special hold notification setting processing is executed in step S3006.

  In the special hold advance notice setting process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, it is determined in step S3101 whether the hold command received this time corresponds to any of the jackpot results. If it is any of the jackpot results, after the effect setting process when the time can be specified is executed in step S3102, the special suspension notice setting process is ended. If it is determined in step S3101 that the result is not the jackpot result but the outlier, the effect setting process at the time of out is executed in step S3103, and the special on-hold notice setting process is ended. The effect setting process when the time can be specified and the effect setting process when the time is out is as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special hold notification is performed in a situation where the variable display time of the hold information can be specified. The processing configuration can be simplified because there is no need for processing for the case where suspension information is included). In the configuration in which the variation display time of the game times is used for the suspension notice, if this variation display time can be specified in advance, the suspension notice according to it can be set in advance, so there is a delay of effect setting And can avoid an extreme increase in processing load. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if the special hold notice is given in the special mode in which the variable display time can be specified in advance, it is possible to set the special hold notice in advance in any case. preferable.

  On the other hand, if all such effects are set in advance, there is no room for the effects to change depending on the subsequent game situation, and if the result of the effects is grasped in advance to some extent, then the attention will be focused There is also a possibility that the degree may drop extremely. Therefore, in the present embodiment, although the special hold notification is performed when time specification is possible as described above, if the time is directly used (timer input process at time specific pattern), then It is possible to prevent the result from being grasped in advance from the contents of the effect by setting the case where there is no (the timer input process at the time of the normal pattern).

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, when the hold information includes the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern at the start of the special hold advance notice, the fluctuation display time is set as a predetermined fluctuation display time.

  The suspension control command handling process in this embodiment is substantially the same as the suspension control command handling process (FIG. 19) in the first and second embodiments, and only the configuration of the special suspension notice setting process is different. . The special suspension notice setting process in the present embodiment is the same process as the special suspension notice setting process (FIG. 46) in the third embodiment.

  Here, even if the time specifying pattern is selected as the effect pattern of the special hold notice in the effect setting process (FIG. 24) when the time specifying is possible, the variation of the holding information is different from the third embodiment. The case where the display time can not be specified in advance (in the case of the pending number correspondence pattern) is included. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the hold information of the hold number corresponding pattern, the variable display time is specified as the temporary variable display time, and the effect is set.

  That is, in the variable display time table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, reach non-occurrence B and normal reach B are included as the pending number correspondence pattern, and temporary variable display times corresponding to these are set. ing. In this case, the temporary variation display time is set to the shortest possible time or less, more specifically, the time which can actually be set. Therefore, even if such a temporary change display time is incorporated into a predetermined set time in the special hold notice, the success or failure of the final special condition is not affected. That is, with regard to the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern, even if the actual variable display time is set to the longest time or the shortest time is set, the temporary change display time is the shortest in either case. Since the time is set, the success or failure of the special conditions is not affected. By doing this, the difference between the fluctuation display time can be generated by the difference between the grasp timing of the fluctuation display time for setting of the effect of the suspension notice and the setting timing of the actual fluctuation display time. Also, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience in the setting of the effect.

  In the present embodiment, the temporary variation display time is set to be equal to or less than the time that can actually be set, but after setting so as to be more than the time that can actually be set, the pending control command corresponding process May be changed as follows.

  That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, the processing of step S3201 to step S3208 is executed in the same manner as the processing of step S1201 to step S1208. If it is determined in step S3201 that the hold command has not been received, it is determined whether the shift command has been received in step S3209. If it is received, the secondary hold storage is performed in step S3210 Perform subtraction processing of the number SN. Then, in step S3211, it is determined whether or not the hold information to be shifted to the current execution area AE is the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern, as adjustment processing at the time of shift. If the pattern is not a pattern corresponding to the number of holdings, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not a shift subtraction flag is stored, and if it is stored, shift subtraction processing is executed in step S3213. If it is determined in step S3211 that the pattern is a pattern corresponding to the number of holdings, shift subtraction processing is performed in step S3213 regardless of the presence or absence of the shift subtraction flag. After execution of the process of step S3213, shift processing is performed in step S3214 similarly to the process of step S1213, and the pending control command correspondence process is ended.

  In the shift subtraction process of step S3213, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not it is a pattern corresponding to the number of holdings in the same manner as step S3211. If it is not the hold number correspondence pattern, the processing of step S3302 to step S3309 is executed as in the processing of step S2301 to step S2308. If it is determined in step S3301 that the pattern is compatible with the number of holdings, the process advances to step S3310 to determine whether a special holding advance notice is being executed.

  If the special hold notice is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3311, and it is determined whether or not the variable display time shortened from the temporarily set change display time as described above in the special hold notice. It is possible to grasp the actual fluctuation display time by referring to the value of the secondary storage storage number SN, and it is also possible to judge whether or not the fluctuation display time is shortened from the temporarily set fluctuation display time. . Note that, when the shift command is output from the main control device 81, the variation command is also output, and therefore, the configuration may be such that the actual variation display time is grasped based on the variation command.

  If it is determined in step S3311 that the time has been shortened, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the shortened time from the timer counter T is executed as a timer subtraction process in step S3312. Then, at step S3313 the subtraction command including the subtraction time and the information of the timer counter T after subtraction is set as the output target to the display control device 212, and the process proceeds to step S3308. If a negative determination is made in step S3310 or step S3311, the shift subtraction process is ended as it is.

  As described above, even when the effect is set as the temporary change display time at the time of setting the special suspension notice, inconvenience in the effect occurs by performing subtraction at the time of shift as an adjustment means after the fact Can be avoided.

  And, by setting this adjustment means as shift subtraction that can occur even during normal times, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player at the time of adjustment, and it is also necessary to provide a new process as the adjustment means. It is also possible to suppress the complication of the processing configuration.

Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the method of subtracting the timer counter T is different from that of the above embodiment. Hereinafter, different configurations will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining the timer management process in the present embodiment.

  In the timer management process according to the present embodiment, the processes of steps S3401 to S3415 are performed as in the processes of steps S2201 to S2215 in the above-described embodiments. If it is determined in step S3413 that neither the end specific change flag nor the one-shot reverse flag is stored, or if it is determined in step S3414 that it is not the timing of the specific change or the one-shot reversal effect. After the subtraction value adjustment processing is executed in step S3416, the timer management processing is ended.

  Here, in the subtraction processing of the default subtraction (step S3404) in the present embodiment, the subtraction value (subtraction width) in one processing cycle can be set. In step S3404, a process of subtracting the set subtraction value from the timer counter T is performed. In the subtraction value adjustment processing of step S3416, this subtraction value is set. The normal subtraction value is "1" as in the above embodiments.

  The subtraction value adjustment processing of step S3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the currently running game play is a play run of the hold information targeted for the special hold notification. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the subtraction value adjustment processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501 and it is the game number of the suspension information targeted for the special suspension notice, the process proceeds to step S3502 and whether or not the adjusted flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 Determine if The adjustment completed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify that the adjustment of the subtraction value has already been performed in the game run. If the adjusted flag is stored, the subtraction value adjustment processing is ended as it is.

  If the adjusted flag is not stored, the process advances to step S3503. In step S3503, a process of grasping the remaining time (setting remaining time) of the predetermined setting time is executed. Specifically, the current value of the timer counter T is grasped. In the subsequent step S3504, processing is executed to grasp the remaining time (actual remaining time) until the end of the high-speed change display in the current game round. Specifically, with reference to the address information of the effect pattern for game use, the time required to finish the high-speed variable display is grasped. Then, in step S3505, the setting remaining time determined in step S3503 is compared with the actual remaining time determined in step S3504, and a value (S1) obtained by subtracting the actual remaining time from the setting remaining time is 0. It is determined whether or not the set remaining time is longer than the actual remaining time.

  The case where S1 is larger than 0 in step S3505 means that the setting residual time is longer than the actual residual time, and the specific condition is not satisfied even if the default subtraction is performed. In this case, the process advances to step S3506 to execute a subtraction value increase lottery process. In this process, a lottery table is obtained from the ROM 243, and a lottery counter is obtained from the RAM 244, and a subtraction value (usually "1") of the timer counter T in one processing cycle is increased in default subtraction. Perform a lottery whether or not.

  In this embodiment, the winning probability is set to be different depending on the game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, and specifically, it is a 30% off result when it is a big hit result In this case, it is set to win the subtraction value increase lottery with a probability of 10%. The winning probability may be set to be different depending on the length of S1. For example, if the probability of winning becomes higher as S1 becomes longer, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness when the specific condition is satisfied. On the contrary, if the probability of winning becomes higher as S1 becomes shorter, it becomes possible to relieve the situation that the specific condition is satisfied in a short time (increase the subtraction value to make the specific condition).

  After the subtraction value increase lottery processing is executed in step S3506, it is determined in step S3507 whether or not the subtraction value increase lottery is won based on the processing result of step S3506. If the player has not won, the subtraction value adjustment processing ends. If the player is won, the process advances to step S3508. In step S3508, it is determined whether the value (S2) obtained by further subtracting the actual remaining time from S1 becomes greater than 0, that is, whether the set remaining time is longer than twice the actual remaining time. If S2 is greater than 0 in step S3508, then in step S3509, whether the value (S3) obtained by further subtracting the actual remaining time from S2 becomes greater than 0, ie, the set remaining time is 3% of the actual remaining time. Determine if it is longer than double. If it is determined in step S3509 that S3 is smaller than 0, that is, if the set remaining time is two to three times the actual remaining time, the process advances to step S3510 to set the subtraction value for subtraction to "3". Execute the process By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, the process of subtracting “3” from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed of the predetermined set time is changed to three times the speed until then.

  If it is determined in step S3508 that S2 is 0 or less, that is, if the set remaining time is 1 to 2 times the actual remaining time, the process advances to step S3511 to set a subtraction value for subtraction to "2". Execute the process By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting “2” from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed of the predetermined set time is changed to twice the speed until then.

  After the process of step S3510 or step S3511 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3512, and after the timer effect change process is performed, the subtraction value adjustment process is ended. In this timer effect changing process, a command including information on the subtraction value changed in step S3510 or step S3511 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification mode of the set time by the time display image Gp in the time display area GE becomes a notification mode different from the notification modes up to that point.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the start and the goal are displayed as this different notification mode, and the effect of moving a preset character from the start toward the goal by the vehicle is displayed. Do. When the character reaches the goal before the high-speed variation display of the pattern row Z3 in the lower figure ends, the special condition is satisfied, the image for holding P changes to a different image, and the special condition is not reached. It shall not be established. Then, when the subtraction value is set to "3" in step S3510, the vehicle is set to the rocket (Fig. 52 (a1)), and the subtraction value is set to "2" in step S3511. Set the vehicle to a motorcycle (Fig. 52 (a2)). That is, depending on the type (velocity) of the vehicle, it is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for reaching the goal (the degree of expectation for establishing special conditions).

  By doing in this way, even if the set remaining time is obviously longer than the actual remaining time, leaving the possibility that the special condition can be met, it is possible to prematurely give up the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention. In this case, from the aspect in which the success or failure of the special condition is notified by the absolute time display as in the time display image Gp, the success or failure of the special condition that the character moves from the start to the goal is notified by the relative distance display. Since the mode is changed to the mode to be performed, it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the player an uncomfortable feeling even if the speed for advancing the set time is changed.

  If it is determined in step S3509 that S3 is greater than 0, that is, if the set remaining time is longer than three times the actual remaining time, the subtraction value adjustment process is ended. That is, in this case, the adjustment of the subtraction value is not performed. This is because, even if the set remaining time and the actual remaining time are too far apart, the special value may be satisfied by adjusting the subtraction value, and the degree of attention to the special suspension notice may decrease in the first place It is a device to avoid the decrease in the degree of attention.

  If it is determined in step S3505 that S1 is not larger than 0, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than the set remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3513. The case where the process proceeds to step S 3513 is a case where the special condition is satisfied, and in step S 3513, it is determined whether the absolute value of S 1 is greater than or equal to a predetermined set value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 sec). If the absolute value of S1 is less than the set value, the subtraction value adjustment processing is ended as it is.

  If the absolute value of S1 is greater than or equal to the set value, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than the set remaining time, and the difference is greater than or equal to the set value (2 sec), the process proceeds to step S3514. In step S 3514, a subtraction value decrease lottery process is executed. In this process, a drawing table is obtained from the ROM 243, and a drawing counter is obtained from the RAM 244, and the subtraction value (usually "1") of the timer counter T in one processing cycle is decreased in default subtraction. Perform a lottery whether or not.

  In this embodiment, the winning probability is set to be different depending on the game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold advance notice, and specifically, it is 10% when it is the jackpot result and it is the outlier In this case, it is set to win the subtraction value reduction lottery with a probability of 30%. The winning probability may be set to be different depending on the length of S1. For example, if the probability of winning becomes higher as the length of S1 becomes longer, it becomes possible to suppress that the specific condition is established earlier, and conversely, the probability of winning becomes higher as S1 becomes shorter. In this way, it is possible to create a situation where the last specified condition is satisfied by shortening the difference between the set remaining time and the actual remaining time.

  After the subtraction value decrease lottery process is executed in step S3514, it is determined in step S3515 whether or not the subtraction value decrease lottery is won based on the process result of step S3514. If the player has not won, the subtraction value adjustment processing ends. If the player has won, the process advances to step S3516. In step S3516, it is determined whether the value (S4) obtained by subtracting the setting residual time from the absolute value of S1 is greater than 0, that is, whether the actual residual time is longer than twice the setting residual time. If it is determined in step S3516 that S4 is greater than 0, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than twice the set remaining time, a process of setting the subtraction value for subtraction to "0.5" in step S3517. Run. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting “0.5” from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed of the predetermined set time is changed to 0.5 times the speed until then.

  If it is determined in step S3516 that S4 is 0 or less, that is, if the actual remaining time is 1 to 2 times the set remaining time, the process advances to step S3518 to set the subtraction value for subtraction to "0.8". Execute the process to set. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting “0.8” from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed of the predetermined set time is changed to a speed 0.8 times the speed up to that time.

  After the process of step S3517 or step S3518 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3519, and after the timer effect change process is performed, the subtraction place adjustment process is ended. In this timer effect changing process, a command including information on the subtraction value changed in step S3517 or step S3518 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification mode of the set time by the time display image Gp in the time display area GE becomes a notification mode different from the notification modes up to that point.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the start and the goal are displayed as this different notification mode, and the effect that the character set in advance is moved by the vehicle from the start toward the goal is performed. When the character reaches the goal before the high-speed variation display of the pattern row Z3 in the lower figure ends, the special condition is satisfied, the image for holding P changes to a different image, and the special condition is not reached. It shall not be established. When the subtraction value is set to "0.5" in step S3517, the vehicle is set to the rocket, and when the subtraction value is set to "0.8" in step S3518, the vehicle is set. Set on the bike. That is, the same effect as when the subtraction value is increased is performed. However, if the subtraction value is set to "0.5" in step S3517, then, for example, a group of meteorites appears between the start and the goal, during which the rocket can not move at high speed and the speed is An effect that is delayed is performed (FIG. 52 (b1)). Also, if the subtraction value is set to "0.8" in step S3518, for example, a gas station appears near the goal and refueling there, etc., while the motorcycle stops just before the goal An effect is produced (FIG. 52 (b2)).

  By doing in this way, even if the set remaining time is clearly shorter than the actual remaining time, by leaving the possibility that the special condition will not be established, it is assumed that the special condition is satisfied, and the special hold notice is given on the way It becomes possible to suppress losing focus on whereabouts. In this case, from the aspect in which the success or failure of the special condition is notified by the absolute time display as in the time display image Gp, the success or failure of the special condition that the character moves from the start to the goal is notified by the relative distance display. Since the mode is changed to the mode to be performed, it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the player an uncomfortable feeling even if the speed for advancing the set time is changed. Moreover, it becomes possible to make it pay attention to which adjustment is performed among increase / decrease of a subtraction value by having matched with the production | presentation at the time of making a subtraction value increase.

  The execution timing of the process for reducing the subtraction value (steps S3514 to S3521) may be set to be earlier than that described above. That is, as the timing earlier than the start timing of the game times of the suspension information which is the target of the special suspension notice, the suspension information which is digested one before the target suspension information or the previous two is digested It is good also as composition which performs processing for reducing the above-mentioned subtraction value at a predetermined timing (for example, time of start) in a game time of suspension information performed. By doing this, it is possible to extend the special conditions that can be established early to the game times of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice.

Sixth Embodiment
In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the effect of changing the image P for suspension as a benefit to the image for suspension with a high probability of big hit as a bonus based on the establishment of the special condition in the special suspension notice is performed. However, in the present embodiment, the privilege to be granted is changed based on the establishment of this special condition.

  In the present embodiment, the character PM is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right) in the display screen G separately from each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that perform variable display (see FIG. 53A). The character PM is involved in the production of the game times, for example, the same symbol as the reach symbol forming the reach line in the reach display, such as helping to stop the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2 (for example, the change destination side Appears in the production to try to stop the fluctuation from pressing the symbol.

  When the special condition is established in the special hold notice of the present embodiment, the item A equipped by the character PM is displayed as a privilege to be given to the player (see FIG. 53 (b)). Displayed with equipped. When the character PM equips this item A, the effect of assisting the reach symbol to stop on the above reach line is different in comparison with the case where it is not equipped (specifically, it becomes flashy) To be done. Therefore, by equipping the character PM with the item A, the player can obtain a satisfaction that he / she customizes the effect of the reach display, and can immerse in the game more. The item A is not displayed unless a special condition is established in the special hold notice.

  In the present embodiment, an operation unit 75 operable by the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12 (see FIG. 1), and by operating this operation unit 75, the state of the character PM is determined by the player Output information readable by a portable terminal or the like is output. Also, by reading this output information with a portable terminal or the like, the information is stored in the portable terminal or the management server or the like. Then, by inputting the stored information into the pachinko machine 10 through the operation unit 75, the character PM is displayed in a state corresponding to the stored information. Therefore, it is also possible to display the character PM equipped with the item A, for example, since special conditions are satisfied from the start of the game, and different game consoles can be used on the portable terminal or the management server if they are the same type. It is possible to divert stored information.

  The operation unit 75 is connected to the effect control device 82, and the operation information of the operation unit is output to the effect control device 82. The operation unit 75 has, for example, a rotation operation unit capable of a rotation operation, and outputs information of the character PM according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit, or inputs information of the character PM It has become selectable. Further, the operation unit 75 is provided with, for example, a 0:00 key as an input unit for inputting information of the character PM. Then, in the above input state, a screen keyboard or the like is displayed on the display screen G, and by moving the cursor by operating the cross key, it becomes possible to input information on the character PM (for example, an 8-digit password). ing. The configuration of the operation unit 75 is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  Hereinafter, the processing for operation executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The operation processing is part of processing of the handling process for handling the operation of the operation unit 75 activated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the MPU 242, and the setting of the output state or the input state in the handling process. Is launched for In this correspondence process, other than the operation process, for example, a process for effect based on the operation of the operation unit 75 (for example, a process for performing an action such as an action of the character PM or an item A) or a special hold A process or the like for responding to the operation of the operation unit 75 in effects and settings other than the advance notice is performed.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether the operation of the operation unit 75 has been performed. In step S3601, once an operation is detected, an affirmative determination is made until processing based on the operation is completed. If an operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3602, and an operation for setting an output state has been performed (whether the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit corresponds to the direction for setting the output state) Determine If the operation is to set to the output state, the process proceeds to step S 3603, the output state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244, and the output state is set. In step S3603, information for output is grasped. That is, the process of grasping the information of the item A possessed by the character PM is executed. Then, in step S3604, an information output command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The information output command includes information indicating that the output state has been set, and information of the item A possessed by the character PM. The display control device 212 that has received the information output command receives the character from the character ROM 256. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the code image CG (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) corresponding to the information of the item A possessed by PM is read and the code image CG is displayed on the display screen G (FIG. c) see

  If it is determined in step S3602 that the operation for setting the output state is not performed, the process proceeds to step S3605, and the operation for setting the input state is performed (the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit is set to the input state It is determined whether or not the direction corresponding to If the operation is for setting to the input state, the process proceeds to step S3606, the input state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244, and the input state is set. Then, in step S3607, the information input command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The information input command includes information indicating that the input state has been set. The display control device 212 that has received the information input command receives an image for the input state from the character ROM 256 (for example, a code input). Image is displayed, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display an image for the input state on the display screen G (see FIG. 53 (d)).

  If it is determined in step S3601 that the operation has not been performed, or if it is determined in step S3605 that the operation is not for setting the input state, or after the processing in step S3604 or step S3607 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3608. . In step S3608, a process is executed to determine whether the output state is in progress by confirming the output state flag. If it is in the output state, the process proceeds to step S3609, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) which has been set in advance has passed since the output state was set. When setting to the output / input state in step S3603 or step S3606, updating of the timer counter capable of grasping the passage of time is started. Then, in step S3609, based on the fact that the value of the timer counter is numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time, it is possible to specify that the predetermined time has elapsed. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the operation processing is ended as it is.

  If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process advances to step S3610 to execute state recovery processing. In this process, the output state flag is erased to restore the normal state from the output state. Then, in step S3611, after setting the state recovery command as the output target to the display control device 212, the operation processing is ended. The status recovery command includes information indicating that the output status has been restored to the normal status, and the display control device 212 that has received the status recovery command receives an image (character PM) corresponding to the normal status from the character ROM 256. Image etc.) is controlled, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image on the display screen G.

  If it is determined in step S3608 that the output state is not set, the process advances to step S3612, and it is determined whether the input state is in progress by confirming the input state flag. If in the input state, the process proceeds to step S3613, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 sec) predetermined in advance has passed since the input state was set, or the input operation has been performed. Determine if Note that the timer counter described above is used to determine whether the predetermined time has elapsed. Further, in the input state and the output state, the predetermined time is set longer in the input state. This is because, comparing the time required for code input and the time required for code reading, it is considered that the code input has a larger operation amount and requires a long time. Further, whether or not the input operation has been performed can be determined by grasping the signal from the cross key on the operation unit 75. In the case where the code input is, for example, input of a code having a plurality of digits, if the number of operations of the operation unit 75 is required a plurality of times, the predetermined time is extended each time the operation is performed. You should do it. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the input state is canceled earlier than the completion of the operation when the operation is started near the elapse of a predetermined time.

  If it is determined in step S3613 that a predetermined time has elapsed or an input operation has been performed, state recovery processing is performed in step S3614. In this process, the input state flag is erased in order to restore from the input state to the normal state. Then, in step S3615, the state recovery command is set as an output target to the display control device 212, and the operation processing is ended. In addition to the information on the return from the input state to the normal state, the state return command includes the information on the item A corresponding to the input code, and the display control device that has received the state return command In 212, the image (the image of the character PM, etc.) corresponding to the normal state and the image of the item A are read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to play a game with the character PM equipped with the item A (see FIG. 53 (e)).

  As described above, as in the present embodiment, if the special condition is established in the special hold notice, the player is satisfied with the special condition if any benefit is given to the player, that is, the special hold notice is In order to expect that the fluctuation display time of the game times which is executed during the period being long, even if the fluctuation display time of the game times is lengthened, it does not simply become redundant and it pays attention to the game It is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree.

  In addition, if a plurality of items A are set and which item A is given as a benefit by drawing or the like every time a specific condition is established is set, the fun of collecting the items A is also added, and the interest of the game is improved. More preferable from the viewpoint. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the type of the item A to be given may be set to be different depending on the difficulty level (the length of a predetermined set time) of the specific condition. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the rarity when a more difficult special condition is established, and to increase the enjoyment of collecting the item A.

  Further, the type of the item A to be granted may be made different depending on the game play effect under execution of the special hold notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), it may be configured to be different according to the number of times of stopping of a specific symbol (for example, a main symbol with 7) in the game run under execution of the special hold notice. By doing this, it is possible to further raise the level of attention to the special hold notice and the game play being executed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the character PM equips the item A so that the reach display mode is different. However, the establishment probability of the special condition may be changed. That is, as in the operation corresponding subtraction process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, for example, in the process activated by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle), the special condition is adjusted based on the operation. It is also good.

  More specifically, it is determined in step S3701 whether or not the special hold notice is being executed, and if it is being executed, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the operation of the operation unit 75 has been performed. . If an operation has been performed, it is determined in step S2703 whether item A is displayed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S3701 to S3703, the operation corresponding subtraction process is ended as it is.

  If the item A is displayed in step S3703, the process advances to step S3704 to execute processing for selecting the type of item A. In this process, for example, a selection screen for displaying the type of the item A to be selected this time from a plurality of items A is displayed (see FIG. 55B). On this selection screen, item A (including information input from the portable terminal) given so far and subtraction value information corresponding to the type of item A are displayed. The subtraction value information is information of a time to be subtracted from a predetermined set time among information set according to the type of item A, as shown in FIG. 55 (a). The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the variable display are, for example, reduced and displayed in an area not overlapping the selection screen. Then, the type of the item A is selected based on the operation signal of the operation unit 75.

  In the following step S3705, processing for grasping subtraction value information of the selected item A is executed. Then, in step S3706, subtraction processing of the timer counter T based on the subtraction value information grasped in step S3705 is performed, and in step S3708, a command at subtraction is displayed by the display control device 212, and the operation-dependent subtraction processing is ended. The processing on the side of the display control device 212 that has received the subtraction command is as described above.

  In this way, by making it possible to reflect item A as a granted benefit in a special condition, not only the enjoyment of collecting item A is increased, but also the enjoyment of using that item A is added. And, by using the item A, the pleasure of making the item A more easily obtainable (reflected in the special conditions) is also added. In other words, it is possible to play a game in which chained fun is set by using the success or failure of the special condition, and it is possible to encourage active participation in the game and immerse in the game.

  In this case, the information of the item A may be configured to be deleted by using it during the special hold notice. By doing this, it is possible to inspire further collection of item A.

  Further, if the item A is not used in the special suspension notice of this time, the item A may be configured to be able to suspend its use until the execution of the next special suspension notice. In this way, for example, depending on the special conditions in the special hold notice, it is possible to think whether or not to use the item A, or to devise the type of the item A to be used. It will be possible to encourage participation.

  Further, the right to execute the special hold notice may be put on hold. Specifically, for example, in the special hold notice setting process, when the special hold notice execution lottery is won, it is possible to obtain the right to execute the special hold notice. When the execution right is obtained, for example, a right image indicating that the right is held is displayed on the display screen G. Then, this execution right can be exercised at the timing intended by the player, and specifically, the special hold notice can be executed based on the operation of the operation unit 75. By doing this, the game situation where special conditions are easily established in the special hold notice (for example, when there are a plurality of pieces of hold information, or when the fluctuation display time is expected to be long due to the type of the hold image P, etc.) ), The execution of the special hold notice can be entrusted to the player's will, such as the change of the hold image P or the timing to obtain the benefit such as the item A (type of hold information). Can be

  The trigger for obtaining the right to execute the special holding notice is not limited to the drawing at the time of holding the holding command, and may be, for example, a case where the number of games has reached a predetermined number (for example, 500 times). A presentation (for example, a premier presentation) may be performed, or the number of executions of the predetermined presentation may reach a predetermined number. In these cases, in the configuration for interlocking with the portable terminal etc., the total number of times may be multiple. By doing this, the right to execute the special hold notice can be obtained in various situations, and diversification of the game can be achieved.

  In addition, the special conditions for the special reserve notice that is being held may be set by lottery at the time of acquiring the right, or the above according to the game situation at the time of exercise of the right (at the start of the special reserve advance notice). It is good also as composition set up like each embodiment. In the case of the configuration set at the time of acquiring the right, it is preferable that the special condition (predetermined set time) be a configuration that allows the player to grasp (for example, a configuration in which the special condition is displayed according to the right image). By doing this, it is possible to further devise the timing of the exercise of the right. However, even if the special conditions are difficult to grasp or can not be grasped, it is possible to expect the effect of enhancing the unexpectedness at the time of exercising the right.

Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the winning combination to the upper actuation opening 33 and the winning combination to the lower actuation opening 34 are distinguished from each other, and the hold information based on the winning combination on either one (for example, the winning combination on the lower actuation opening 34) The lottery is configured to be executed prior to the on-off lottery of the hold information based on the winning on the other.

  The configuration of the holding ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The holding ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment is a first result display area reserved area Ra provided as a first acquired information storage unit, and a second result display area reserved area provided as a second acquired information storage unit. And Rb. The first result display area reserve area Ra is used to set each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS according to the winning history of the gaming ball to the upper operation opening 33. It is a reserved area for storing in series. The combination of one set of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS stored in the first result display pending area Ra relates to the pending information related to the upper operation port 33. The hold information corresponds to the special information in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the second result display area reserve area Rb has the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS in accordance with the winning history of the gaming ball to the lower operation opening 34. It is a reserved area for storing in time series. The combination of one set of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb relates to the hold information related to the lower operation opening 34 The hold information corresponds to the special information in the present embodiment.

  The first result display unit reserve area Ra and the second result display unit reserve area Rb are respectively configured by four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, and a reserve number storage area. Each storage area is a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 memory for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It comprises an area and a CS storage area for storing the value of the variation type counter CS. By the four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, the winning history of the game balls to the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 is reserved and stored up to four each.

  Then, in the winning process for the operation opening (FIG. 7) in the present embodiment, when the winning in the upper operation opening 33 occurs, the number of reserved storages RaN of the first result display area holding area Ra is less than 4 Each buffer value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS is stored in the corresponding storage area on condition that there is a certain condition. Also, when a winning on the lower operation opening 34 occurs, the jackpot random number counter C1 to the corresponding storage area, provided that the number of reserved storages RbN of the second result display area retention area Rb is less than four. The buffer values of the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS are stored.

  Further, although the detailed description by the drawings is omitted, in the present embodiment, the main holding light emitting unit 45 is a light emitting unit (first holding light emitting unit) for the upper operation opening 33 and a light emitting unit for the lower operation opening 34 (first 2) It is provided in distinction from (2) reserved light emitting unit). The hold display area Ga on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 also has a hold display area (first hold display area) for the upper operation port 33 and a hold display area (second hold display area) for the lower operation port 34. , Are set separately. Each reserved light emitting unit is provided four by one corresponding to the maximum storage number of each reserved storage number RaN, RbN, and each reserved display area is also divided into four each corresponding to the maximum storage number.

  Then, each hold command set in the above-described winning process for the operation opening includes information as to whether the operation command is a hold command based on the winning on the operation openings 33 and 34. Furthermore, the storage area 250 for holding on the side of the effect control device 82 also has a first storage area to a fourth storage area corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and a first storage area to a fourth storage area corresponding to the lower operation port 34 Is set, and in the pending display control command handling process (FIG. 19), information on pending information is stored in the corresponding storage area based on the reception of each pending command. Then, the effect control device 82 that has received the hold command controls the corresponding hold light emitting unit in response to the increase in the number of hold memories. In the reserve display area 271 of the display control device 212, a first unit area to a fourth unit area corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and a first unit area to a fourth unit area corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are set. ing. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute processing for displaying the image for suspension on the corresponding suspension display area.

  Next, data setting processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the data setting process is a process executed at the start of each game time in the game time control process (FIG. 11).

  In the data setting process according to the present embodiment, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether the second start reserve storage number RbN reserved and stored in the second result display area reserve area Rb is “0”. If the second start pending storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S3802 to S3807 is executed, and the second start pending storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S3808 to S3813.

  Here, when the data setting process is executed, the first start storage number RaN of the first result display area reserve area Ra and the second start storage number RbN of the second result display area reserve area Rb are used. This is the case where the total number of common reservations CRN is one or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”, and if not “0”, is the first start pending storage number RaN 1 or more? The data stored in the second result display area reserve area Rb is set as variable display regardless of whether or not it is. Thus, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display unit reserved area Ra and the second result display unit reserved area Rb, the second result display unit reserved corresponding to the lower operation port 34 The hold information stored in the area Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, at step S3802, the number of reserved storages RaN of the first result display unit reserved area Ra is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S3803, the common holding number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S3804, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reserve area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S3805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display unit holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area toward the lower area side, and clears the data of the first area, and also the second area → the first area, Data in each area is shifted in such a way as third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the following step S3806, a shift command is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the holding area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first result display holding area Ra, ie, the upper operation port 33. A shift command including information of correspondence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a transmission target command to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S3807 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). Based on the received shift command, the effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display in the first hold light emitting unit in accordance with the decrease in the number of held units. Furthermore, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute processing for changing the image for suspension of the corresponding suspension display area.

  In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, at step S3807, the second start reservation storage number RbN of the second result display unit reserved area Rb is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S3808, the common holding number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S2509, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reserve area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S3810, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display unit reserve area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area toward the lower area side, and clears the data of the first area, and also the second area → the first area, Data in each area is shifted in such a way as third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the following step S3811, a shift command is set. In this case, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 corresponds to the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second result display hold area Rb, that is, the lower operation port 34. A shift command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S3811 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). Based on the received shift command, the effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display on the second holding lamp unit in accordance with the decrease in the number of holding units. Furthermore, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute processing for changing the image for suspension of the corresponding suspension display area.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the hold information based on the winning to the upper operation opening 33 is stored, the winning to the lower operation opening 34 at the timing before the hold information becomes a target of the determination of the acceptance or rejection. In the case where “H” occurs, the hold information based on the winning of the lower operation opening 34 is the first to be the target of the judgment of the pass / fail. Then, for example, when the special hold notification is executed for the hold information based on the winning to the upper operation opening 33, when the winning to the lower operation opening 34 occurs, the time for a predetermined set time to elapse is increased . That is, the establishment probability of the special condition changes (increases). As described above, the special hold notice is started by adopting a configuration in which the establishment probability of the special condition can be changed based on entering the predetermined ball entry portion (lower operation opening 34) in which the special hold notice is being executed. If it is done, it is possible not only to watch over it, but also to actively continue the firing of the game ball in order to enter the above-mentioned predetermined ball entry even during the execution of the special suspension notice. It becomes.

Eighth Embodiment
In each of the above-described embodiments, not only the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice but also the information of the fluctuation display time of the other hold information contributes to the establishment of the special condition in the special hold notice. In the embodiment, this is changed so that the effect during the game play in the other hold information contributes to the establishment of the special condition in the special hold notice.

  That is, the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the game play is configured to contribute to the success or failure of the special condition in the special suspension notice. Specifically, a special reservation notice is presented, for example, as in a bingo game, a combination of predetermined symbols is presented, and a special condition is established when all or part of the combination of the presented symbols is stopped in the game round To do. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to the stop symbols of each game run when a special hold notice occurs.

  As with the pachinko machine 10, based on the game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry section (upper operating port 33 or lower operating port 34), the pending information to be the basis of the winning lottery is acquired, and the pending information In a gaming machine capable of storing up to a predetermined number as an upper limit, in addition to the game-time effect corresponding to the lottery of the hold information for each hold information, the hold notice for the hold information before the draw If an effect with a high probability of big hit occurs in this suspension notice, the attention to the suspension information corresponding to the effect is increased, but the other suspension is performed. There is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game production effect on information may be reduced. Therefore, as described above, when a high-preceding-prediction-prediction-prediction-prediction occurs, the special-prediction-notice effect that is triggered by the suspension-precedence is associated with the stop symbol of the game during execution, By raising the degree of attention to the special hold notice, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game turn presentation not only for the hold information that is the target of the hold notice but also for the other hold information.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration for associating the success or failure of the special condition with the stop symbol of each game in the special hold notice is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, with the hold notice (change of the hold image) as a start opportunity. A predetermined effect (special hold advance notice) is performed in the game round for the hold information other than the hold information that is the target of the hold advance notice, and the success or failure of the special condition set in the predetermined effect is the hold The determination may be made based on hold information other than the hold information that is the target of the advance notice.

  The success or failure of the special conditions is associated with the game results of the hold information as in the second embodiment, for example, in addition to the stop symbols of each game turn for the hold information other than the hold information targeted for the hold notification. It may be associated with the number of suspension information as in the special suspension notice table (for example, FIG. 27 (a) or 33 (a)) in each of the above embodiments, and the operation that triggered the acquisition of suspension information. It may be associated with the mouths 33, 34. Also, it may be associated with the acquisition timing of the hold information. The acquisition timing may be, for example, the difference between the acquisition timing of the target holding information and the other holding information, or the timing associated with an internal clock using an RTC or the like.

  The specific configuration will be described below. 60 to 63 are explanatory diagrams for describing an outline of the special hold notice in the present embodiment.

  The special hold notice in the present embodiment is started based on the acquisition of predetermined hold information, and is different from the game time for the hold information that triggered the start (rather than the game time for the hold information that became the trigger) It is carried out in the situation where the game time which relates to the reservation information which becomes the object of the decision of the previous decision is done. And the success or failure of the special condition in the special suspension notice is determined using the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the game run.

  In this embodiment, a special effect A for playing a bingo game using stop results for each game play and a special effect B for playing a lotto game using a stop result for each game play are provided as the special hold notice. There is. The special effect A and the special effect B are set such that the special condition is satisfied by the combination of three symbols in the special effect A, and the special condition is satisfied in the special effect B by the combination of the two symbols. In special effects B, special conditions are more easily established than in special effect A.

  First, the special effect A will be described. As shown in FIG. 60 (a), it is assumed that the special effect A is started triggered by the hold information on the hold image P2 (B) displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2. As described above, although the reserve image P2 (B) may be selected whether the game result is a jackpot result or an omission result, it is determined that any of the super reach A to C is performed Image.

  In this special effect A, if the bingo is established in the bingo game, a bonus is given to the player on the assumption that the special condition is established. Specifically, when the special effect A is performed, the bingo card 300 on which any one of the numerals “1” to “9” (symbols) is arranged, and an explanatory unit 310 for explaining the progress of the bingo game. And are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the upper display portion GU reduced at the upper part of the display screen G as a region not overlapping with the bingo card 300 and the explanation portion 310, and each vertical symbol row Z1 to Z1 Z3 is displayed side by side (upper symbol row Z1 is left symbol row Y1, middle symbol row Z2 is middle symbol row Y2, lower pattern row Z3 is right symbol row Y3). Moreover, the fluctuation direction of each symbol row Y1 to Y3 is also changed so as to scroll from the top to the bottom. The respective symbol rows Y1 to Y3 stop in the order of the left symbol row Y1, the right symbol row Y3, and the middle symbol row Y2. In the embodiment, the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are constituted only by the main symbols (symbols with the numbers “1” to “9”), and the sub symbols (“1” to “9” numbers in the above embodiments) Symbols not marked are not included. Then, the symbols (“1” to “9”) that stop in each of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 correspond to the numbers arranged in each box in the bingo card 300.

  The contents (arrangement of numbers) of the bingo card 300 are determined by lottery or the like, and the special conditions are determined by the determined contents. That is, in the bingo card 300 of 9 squares, a symbol corresponding to a combination of numbers of a total of 8 columns of 3 vertical rows, 3 horizontal rows and 2 diagonal rows corresponds to the special condition. In the bingo card 300 shown in FIG. 60 (a), the combination of “1”, “2” and “3”, the combination of “4”, “5” and “6”, “7”, “8” and “9” Combination of “1”, “4”, “7”, “2”, “5”, “8” combination, “3”, “6”, “9” combination, “1”, Each of the combination of “5” and “9” and the combination of “3”, “5” and “7” is a special condition. Then, every time the symbol is stopped in each game time, the square of the number corresponding to the stopped symbol is switched to the established square, and all squares in any of the 8 rows are cut to the established square It becomes bingo by changing, and special conditions are satisfied. In addition, it is good also as a structure in which a sub-pattern is contained in symbol row Y1-Y3, and it can be made hard to establish special conditions (bingo) in this case.

  In the present embodiment, even when the game cycle which has switched to the established space ends and shifts to the next game cycle, the information of the established space is carried over as long as the special hold notice is continued. . Therefore, the special conditions are more easily established as the number of games played in the situation where the special hold notice is performed is more.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the game round executed in a situation where special effect A is being performed, main symbols "5" and "8" are displayed from the left as a stop result of each symbol row Y1 to Y3. When “6” is stopped, a square of a number corresponding to these symbols on the bingo card 300 is regarded as a completed display so that the player can distinguish before and after the establishment, for example, in a color different from that before the establishment. indicate. In the case of the bingo card 300 in FIG. 60 (b), when “5”, “8”, and “6” are established, in the current game play, no special condition is established without being a bingo, but As a state immediately before bingo establishment, it becomes a state before the condition is established (reach state). In the condition before the condition is established, if the symbol corresponding to "2" or "4" is stopped at the next game round or later, bingo is established and the special condition may be established. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the fact that the condition is not established is displayed in the explanation section 310, and the reach line is displayed superimposed on the bingo card 300.

  In the next game round, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), if the main symbols "3", "2" and "3" are stopped from the left as a result of stopping each symbol row Z1 to Z3, middle A bingo is established by the symbol "2", and as a benefit for which the special condition is established, for example, data of one rare image is given to the player. In the next game, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the main symbols "3", "7" and "9" are stopped from the left as a result of stopping each symbol row Z1 to Z3, Three rows of bingo are established by the left symbol "3" and the right symbol "9". In this case, for example, the data of the rare image is set so that the privilege to be given to the player increases (it becomes a benefit having more merit to the player) according to the number of bingo formation lines (the number of special conditions). Grant for 3 sheets. On the other hand, in the next game, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the main symbols "3", "1", and "3" are stopped from the left as a result of stopping each symbol row Z1 to Z3: Since no bingo has been established in the current game session, and there is no longer a game session related to the hold information to be subjected to the determination of acceptance prior to the game cycle related to the hold information that triggered the start of the special hold notification. As the special condition has not been established, the special suspension notice (special effect A) is ended. Then, a notification to that effect is performed by the explanation unit 310 (for example, character display such as "Sorry", see FIG. 61 (c)).

  In the special effect B, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), if a lot is established in the lot game, a bonus is given to the player on the assumption that the special condition is established. Specifically, when the special effect B is performed, a roto card 320 on which a plurality of numbers (symbols) are arranged, and an explanatory unit 310 for explaining the progress of the roto card are displayed. The explanation unit 310 is configured to be shared with the special effect A. This is a device for reducing the storage capacity of the image data for presentation. In this case, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is reduced and displayed on the upper part of the display screen G as an area not overlapping with the roto card 320 and the explanation section 310 (upper display section GU).

  The contents (sequence of numbers) of the lotto card 320 are determined by lottery or the like, and the special conditions are determined by the determined contents. That is, in the two-lot roto card 320, a symbol corresponding to a combination of two numbers corresponds to a special condition. In the roto card 320 shown in FIG. 62 (a), it is a special condition that the symbols of "1" and "6" stop. And, each time the symbol stops in each game time, the lot of the number corresponding to the stopped symbol is switched to the established square, and the two squares of the lotto card 320 are switched to the established square. And the special condition is satisfied.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the stop result of each symbol row Y1 to Y3 is the main symbol "1", "6" from the left in the game round executed in the situation where the special effect B is being performed. If it is "3", a stop is made by stopping "1" and "6", and a special condition is established, and for example, one rare image data is given to the player as a benefit. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), if the main symbols "1," "8" and "3" are stopped from the left as a result of stopping each symbol row Y1 to Y3, then it is a lot in this game round It is assumed that the special condition has not been established because there is no game cycle related to the suspension information to be subjected to the judgment of acceptance prior to the game cycle related to the suspension information that triggered the start of the special suspension notice and no , This special suspension notice (special effect B) is ended. Then, a notification to that effect is performed by the explanation unit 310 (for example, character display such as "Sorry", see FIG. 62 (c)).

  Here, as described above, the special condition A and the special condition B differ in the number of symbols for establishing the special condition. That is, while the special condition A is satisfied by the combination of three symbols in the special effect A, the special condition is satisfied by the combination of two symbols which is a smaller number than the special effect A in the special effect B. Therefore, the special effect B is basically easier to establish the special condition than the special effect A.

  However, even in the special effect A, special conditions may be more easily established than in the special effect B depending on the type of arrangement of numbers (combination of symbols) arranged on the bingo card 300. For example, the numbers in any row of the special effect A bingo card 300 are the same as two numbers (patterns) of three numbers (patterns) such as “1”, “1”, and “6”. When there is a row whose number is different from that of another digit (pattern), the establishment probability of the special condition in this row is the same as the establishment probability of the special effect B in the example of FIG. However, in this case, in the special effect A, other columns exist, and the special condition can be satisfied by the combination of other numbers in the other. Therefore, in such a case, the probability of the establishment of the special condition is higher in the special effect A than in the special effect B.

  Details of the effect patterns of the special effects A and B will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), as the effect pattern of the special effect A, special effects A1, A2 and A3 are set such that the arrangement of numbers of the bingo card 300 is different. In special effect A1, numbers are arranged in each square so that the numbers of all nine squares are different. The arrangement of the numbers is randomly determined by lottery or the like. As described above, since the numbers of all nine squares are set to be different, in this special effect A, the success or failure of the special condition is determined by the combination of three numbers in any row of the bingo card 300.

  In the special effect A2, a predetermined cell (in the present embodiment, the center cell) is a cell that has already been established since the start of the effect, and specifically, “F” is displayed on the predetermined cell as the corresponding cell. Be done. Therefore, a special condition is satisfied by a combination of two numbers in a row (in the present embodiment, all the rows) including the established mass. As a result, as compared with the special effect B, the special effect A2 has the same number of numerals for establishing the special condition, but the special effect A has more columns (type of combination), so the special condition is It becomes easy to be established. Further, in the special effect A2, two of the combinations of three numbers are set to be the same. Therefore, in the special effect A2, in the row including the established squares, the special condition is established by one kind of numeral which is the same numeral.

  In the special effect A3, all the cells have already been established from the start of the effect, and specifically, "F" is displayed on all the cells. That is, the special effect A3 is a premium effect in which it is determined that the special condition is established at the start of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the special effect B, special effects B1, B2 and B3 are set so that the arrangement of numbers of the lotto card 320 is different. In the special effect B1, numbers are set in each square so that the numbers in the two squares are different. The arrangement of the numbers is randomly determined by lottery or the like. From the relationship with the special effects A1 to A3, in the special effect B1, the special condition is more easily established than in the special effect A1, and the special condition is more difficult to be established than the special effects A2 and A3.

  In special effect B2, the numbers in the two squares are set to be the same. Therefore, in the special effect B2, the special condition is established by one kind of numeral which is the same numeral. Compared with the special effect A2, although both are similarly specially conditioned by one type of number, the special effect A2 is more effective than the special effect B2 by the number of rows of the bingo card 300. easy. In addition, in special effect B2, the same effect is exhibited even if one of the left and right squares is "F".

  In the special effect B3, all the cells have already been established from the start of the effect, and specifically, "F" is displayed on the left and right cells. That is, the special effect B3 is a premium effect in which it is determined that the special condition is satisfied at the start of the effect.

  In each gaming session, the number of times the symbols of each symbol row Y1 to Y3 stop varies depending on the length of the fluctuation display time, and the number of times the symbols stop may increase as the fluctuation display time becomes longer. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the game times (normally off) in which the variable display time is set to 5 seconds to 10 seconds correspond to the game times when reach does not occur, and each symbol row Y1 to Y3 is left or right. Because the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are stopped once each, the total number of stops is three. In this case, the types of stop symbols (hereinafter referred to as the number of stop symbol types) are two types (when left and middle are the same, and middle and right are the same) or three types.

  In the case of a game run (normal reach) in which the variable display time is set to 15 sec to 20 sec, first, the symbols stop in the order of left and right, and reach lines are formed by stopping the same kind of symbol on these left and right Be done. In this normal reach, the middle symbol row Y2 is frame-fed from the symbol three in front of the big hit symbol (the symbol forming the reach line). That is, the symbols three in front of the big hit symbols, the symbols two before and the symbols one before are stopped in order. Then, after the symbol in front of the jackpot symbol is stopped, it is changed to the next symbol (jackpot symbol), or the game round is ended as it is, or a turning effect is performed. In this case, if the game result is a jackpot result, it will change to the next symbol after turning effect, and the jackpot symbol will stop, and if it is an out result, it will stop at the symbol one before and the game round is ended. When the big hit symbol stops in the middle symbol row Y2, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped, and the number of stop symbol types does not increase. Further, even if the symbol in front of the big hit symbol in the middle symbol row Y2 is stopped, the number of stop symbol types does not increase. Therefore, even if the game result is any case, the number of stop symbol types is four.

  In the case of a game session (Super Reach A, B) in which the variable display time is set to 45 sec to 60 sec, the game is developed into Super Reach A or Super Reach B after the stumbling effect in the normal reach described above. That is, in the normal reach, a turning effect is performed after the symbol in front of the big hit symbol is stopped, and then, as the super reach A and B, the middle symbol row Y2 is subjected to high-speed change display, and then the movie effect and animation are performed. Reach production of the production is performed. Note that these movie effects and animation effects are performed as effects of the background of the bingo card 300, the explanation unit 310, the roto card 320 and the like. In Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the content of the presentation and the jackpot expectation are set to be different. And in these super reach A and B, after either the big hit symbol or the one symbol ahead symbol of the big hit symbol goes through the effect, if it is a big hit result, the big hit symbol is finally stopped, and the out results If it is, the symbol ahead of the jackpot symbol will stop. That is, if the result is an outlier, the number of stop symbol types increases by one. Therefore, the number of stop symbol types is four if it is a jackpot result, and it is five if it is an outlier.

  In the case of the game time (Super Reach C) in which the variable display time is set to 90 sec, after the above Super Reach A, B is performed and the middle symbol row Y2 is temporarily stopped one stop ahead of the big hit symbol (Stop After the number of symbol types has become five), the middle symbol row Y2 changes again, and the symbols corresponding to the game result are stopped. In this case, if it is a jackpot result, the jackpot symbol stops after re-variation, and if it is an outlier, the symbols other than the jackpot symbol stop randomly regardless of the symbols forming the reach line. That is, if the result is an outlier, the number of stop symbol types may increase by one (in normal reach, etc., a symbol stopped before that may be stopped again). Therefore, the number of stop symbol types is five if it is a jackpot result, and it is five or six if it is an outlier.

  As described above, the number of stop symbol types in each game turn is set to increase more easily as the variable display time becomes longer, and when the variable display time of the game play becomes longer, the bingo or lotto takes place in the special hold notice. It is easy to establish and special conditions are easily established.

  Next, the suspension control command corresponding process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In steps S3901 to S3903, processing similar to the processing in steps S1201 to S1203 is executed. In step S3904, it is determined whether the hold notification counter is less than "1". If it is less than “1”, special hold notification setting processing is executed in step S3905. The setting process will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S3904, or after the process of step S3905 is performed, the process for increasing the amount of hold is performed in step S3906 as in the process of step S1208, and the command handling process is ended.

  In addition, in the processing for increase in reserve in the present embodiment, when the special reserve announcement is performed, display control is performed so that the second reserve image P2 (B) is displayed regardless of the reserve image determined in step S3903. The device 212 is controlled. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed when a super hit result occurs or a super reach result occurs even if the result is an outfall.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3901, the processing in steps S3907 to S3911 is performed in the same manner as in the processing in steps S1209 to S1213, and the command handling process is ended.

  Next, the special suspension notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4001, as a process of grasping the number of pending messages before obtaining the current pending information, the number of stored pending information other than the currently obtained pending information, specifically, “1” is subtracted from the secondary side pending storage number SN. Execute processing to grasp the numerical value. In the subsequent step S4002, a process of grasping the game result of the hold information in the hold command received this time is executed. Then, in step S4003, a lottery process for a special hold notice is executed. In the lottery process, the number of suspension information other than the suspension information acquired this time acquired in step S4001, the game result of the suspension information acquired this time acquired in step S4002, and the special suspension notice stored in the ROM 243 It is determined based on the lottery table of whether or not to execute the special hold notice.

  Here, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process performed in step S4003 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the special suspension notice depends on the number of stored other suspension information at the time of acquiring the suspension information and the acquired suspension information. It is set to be determined by the game result. That is, regardless of the acquired pending information, if the number of stored pending information is 0 (the number of secondary pending storages SN = 1), the special on-hold notice is not executed. In addition, when the number of memories of the other hold information is 1 to 3, regardless of the game result of the hold information acquired this time, the execution probability of the special hold notice as the number of memories of the other hold information increases (special The probability of winning in the lottery process as to whether or not to execute the suspension notice is increased. And, even if it is the same storage number of the retention information, when the retention information acquired this time is the jackpot result, the execution probability of the special suspension notice becomes higher than the case of the outlier result. In addition, when the game result is an out result, the information of the variable display time is specified, the lottery process at the time of out is executed when corresponding to the super reach, otherwise the lottery process itself is not executed. .

  In the present embodiment, the game result of the hold information acquired this time is configured to be reflected in the execution probability of the special hold notice, but the fluctuation display time according to the hold information acquired this time is specified first (the first embodiment described above) ), The special hold notice is executed when the variable display time is the game time that can be specified and the relative long time variable display time (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the super reach) The configuration may be easy, or the special hold notification may be performed only in the case of the variable display time that is longer than a predetermined time. By doing this, the difference between the level of attention to the holding information that triggered the special holding notification and the other holding information may be large due to the special holding notification being performed. It is possible to enhance the significance of executing the special suspension notice (special presentation A or special presentation B) in the game round related to the suspension information different from the suspension information that triggered the special suspension announcement.

  Also, instead of specifying the variable display time for all the hold information, the variable display time for hold information other than the hold information acquired this time is specified first, and the variable display time for any of the hold information In the case where the variable display time is a relatively long time, the special hold notification may be easily performed. As described above, if the variable display time becomes longer, the number of stop symbol types can also increase, so the special condition is satisfied if the hold information which is such a relatively long variable display time is included. It becomes easy to do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second holding image P2 (B) is displayed as the holding image according to the holding information that has triggered the execution of the special holding advance notice. However, in order to be able to clearly distinguish between the hold information that triggered the execution of the special hold notice and the other hold information, the hold image for the hold information that triggered the execution is for another hold The image may be different (identifiable) from the image.

  In addition, if the images P1 to P5 for suspension that can appear normally are used also at the time of execution of the special suspension notice, the storage capacity can be reduced compared to storing a dedicated image for suspension, and the image for normal suspension can be achieved. Even when is displayed, if the special hold notice occurs, it can be expected that the effect of not interrupting the interest in the production can also be expected. In the present embodiment, the bingo card 300 and the lotto card 320 in the special hold notice are displayed at the start of the game play started after the acquisition of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, and the display of the hold image The start of the special hold notice is later than the timing (at the time of holding acquisition). Therefore, even if the normal image for holding is displayed as described above, the expectation that the special holding notice can be performed after that will be further enhanced.

  Referring back to FIG. 65, after the lottery process is performed in step S4003, it is determined in step S4004 whether or not a special suspension notice is to be performed based on the result of the lottery process. If not executed, this setting processing is ended as it is. In the case of execution, the process proceeds to step S4005.

  In step S4005, processing is performed to set an effect pattern in the special on-hold notice. In this process, the effect pattern is set with reference to the effect pattern table for the big hit or the effect pattern table for the loss stored in the ROM 243. In these effect pattern tables, the effect pattern to be executed in the current special on-hold notice differs depending on the game result for the on-hold information acquired this time and the number of other on-hold information stored when the on-hold information is acquired It is set to.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 66 (c), when the jackpot effect pattern table and the jackpot effect pattern table are compared, the special hit notice is larger for jackpot than for jackout. It is easy to select an effect pattern in which special conditions in the above are easily established. Only the effect pattern table for the jackpot is selected as the special effect A3 or the special effect B3 for which it is determined that the special condition is established at the start of the effect. In addition, the special effect A2 and the special effect B2 including the mass that has already been established from the start of the effect are more easily selected for the jackpot than for the outlier. And, as already explained, the special effect B is more likely to hold the special condition than the special effect A, and the ratio for selecting the special effect B for jackpot is higher than for the detour. There is. Therefore, in relation to the game result of the hold information acquired this time, the special hold notice is performed in which the special condition is more easily established than the case where the big hit result is the wrong result. Thus, the special condition is established in the special hold notice, and the game result of the hold information which triggered the notice is linked, and the special condition is simply realized and a benefit (data of the rare image) is given. It is possible to expect not only a great pleasure but also a jackpot, and it is possible to draw attention to either while associating the presentation of each game number and the special hold notice.

  In relation to the number of pending storages, the special effect A is more likely to be selected when the number of pending storages is larger, and the special effect B is more likely to be selected when the number of pending storages is smaller. Therefore, regardless of whether the number of pending storages is large or small, it is possible to flexibly change the ease of establishment according to the situation, and the player gives up early due to the small number of pending storages at the start of the special suspension notice. It is possible to suppress an event that

  Here, as described above, in terms of the easiness of establishment of the special condition, the special effect B is more likely to be established than the special effect A when the numbers of reserved memories are the same. However, from the relationship between the detailed effect pattern and the easiness of establishment of special conditions in these special effects A and B, special effect A2 is most realized except for special effect A3 and special effect B3. It is easy for the special effect A1 to be established most easily, and in the order of A2, B2, B1 and A1. And in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which the order of these detailed establishment easiness and easiness to select respond | correspond by one to one. By doing in this way, for example, it is special effect A2 (or A3) to see the pattern of each square in more detail while making it think that the special condition does not hold when special effect A is started. It is possible to give the pleasure of the case (the opposite feeling that the special condition is established), and to immerse in the presentation and immerse in the game.

  In addition, regardless of the game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the special hold notice pattern (special effects A1 to A3 and B1 to B3) may be determined by lottery or the like, as described above. It is good also as composition provided with both with composition which determines a production pattern based on a game result. By providing a configuration that determines the effect pattern regardless of the game result, it is possible to intensify the impression that the effects of each game run and the special hold advance notice are different effects, for example, from the effect of the game play side to the special hold It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that the result of the effect on the advance notice side (the success or failure of the special condition) is predicted. In addition, if the above configuration is provided with both of the above, it is a situation where it is preferable to establish a special condition in order to produce the game game (due to the result being out despite the long fluctuation display time, the attention degree may be lowered Situations, situations where it is better not to be established, situations where the probability of establishment of special conditions per unit time is low, etc. Situations where it is difficult to secure time for granting benefits due to short display time of game times, etc. In a situation where the probability that the winning special condition is met is high, etc., it is possible to avoid contradictions and inconveniences in the rendering, thereby facilitating the rendering design.

  Referring back to FIG. 65, in the subsequent step S4006, based on the effect pattern determined in step S4005, special conditions are set, that is, numbers (designs) to be arranged in each box are determined by lottery or the like. In step S4007, a special hold notification command including the contents determined in steps S4005 and S4006 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 reads out the image data of the corresponding effect pattern from the character ROM 256 based on the reception of the special holding advance notice command, and executes the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the special holding advance notice based on the data. Control. In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is performed from the start of the game play. Therefore, the display control device 212 that has received the special holding advance notice command controls the symbol display device 41 so as to give a special holding notice from the next game play of the game play being executed at the received timing.

  After the process of step S4007 is executed, the process of adding “1” to the hold notification counter YK is executed in step S4008, and this setting process is ended. By performing the process of step S4008, a negative determination is made in step S3904 in the next hold control command handling process. That is, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the special suspension notice is not performed simultaneously at the same time. By doing this, it is possible to avoid such an event that the degree of attention is reduced due to the extreme complexity of the game. Incidentally, the suspension notice counter YK is cleared to an initial value “0” at the start of the game cycle (the termination of the special suspension notice) for which the suspension information which has triggered the special suspension notice is the object of the judgment of acceptance.

  Next, the during-variation processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4101 whether or not it is a game cycle in which a special hold notice is being executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the special hold notification is being executed, depending on whether or not the in-execution flag is stored in the RAM 244. The in-execution flag is a flag that is stored in the RAM 244 at the start of the special hold notification and is erased at the end. If the special suspension notice is not being executed, the normal variable processing is executed in step S4102, and then this processing is terminated. In the process of step S4102, another process is performed excluding the process of step S2607 in the during-changing process of FIG.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed from the start of each game play. The special hold notification start process is performed in the process for starting change (step S2503) of the variable display control process (FIG. 38). Although the specific description by the figure is omitted, in the variation start process (step S2503), it is determined whether the hold notification counter YK is "1" at the start of the start process and "1". If it is, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is being executed, and if it is not being executed, the start process of the special hold notice is executed. In the special hold notice start process, the above-mentioned executing flag is stored in the RAM 244, and the special hold notice based on the special hold notice command output-set in the step S4007 (from the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 The display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to change to each symbol row Y1 to Y3 variation display in the upper display unit GU, and to perform special holding notification of special pattern and special condition set in the special holding notification setting process. Etc. In addition, even when the holding notice counter YK is “1”, display control and the like of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to continuously carry out the special holding notice effect when the special holding notice is being executed. The ending process of the special hold notice is executed at the time of shifting to the game time related to the hold information that has triggered the special hold notice. This process will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S4101 that the special holding notice is being executed, the processing excluding step S2607 in FIG. 39, specifically, the processing in steps S2601 to S2606 and steps S2608 to S2616 is performed. Similarly, in steps S4103 to S4117, deceleration processing is performed at the deceleration timing of each symbol row Y1 to Y3, stop processing is performed at the stop timing, and other effects during fluctuation are executed. . Incidentally, in the process of step S4115 in the present embodiment, not only the determination of whether or not it is the stop timing of middle symbol row Y2, but also the determination of whether or not it is the temporary stop timing of middle symbol row Y2, If it is the timing of (1), the determination is positive. The temporary stop timing means the timing at which the middle symbol row Y2 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stop timing at the time of frame advance effect or the like) in the reach effect already described.

  As mentioned above, in the game turn under execution of special suspension notice, upper symbol row Z1 corresponds to left symbol row Y1, middle symbol row Z2 corresponds to middle symbol row Y2, lower figure symbol row Z3 corresponds to right symbol row Y3. The deceleration order and the stop order also correspond to the order in the normal variable display (the same as the order in the normal variable display). Further, the deceleration timing and the stop timing also correspond to the timing in the normal fluctuation display (the same as the timing in the normal fluctuation display).

  And in this embodiment, after performing stop processing (Step S4112, Step S4114, Step S4116) of each symbol row Y1-Y3, processing for special reservation notice at the time of stop is performed in Step S4118, and during change End processing. Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the special hold notification process (step S2607) after the deceleration process of the lower figure design row Z3 is not performed.

  The special hold notifying process at the time of stopping (step S4118) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4201, a process of grasping the stop symbol of the symbol row stopped in the current stop processing is executed. In this process, the symbol row stopped this time by grasping the effect pattern and the stop symbol set for the current game cycle in the variation start process (step S2503) executed at the start of each game cycle You can grasp the stop symbol of. In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration for confirming the rendering pattern and the stop symbol which has been set as described above, the symbol that is actually stopped at the time of stop may be confirmed. For example, it is possible to temporarily store the symbol stopped or temporarily stopped in the immediately preceding stop process (step S4112, step S4114, step S4116) in the RAM 244 or a register, and refer to it. A counter or the like that changes in accordance with the fluctuation of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 (Z1 to Z3) is provided, the position of each symbol in fluctuation can be grasped by the counter, and the symbol stopped this time by confirming the counter It is good also as composition which can be grasped.

  In the following step S4202, processing for grasping the special conditions in the special holding notice being executed is executed. That is, while grasping the numbers (symbols) arranged in each square as special conditions, it is grasped whether or not those squares are established squares. As a specific configuration of this process, for example, storage areas with the number of squares (9 or 2) set in the special suspension notice are provided in the RAM 244, and the positions of the squares in each of the storage areas, It is possible to store numbers (patterns) placed as special conditions. In addition, an area for storing a flag for grasping whether or not the cell has already been established is provided corresponding to each storage area. For correspondence between the storage areas and the positions of the squares, for example, a loop counter that can be updated from 1 to 9 and returns to the initial value (1) when updated to the maximum value (9) is used. In step S4202, for example, from the storage area of the cell corresponding to the number 1 to the storage area of the cell corresponding to the number 9, information of the numbers (patterns) stored in each storage area and the squares for which it is established And repeatedly collect information on whether or not. If the special hold notice being executed is the special effect B, numerical information and information indicating whether or not those squares have been established are collected in the storage areas of numbers 1 to 2 among the storage areas.

  In the above configuration, it is preferable that, among the information of each storage area, the processing for determining whether or not a mass has already been established be executed prior to the processing for acquiring information of numerals (symbols) arranged in the corresponding mass. . Since it is not necessary to grasp information on numbers (symbols) with regard to established squares, the process can be omitted, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  After executing the special condition grasping process in step S4202, it is determined in the subsequent step S4203 whether the symbol stopped this time is a symbol that constitutes a part of the special condition. In addition, in this process, even if it is a symbol which constitutes a part of special conditions, when it is a thing corresponding to the completed mass, it shall be negative judging. If the determination in step S4203 is affirmative, the process for correspondence is performed in step S4204, and if the determination in step S4203 is negative, the process for non-correspondence is performed in step S4205.

  In the processing for correspondence in step S4204, processing is performed to change the cell corresponding to the symbol stopped this time to a completed cell. Specifically, a command including information on the corresponding cell is output and set to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command changes the background of the corresponding cell to a background of a color different from the background before the light, for example, so that the corresponding cell is changeably distinguishable from before the light The image data is read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image data.

  On the other hand, in the non-correspondence process of step S4205, a process for notifying that there is no box corresponding to the symbol of the symbol row stopped this time is executed. Specifically, a command including information indicating that there is no corresponding mass is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command indicates that there is no corresponding box (for example, an effect that displays an image in which a predetermined character is disappointing, or “something” in the explanation unit 310. Image data is read from the character ROM 256 to perform display effect etc.), and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image data.

  In addition, although there is no square corresponding to the symbol stopped this time, when it corresponds to the square already established, it is good also as composition which performs an effect different from the above-mentioned effect. Specifically, for example, it may be an effect of displaying an image in which a predetermined character is disappointing while comparing the symbol stopped this time with the established squares corresponding to the symbol. Therefore, it may be displayed as "It is established." By doing this, the player can clearly grasp that there is not only a corresponding mass this time but also a symbol which has been previously stopped, and he is more interested in the special hold notice. It can be done.

  In addition, the fact that the symbol which had been stopped before is overlapped, for example, when this event occurs in the stop processing of the right symbol row Y3, the symbol which stopped before that corresponds to the left symbol row Y1 If it is a thing, since a reach line will be formed by symbol row on either side, reach display will occur in this game round. Therefore, although the occurrence of an event that overlaps with the symbol stopped before this does not contribute to the success or failure of the special condition from the viewpoint of success or failure of the special condition, the game from the viewpoint of the game outcome of the game There is a high probability that the result will be a big hit result. Therefore, as described above, in the case of overlapping with a symbol that has been stopped before, if it is configured to notify it, it is possible to shift the target of interest in the game times from the special suspension notice, these special It becomes possible to enjoy the effect while closely associating the hold notification and the game play.

  In addition, when it overlaps with the symbol which stopped previously as mentioned above, as a composition which becomes high possibility that the game result of the game turn will be a big hit result, it is not limited to when reach display occurs, and is the same The probability of becoming a jackpot result may be increased by so-called chance display (continuous effect) in which symbols and symbols of the same type stop continuously. That is, the game times when the possibility of becoming a jackpot result is high is not limited to the game times when the duplication occurs, but may be game times thereafter. And the duplication of a stop symbol may also target the symbol which stops over a plurality of game times.

  After the process of step S4204 or step S4205 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4206. In step S4206, it is determined whether the special condition is satisfied by the current stop process. Specifically, in the case of the special effect A, it is determined whether or not a bingo line is formed by switching to the cell established this time, and in the case of the special effect B, it is switched to the cell established this time It is determined whether or not the lot is established by the event. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4206, a process of storing a condition satisfaction flag indicating that the special condition is met is executed in the RAM 244, and a privilege is awarded based on the satisfaction of the special condition in step S4207. Execute the privilege granting process for If it is determined in step S4206 that the special condition is not satisfied, or after the process of step S4207 is performed, the process of the special hold notifying notice at the time of stopping is ended.

  More specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, the privilege giving process (step S4208) first executes a process of grasping the symbol array stopped at this time in step S4301. That is, processing is executed to grasp whether the symbol row stopped this time is the left symbol row Y1, the right symbol row Y3, or the middle symbol row Y2.

  In the following step S4302, it is determined based on the processing result in step S4301 whether the symbol row stopped this time is the left symbol row Y1. In the case of the left symbol row Y1, in step S4303, an assignment process is executed. In this attachment process, a command indicating that the special condition is satisfied is output and set to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 having received the command reads out image data for reading data such as a rare image as a benefit from the character ROM 256 and displays the image so as to apply a benefit according to the established special condition. The symbol display device 41 is controlled.

  If it is not the left symbol row Y1 in step S4302, it is determined whether or not it is the right symbol row Y3 in step S4304. If it is the right symbol row Y3, it is determined in step S4305 whether a reach line is formed by the left and right symbol rows Y1 and Y3. If the reach line is not formed, the process advances to step S4303 described above to execute an assignment process.

  If it is not the right symbol row Y3 but the middle symbol row Y2 at step S4304, or if the reach line is formed by the left and right symbol rows Y1 and Y3 at step S4305 and the reach display is made, step S4306 Go to In step S4306, a grant carryover process is performed. In this processing, processing for carrying over so as to be granted thereafter is performed without giving a privilege corresponding to the establishment of the special condition during the current game run. In the present embodiment, a bonus according to the above-mentioned special condition establishment is given at the end of the current game run, not during the current game run. Then, as a process for carrying over, a process for storing a carryover flag indicating that the special condition has been established but the benefit is not yet given is held in the RAM 244.

  Further, in this carry over process, a command indicating that the above-mentioned carry over state is set is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command displays, for example, a character or a character display such as "I'll give you a bonus later" so as to notify that it is in the carryover state. Those image data are read out from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image.

  After the awarding process is executed in step S4303 or after the awarding carry over process is executed in step S4306, the privilege awarding process is ended.

  Next, the special hold notification process during shift (step S3910) in the hold control command corresponding process (FIG. 64) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4401, it is determined whether a special condition has already been established. In this process, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped by confirming the condition satisfaction flag stored when the positive determination is made in step S4206. If the special condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4402, and it is determined whether a privilege is given. In this process, the presence or absence of the above-mentioned carryover flag (stored in the carryover process in step S4306) is grasped, and if the carryover flag is stored, the benefit is not given, and if the carryover flag is not stored It is determined that is given. If the carryover flag is stored and the privilege is not given, the giving process is executed in step S4403. This process is similar to the process of step S4303.

  However, when a bonus is awarded in the awarding process of step S4403, an image for awarding the bonus is continuously displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) even after the game cycle after shift is started. In this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the benefit (code) can not be read despite the benefit being granted (the code is displayed). In this case, regardless of the length of the variation display time of the game times after the shift, it is preferable to continuously display an image for providing a benefit. In this way, it is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that the image display for providing the game ends when the game cycle after the shift ends.

  If it is determined in step S4401 that the special condition is not established, or if the privilege is already given in step S4402 (if the carry over flag is not stored), or after the process of step S4403 has been executed, step S4404. Go to In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the current shift is a shift to hold information triggered by a special hold notice, that is, whether or not the next game play is a game turn pertaining to hold information triggered by a special hold notice. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4404, the process advances to step S4405 to execute special hold advance notice termination processing. Specifically, a command indicating that the special holding advance notice ends is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command performs processing for ending the special hold notification. For example, the image display unit 41 is controlled to read out from the character ROM 256 image data showing an explanation of the end of the special holding advance notice such as "Let's play again!" In the explanation unit 310 or the like. Also, in the special hold notice termination process, initialization (clear) processing of various flags (in-execution flag, established flag, carry over flag, etc.) and various counters (hold notice counter YK, etc.) used in the present special hold notice. I do. Thereafter, the special hold notification process at the time of shift is ended.

  The effect at the end of the special hold notice may be continued for a predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) even after the shift (after the start of the next game play). As a result, it is not only suppressed that the effect at the time of the end is missed, but also that the game time in which the effect at the time of the end is performed is the game time related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. It is possible to make the player clearly grasp.

  Further, when the effect at the end of the special hold notification and the giving process of the step S4403 overlap, priority is given to the effect of the giving process, and then the special effect at the end of the special hold notice is performed. In this case, in the special hold notice lottery process (step S4003), the fluctuation display time of the game times relating to the hold information acquired this time is specified, and the period for continuously displaying the image for giving the above-mentioned benefit is longer than In the case where the length is the length, the special hold notice may be made executable (that is, the special hold notice may be made possible in other cases except when the variation display time of the direct hit B is short). In this way, it is possible to end the display for giving the benefit before the end of the game cycle related to the suspension information that triggered the special suspension notice, for example, new specials at the next game cycle It is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as duplication of processing and display when generating a suspension notice. In addition, for a player who is expecting super reach A to C to occur by the image for suspension, the situation in which the normal reach before super reach is performed may be a so-called waiting time in which the degree of attention may be relatively reduced. There is sex. Then, if it is set as a structure which gives a privilege in such a situation (namely, the situation before development to super reach), the waiting time can be effectively used by the special reservation notice side, and attention degree can be raised with good balance.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4404, the process proceeds to step S4406, in which it is determined whether or not a condition before satisfaction of conditions, which is a condition in which special conditions can be established during the next game round. If the condition is not satisfied yet, in the subsequent step S4407, processing for notifying that the condition is not satisfied is executed. Specifically, a command indicating that the condition is not satisfied is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads out from the character ROM 256 image data (for example, display of “reach”, see FIG. 60C) for showing in the explanation unit 310 that the condition is not satisfied. And controls the symbol display device 41 to display the image data. Thereafter, the special hold notification process at the time of shift is ended.

  Here, the condition before satisfaction may be set as, for example, the condition where bingo or lot is satisfied in one more box, or may be set as condition before satisfaction according to the number of stop symbol types in the next game round. It may be configured to In this case, when a shift command is received, it is preferable to grasp the number of stop symbol types on the basis of information included in the command of the game play (change command or type command) because the command is also received. In the present embodiment, as the fluctuation display time is longer as described above, the number of stop symbol types increases. Therefore, if the number of stop symbol types grasped increases as the condition before condition satisfaction is set, the condition before condition satisfaction is satisfied. By being set, it becomes possible to predict that the next game play has a high jackpot expectation and the variable display time is long.

  Further, as described above, since notification of the condition prior to the establishment of the condition in the special hold notice is not performed during the game turn but at the time of the shift, the effect of the game turn and the special hold notice in each game turn You can focus your attention on whether or not special conditions about That is, when notification of the condition before satisfaction of the condition in special hold notice is performed in the middle of the game round, reach display for notifying the previous stage when the jackpot result is notified in each game time, and notification of the condition before satisfaction of the condition , May be confused. Therefore, with the above configuration, in a configuration in which each effect (effect for game circulation and special suspension notice) is performed in parallel, it is possible to concentrate on each effect.

  The timing at which the notification of the condition before satisfaction of the condition is satisfied may be changed according to the number of the hold information. Specifically, when the condition before the condition is established in the special hold notice, there is still a play time that is executed before the game round related to the hold information targeted for the special hold notice. For example, as in the present embodiment, it is configured to notify a condition before satisfaction of the condition at the time of shifting to the game time to be executed before the condition, and if there is no game occurrence to be performed before the condition. It may be configured to notify that effect during the game based on the fact that it has become. However, in this case, when the condition is established, it is determined that the symbol may stop during the game, and if the symbol does not stop, there is no possibility that the special condition is established. It is preferable that the notification of the condition before satisfaction of the condition is not performed. By doing this, it is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that the symbol does not stop and the special condition is not established at all although the notification of the condition before the condition is established is performed.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned special suspension notifying process at the time of shift, it is configured not to refer to the game result before the shift. This means that even if the game is running a special hold advance, for example, even if it is a jackpot result, the continuation of the special hold advance is executed after the game turn and opening / closing execution mode resulting in the jackpot. I mean. In this way, the special hold notice ends (by becoming a big hit result) according to the game result on the game side even though the special condition is satisfied (the condition is not satisfied), for example. It is possible to avoid such an event that the user would otherwise end up, and to avoid an event such as wishing that special conditions have been established and wishing that the game result on the game circulation side is too far off. Also, in this way, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the benefit (image data) given in the special hold notice and the benefit (prize ball) given in each game turn, which is given in each game turn There is no need to reset the special conditions on the special hold notice side to change the game conditions directly linked to the player's profit, such as a small number of benefits, and so on. Etc. can be facilitated.

  In addition, as a timing of granting a benefit based on the establishment of the special condition, there are provided a case of giving during the game time and a case of giving at the time of shift of the hold information. Specifically, when it is the timing when the left symbol row Y1 has stopped or when the right symbol row Y3 has stopped without the occurrence of a reach, a configuration is given that a bonus based on the special condition is established during the game round. And other than that, it was the composition given at the time of shift. In the game session, the player is expected to first generate reach display, and in view of the reach display occurring after the right symbol column Y3 is stopped, the left symbol column Y1 is stopped after the left symbol column Y1 is stopped. It may be a waiting time for the player until the right symbol row Y3 stops. Further, when the right symbol row Y3 is stopped but the reach display is not generated, it is possible for the player to wait until the middle symbol row Y2 is stopped and the game is ended. In particular, since the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is reduced in size by the upper display unit GU during execution of the special suspension notice as described above, compared to the situation where the special suspension notice is not executed. There may be fewer elements to enjoy watching and changing the symbols. Then, if it is set as the composition which grants the privilege based on special condition formation using these waiting times, using the waiting time in the game circulation efficiently, it will control that interest to a game fades. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the right symbol row Y3 is stopped and the reach display occurs, it is considered that interest in the effects on the game side increases as the jackpot result can be notified in the game turn. Therefore, when the right symbol row Y3 is stopped and the reach display is generated, the special condition is satisfied and the time to give the benefit based on the establishment is left (after that, the fluctuation display time of the game times is Even if it remains, it was not configured to give a benefit during the game turn (it is given at the time of shift to the next game turn). Therefore, it is possible to avoid such inconvenience that attention is dispersed between the reach indication of the game play and the special hold notice, and the effect can not be enjoyed.

  When the special condition is established by the middle symbol row Y2 being stopped, it is not the game time but the time to shift to the next game time. After the middle symbol row Y2 is stopped, the remaining time of the variation display time of the game times is small, and even if the privilege is given, the player can not recognize it or can not read the code indicating the benefit. There is a possibility that you can not receive the benefits. Then, if it is set as the structure which provides a privilege at the time of the shift (start time) of the next game number, the above problems can be avoided.

  Note that the ending process (step S4405) of the special hold notice may be performed by the process for start of change (step S2503) or the process for ending change (step S2506). In this way, the processing load can be dispersed without having to perform processing for the special hold notification at the timing when the processing load can be extremely increased, such as at the time of holding information shift.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined holding image (second holding image P2) is selected as the holding notice, the special effect A or the special effect B is executed as the special holding notice with a predetermined probability. The special hold notice is executed as a game time different from the game time related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, in the game time that is executed prior to the game round related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Ru. Here, by giving a holding advance notice, while it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game time concerning the holding information which is the target of the holding notice, the game concerning the holding information which is the target As the degree of attention to times increases, the degree of attention to other game times may be reduced. That is, since there is a high possibility that a benefit (prize ball) will be given as a result of the game play, the player expects that the game play will be carried out early, and if so, for the previous game play, There is a possibility that it may be felt troublesome. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to play this special hold notice by giving a special hold notice in the game play which is different from (which is executed before) the game play related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice. If the interest of the person is raised, it is possible to enjoy the game even during the game play which can be felt troublesome. Therefore, the attention degree to a game can be raised suitably.

  Since the special condition is set in the special suspension notice and the privilege is given based on the establishment of the special condition, it is possible to preferably raise the degree of attention to the special suspension notice. And, by setting this special condition to be established in relation to the stopping result in the running game, it is possible to increase the attention to the stopping result on the side of the game.

  Due to the relationship between the game result on the game turn side and the stop result, the types of stop symbols as the stop result are greater in the case where the game result on the game turn side is out of the result than in the case of the big hit result. Therefore, the special condition is more easily established when the game result on the side of the game run is a result that is more out than the case where the result is a big hit. Thereby, even in a situation where the degree of attention on the game turn side may decrease, it is possible to draw attention to the special hold notifying side, and the degree of attention can be enhanced in a balanced manner.

  The number of times each symbol row Y1 to Y3 stops in each game play is set to increase as the variation display time of the game play increases. Therefore, the special condition is more easily established in the special hold notice, as the variation display time of the game times executed in the situation where the special hold notice is performed is longer. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the slack caused by the prolonged game times. In particular, the situation in which the special suspension notice is being performed is a situation in which the game times targeted for the suspension notice (second image for suspension P2) triggered by the special reservation are being reserved thereafter, and the player If you expect the game times that are the subject of the suspension notice, the longer the previous game times may be, the more annoying the game times may be. Therefore, as described above, if the special condition on the special hold notice side is more easily established as the game time is longer, the problem due to the prolonged play of the special hold notice is avoided. Is possible.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of this embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations may be applied individually to the other embodiments and the modifications thereof, or some or all of them may be combined and applied to the other embodiments and the modification thereof. Moreover, it is also possible to combine arbitrarily all or one part of the various structure shown to each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exhibited) of each configuration to be a combination be secured. The following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration including a combination of the embodiments, and some or all of the configurations may be combined and applied.

  In the above embodiment, the probability of establishment of the special condition may be different depending on the number of times the symbol stops depending on the variation display time, but the variation display time is the same and the number of times the symbol is stopped is different It may be configured that the establishment probability of can be different. For example, in a so-called pseudo-series effect in which variable display and stop of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are performed a plurality of times during one game, changing the variable display time during one game by changing the time of one variable display It is possible to increase the number of symbol stops. Generally, the above-mentioned pseudo-series effect is set as the expectation degree that the game round becomes a big hit result is higher as the number of times of the variable display and the stop during one game round is larger. Therefore, assuming such a configuration, regardless of the length of the variable display time, the special condition is easily established if an effect with a high degree of expectation that results in a big hit is generated in the game round executing the special suspension notice. It becomes composition. Therefore, even if it is a case where the effect with a high degree of expectation resulting in the jackpot result is temporarily out, it is secured about the easiness of establishment on the special condition side (special condition becomes easy to be established), and the game round It is possible to compensate for the situation where the degree of attention may be reduced in the side effect by the special hold notification side, and to maintain the balance of the overall degree of attention.

  Although the number of times the symbols have been stopped (the number of stop symbol types) has been increased by developing into a highly anticipated super reach that results in a big hit in the staging of the game play side, the reach with a low degree of expectation that results in a big hit It is good also as composition which the number of times of stop of a pattern (number of stop symbol kinds) increases. For example, super reach D is provided in addition to the above super reach A, B, and C, and when it is distributed to the super reach D, the frame sending effect of the middle symbol row Y2 (although the degree of expectation to be a big hit is low) The stop effect is set to be configured to be repeated long (temporarily stop many times). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the special hold notification side even in a situation where the game circulation side's attention may be reduced by performing the rendering with a low degree of expectation.

  In an effect in which symbols during reach (in particular, middle symbol row Y2) are frame-fed, the number of stop symbol types may be different depending on the start position (pattern) or end position (pattern) of the frame feed. That is, for example, in the case of the effect that the symbols from the front three to the front one of the symbols forming the reach line are the frame feed, the number of stop symbol types in the middle symbol row Y2 is three, When the symbols from the fifth to the first before the symbols forming the reach line are frame feed, the number of stop symbol types in the middle symbol row Y2 is five. By doing this, it is possible to change the establishment probability of the special condition without increasing the type of reach, and diversification of effects can be achieved. As such a configuration, the start position (pattern) of frame advance may be associated with the jackpot expectation of the game play. For example, if the configuration is such that the jackpot expectation decreases as the position of frame advance becomes earlier (as the number of stop symbol types increases), the special hold notification side compensates for the decrease in the degree of attention on the game side. On the contrary, if it is set as a structure which a jackpot expectation degree becomes high, so that the position used as frame advance is early (as the number of stop symbol types increases), the attention degree of both effects can be raised. In these configurations, the frame advance start / end position (pattern) may be associated with the variable display time. That is, the longer the period in which the frame-by-frame effect is performed, the longer the fluctuation display time can be, and the more the number of stop symbol types. Therefore, by prolonging the frame-by-frame effect, it is also expected to avoid the decrease in the degree of attention to the change display time of the game times relating to the suspension information other than the suspension information causing the special suspension notice. Can.

  As a production for the game circulation, in a plurality of game times or in a pseudo-series production during one game circulation, etc., it is provided with a production that suggests that it is likely to be a big hit result by stopping the same symbol or the same kind of symbol. It is good also as composition. By performing this effect, the degree of attention is increased with respect to the stop symbol on the game circulation side or the type thereof, but the degree of attention may be reduced if different symbols or different types of symbols are stopped. On the other hand, in the special hold notice, the special condition is more easily established as the number of types of symbols to be stopped is more, so as described above, the attention of the special hold notice may be the more attention Thus, the overall degree of attention can be enhanced in a balanced manner.

  Although the configuration has been made to reflect the number of stop symbol types in each game turn on special conditions, the effect of the special suspension notice is not limited to the above (BINGO or LOTO), and may be another effect, and during the game play As long as the effect of is reflected in the special condition, it is sufficient. For example, a configuration may be made to reflect the number of times of a predetermined effect as a special condition, and as the predetermined effect, the player intervenes (the operation of the operation unit 75 or the operation of the ejection handle 54, the predetermined operation of the player by the motion sensor, etc. Or the like) may be possible effects, or may be effects that can not be intervened. In the case of the effect that the player can intervene, for example, the configuration in which the probability of establishment of the special condition changes based on the number of times of operation of the operation unit 75 or the operation timing, or the operation unit based on an instruction (mission) from the pachinko machine 10 side A configuration may be considered in which the probability that the special condition is satisfied changes depending on the number of times of operating 75 and not operating 75.

  As an effect in the special suspension notice, a predetermined image (for example, a rare image or the like) is displayed in a state of being difficult to visually recognize / invisible state at the start of the special suspension notice, and the predetermined image is easy to be visually recognized by operating the operation unit 75 / It may be a so-called scratch effect which changes to a visible state. As described above, if an effect that allows the player to intervene is executed in the game round related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold advance notice, the more special conditions are established as the operation unit 75 etc. is performed. If it is easy to do so, make the operation enthusiasm, and even if the degree of attention to the game times pertaining to the hold information other than the hold information that has triggered the operation may temporarily decline, the degree of attention to the game in total Degradation can be avoided. Even in these cases, the variable display time may be associated with the number of occurrences and the number of operations of these effects, or the number of occurrences and the number of operations of the effects regardless of the variable display time. The probability that the special condition is satisfied may be changed according to.

  Even in the effect that the player can not intervene, for example, the type of the character or the like appearing as the effect during the game play may be reflected in the success or failure of the special condition. Specifically, for example, a plurality of characters may appear as effects during game play, and the degree of expectation that the result of the game play becomes a jackpot result differs depending on the type of the appearing character. And, if the special effect A is the bingo card, if it is the special effect B, the above-mentioned plurality of characters are arranged on the roto card, and the square on which the character appeared during the game is arranged is regarded as the established square . Then, if the established squares are aligned and a bingo (loto) is established, a special condition is established and a benefit is given. In this way, it is possible to associate the special hold notice with the special hold notice even if the effect is different from the variation pattern of each game turn, and it is possible to associate the special hold notice with the special notice during the game play. In the above configuration, if a special condition is more easily established as a character with a lower expectation as a result of a game hit appears as a result of the game play, a situation in which the attention degree of the game play may be reduced is the special hold notification side. It is preferable to make up for the

  As the special suspension notice, for example, a privilege of a predetermined image (for example, a rare image or the like) may be given regardless of the success or failure of the special condition. In this way, it is possible to provide fun different from the effect on the game turn side such as viewing at least a predetermined image, and the special hold notification side can secure a decrease in the degree of attention on the game turn side.

  The start timing of the special hold notice is at the start of the game times after the acquisition of the hold information that triggers the special hold notice, but it may start before that, or after that It is also good. Since the number of stop symbol types may differ depending on the start timing of the special hold notice, it may be used to change the probability of establishing the special condition. Specifically, for example, although it is informed that the special hold notice is given first, the number of stop symbol types may be reduced by delaying the start timing. By doing so, it may be possible to draw attention to the start timing of the special hold notice, and it is possible to anticipate further improvement in the degree of attention.

  As an effect of the special suspension notice, an effect (for example, a movie effect or the like) which is continued over a predetermined period may be displayed. Specifically, based on the acquisition of the suspension information that triggered the special suspension notice, the above-mentioned movie effect is started, and according to the fluctuation display time of the game times related to the suspension information other than the suspension information that became the trigger. The period in which the movie presentation can be seen is different. In this way, for the player who wants to watch the movie effect for a long time, it becomes rather preferable that the fluctuation display time of the game play becomes long, and the inconvenience due to the fluctuation display time becoming long can be avoided. . In this case, a plurality of movie effects may be stored according to the length of the fluctuation display time of each game time, and movie effects of the same time as the fluctuation display time may be selected, or a length close to the fluctuation display time Select the movie production of the video and adjust the difference in length on the movie production side (for example, adjust the start timing and the end timing, add or reduce the movie production for adjustment for a short time to the selected movie production, etc. Etc.) may be configured.

  The special hold notice may be configured to shift to an acquisition state in which the player can obtain a benefit in response to a predetermined hold notice. Specifically, for example, based on the fact that the predetermined holding image (second holding image P2) is displayed, the player shifts to an acquisition state in which a predetermined benefit (a rare image, an item, etc.) can be acquired. And may be configured to select or acquire the benefit. In this way, the longer the variable display time of the game times relating to the suspension information other than the suspension information that triggered the special suspension notice, the longer the period of the state of selecting / acquiring the benefit, the game It is preferable for the disabled. In this case, it is also possible to select / acquire benefits other than in that state, and by making different the selectable / obtainable benefit and the selectable / obtainable benefit in the state other than that state, the state and Can enhance the superiority of If the operation unit 75 is used to select / acquire benefits, active participation of the player can be promoted. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the benefits that can be selected / acquired differ depending on the points or the like held by the player. In this case, points may be awarded based on the number of times played, may be awarded based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect during the game played, or may be granted based on the number of visits to the gaming hall. . The points may be diverted between different gaming platforms or different days, and the number of points is read by a portable terminal or the like possessed by the player, and the number of points is stored by a portable terminal or the management server. Good. If the acquired benefit is something that can be used during the game (for example, when the acquired item is used, the game effect is changed to an effect different from normal), the benefit and the game effect of the special hold notification side It is possible to enhance the relevance of the production of

  As a privilege to be granted based on the establishment of the special condition, for example, the number of benefits (the number of rare image data) and the quality of the benefits (rare degree of the rare image) are made different according to the number of bingo lines established in the special effect A Or give different benefits depending on the type of symbol forming the special conditions (bingo line or lotto) (if it includes 7 symbols that can be easily associated with a big hit, etc., give higher benefits) May be

  Depending on the game situation at the time of establishment (levels of support mode and lottery mode, the number of reserved memories, etc.), the privilege to be awarded this time may be different, or the privilege to be awarded this time may be different according to the special conditions established before that. May be As a configuration to vary the benefits to be given according to the game situation, the special condition is that the degree of expectation of the benefits (prize balls) of each game turn side (as a result of the winning lottery based on the winnings in the operation openings 33, 34) is lower. If the bonus based on the establishment is increased, the special suspension notice can compensate for the decrease in the degree of attention to the game round due to the low degree of expectation of the bonus of each game round side, and conversely, the bonus of each game round If the benefit based on the establishment of special conditions is increased as the degree of expectation of is higher, the special hold notice will be given in the situation where the degree of attention is relatively high, and the degree of attention to the special hold notice can be easily increased In the above embodiment, since the second suspension image P2 in which the jackpot result or the super reach is determined is set as the execution condition of the special suspension notice, the execution rate of the special suspension notice can also be increased. In addition, in the configuration in which the privilege to be awarded this time is different according to the special condition established before, data of the already granted privilege is stored in the gaming machine (RAM 244), and the privilege to be awarded this time is based on the data. In the configuration to be determined (for example, the configuration to make it difficult to be granted the award already granted), and the configuration in which the player can input the game data etc stored in the portable terminal or the external server to the gaming machine It is good also as composition which decides a privilege given this time with reference to a privilege memorized by a person's portable terminal or a server. In addition, it is possible to use different configurations of benefits given according to the time zone, the day of the week, the date, and the like by using a real time clock (RTC) function.

  In the special condition setting (step S4006) in the special holding advance notice setting process (FIG. 65), the numbers (symbols) to be arranged in each box are based on the number of holding times and the game result of the holding information which triggered the special holding notice. Although the configuration is to be determined, the configuration may be such that the suspension information already stored is referred to. For example, as in the timer input process (FIG. 29) at the time of the time specifying pattern in the first embodiment, a configuration is used in which the effect pattern of the hold information is specified earlier. Then, when setting the special conditions, the effect pattern of the stored suspension information and the stop result are specified in advance, and based on that, the numbers (symbols) to be arranged in each box are determined. In this way, based on the previously identified result, it is possible to create an effect that the special condition is established, and also to be an effect that the special condition is not established.

  The special hold notice may be extended if the special condition is not established in the special hold notice. Specifically, for example, at the time of shifting to the game time related to the suspension information that triggered the special suspension notice (step S4405), the special suspension notice relates to the subsequent suspension information based on the subsequent suspension information A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to extend the game times (when shifting). Then, when the lottery is won, the special hold notice is extended. For example, when the subsequent hold information is a jackpot result, if the special hold notice is easily extended, the special hold notice is extended and not only the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. If, on the other hand, the pending information after that will be the jackpot result, it can be expected that the degree of attention can be suitably increased.

  As a special hold notice, as in the special effect A and the special effect B, it is configured to perform whether or not the special condition is satisfied during the special hold notice, but the special condition is satisfied during the one special hold notice. It does not have to be possible. For example, the special hold notification may be given to give points, and storing the points may make it easy to give a benefit. In addition, when the special holding notice is performed, the points to be given may be different depending on the number of holdings at that time. Furthermore, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to award points, and the points may be awarded when the lottery is won. In these cases, depending on the number of points and the number of points, the provided benefits may be different (image data having different rare degrees may be provided).

  For example, while the special conditions have been targeted for success or failure, all the game times to be executed before the start of the game times related to the holding information that triggered the special holding notice during execution of the special holding notice are, for example, The target game times may be selectable. For example, the probability of being selected (selected) differs depending on the image for holding. More specifically, the configuration is such that the probability of being selected (selected) is higher as the image for holding has a lower jackpot expectation. In this way, it is possible to preferably compensate for the attention to the game times in which it is predicted in advance that the jackpot expectation degree is low as the holding image, by the special hold notification side.

  It goes without saying that the number of digits (number of squares) of the bingo card 300 and the lotto card 320 in the special effect A and the special effect B is not limited to the above. When changing the establishment probability of the special condition, the number of digits may be changed. For example, a bingo card 300 or lotto card 320 having a large number of digits (number of squares) is easily selected as the number of reserved memories is large, and a bingo card 300 or lotto card having few digits (number of squares) as the number of reserved memories is small 320 may be selected easily. Further, in the bingo card 300 or the lotto card 320, an effect in which only one square is set may be set.

  The symbols (numbers) arranged in each square correspond to the main symbols of the variable display in a one-to-one relationship, but for example, squares corresponding to a plurality of symbols may be provided. In this case, for example, the number may be a number such as "odd" or "even", or the range may be defined as "1 to 5" or "6 to 9".

  Although the cell already established (the cell on which “F” is displayed) is provided from the start of the special suspension notice, it may be configured to switch to the established cell at a predetermined timing after the start. For example, even if a predetermined effect (for example, reach display) occurs during the execution of the special hold notification, the number of held memories reaches the upper limit, or the like, a non-established mass is switched to a established mass Good. In this case, it is preferable that the stop symbol of the game run being executed is read from the variation pattern at the switching timing, and the box corresponding to the symbol not to be stopped is switched to the box already established. This is because, even if the player switches to a well-established square, if the square is a square corresponding to the symbol that should have been stopped and displayed in the game round, the player feels lost.

  In the non-correspondence process of step S4205 in the special hold notification process at the time of stop, although there is no box corresponding to the symbol of the symbol row stopped this time, the symbol stopped this time corresponds to the box already switched In the case where it is determined, the established cell may be switched (returned) to the non-established cell, or it may be determined whether to switch to the non-established cell by lottery or the like. In this way, special conditions are less likely to be established, and special effects can be diversified. In the case of a configuration in which it is determined by lottery whether or not to switch to a non-established square, the probability may be different depending on the stopped symbol or the game state.

  In the present embodiment, the special suspension notice is not redundantly executed, but may be redundantly executed. For example, if the hold information acquired this time is a predetermined result (big hit result), duplication is permitted, but if it is not so, the duplication is limited. The game result of the held information can be associated with the game result (the player can know that the special hold notice is a predetermined result). The same applies to the other embodiments as to the presence or absence of duplication of the special suspension notice.

  In this embodiment, the special effect A and the special effect B are configured to be started at the start of the game play (processing for change start) started after the acquisition of the hold information that triggers the special effects A and B. In the relationship with the stop timing of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the game run, it is configured to start at least after the start of the game run and until the first symbol stops (until the upper symbol row Z1 stops) Just do it. That is, the presentation timing of the special condition in the special suspension notice is not limited to the start of the game play, as long as it is presented at least before the first symbol is stopped. In addition, even after one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped in the game session, if there is a remaining symbol row during fluctuation, special effects A and B are started during the game session (special conditions Configuration). In these cases, the symbol already stopped may be reflected in the special effects A and B (if there is a square corresponding to the stopped symbol, it may be switched to the established square), or it may not be reflected. Good. However, as the number of remaining stop symbol types in the game session increases, the special effects A and B can be enjoyed to the fullest, so as described above, at least the first symbol is set to start by stopping. Is preferred.

The ninth embodiment
In the eighth embodiment described above, the special hold notification is used as a trigger to reflect the effects of game times other than the game times related to the hold information that has triggered the special hold notification on the special conditions in the special hold notice, but the present embodiment In the form, not only the presentation of the game times, but also the information related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold advance notice is reflected in the special condition.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the special effect A, one of the images P1 to P5 for holding is arranged in each box. Then, if the image for suspension relating to the suspension information acquired during execution of the special suspension notice is the image for suspension corresponding to the bingo card, the cell is regarded as the established cell. When a row of established squares is aligned and a bingo is established, a corresponding benefit is given.

  For example, in FIG. 71 (a), it is assumed that the fourth suspension image P4 (D) of the first unit suspension display area Ga1 is the target of the special suspension notice (in the present embodiment, the trigger for executing the special suspension notice) Is not limited to the second holding image P2). Then, in the bingo card 300, for example, the second holding image P2 (B), the third holding image P3 (C), the fourth holding image P4 (D), and the fifth holding image P5 (E). Each is arranged. In the explanation section 310, a description is given of the special hold notice for establishing the special condition (BINGO) in the holding image.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), the hold image relating to the hold information that is the trigger for the execution of the special hold notice is the fourth hold image P4 (D), and the hold information of the game run being executed. Since the hold image (the hold image for the display area Gb for execution) pertaining to is the fifth hold image P5 (E), the fourth hold image P4 (D) in the bingo card 300 at the start of the special hold notice. The squares of the fifth suspension image P5 (E) become the established squares. In this example, since the condition before satisfaction of condition (reach condition) is established at the start of the special suspension notice, an explanation to that effect is given by the explanation unit 310. In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is started when the hold information is acquired, not at the start of the game play. Therefore, it is possible to reflect the information of the game play being executed (the hold image related to the game play) under the situation where it is decided to execute the special hold notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the image for suspension corresponding to the suspension information acquired after that is displayed in the second unit suspension display area Ga2, and the image for suspension is the second image for suspension P2 ( In the case of B), the cell of the second storage image P2 (B) in the bingo card 300 is changed to a cell which has already been established. As a result, in the case of this example, it becomes BINGO by having completed the established squares, and notification of the establishment of the special condition and a benefit based on the establishment are given (announced by the explanation unit 310) ).

  In this way, it is possible to give the pleasure of acquiring the hold information after the start of the special hold notice. At the start of the special suspension notice, the special condition is made to reflect the image for suspension pertaining to the suspension information that has already been acquired (for suspension of the suspension information that has already been acquired and is not the object of the qualification judgment It is good also as composition that is the mass corresponding to the image for suspension which is the target of the pass / fail judgment and which is the image or the suspension information which has already been acquired and which is the target of the judgment of acceptance. The hold image relating to the hold information that has become the target may or may not be the target. In this way, the special condition is more easily established as the number of the hold information stored at the start of the special hold notice is larger, and the significance of storing a large amount of the hold information during the game can be enhanced.

  The process in this case will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Similar to steps S3901 to S3904 in the hold control command corresponding process of FIG. 64, the processes of steps S4501 to S4504 are executed. Then, in the special hold notice setting process in step S4505, a process is performed to determine whether or not the special hold notice is to be executed, and in the case of execution, the type of the bingo card 300 in which the holding image is arranged in each box. The processing to determine is performed, and the information is output to the display control device 212.

  The type and arrangement of the holding images of each box in the bingo card 300 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be determined in relation to the holding image according to the acquired holding information. If the special conditions (BINGO) are to be easily established, the arrangement of each cell may be determined so that the image for suspension relating to the already obtained reserved information is arranged as much as possible, and the special condition (BINGO) is established. In order to make it difficult, the arrangement of the cells may be determined so that the image for holding relating to the acquired holding information is not arranged as much as possible.

  Also, depending on the game state, the configuration may be such that the type and arrangement of the holding images of each box are changed. For example, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the winning lottery is relatively high and low are set as the gaming state. The type of image for suspension selected is likely to be a jackpot result (such as the first image for suspension P1 (A) or the second image for suspension P2 (B)). It is considered to be easy to select, and conversely, the type of the image for holding to be selected has a low probability of becoming a jackpot result because the probability of the jackpot result is lower in the low probability mode. It is considered that the holding image P5 (E) and the fourth holding image P4 (D) etc. can be easily selected. Therefore, if the type and placement of the image for retention to be placed on the bingo card 300 are determined according to these modes, it is possible to adjust the easiness / inconsistency of special conditions to some extent at the gaming machine side at the start of the special suspension notice. can do.

  In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which a reserve image that is easy to be selected is arranged in a square that easily contributes to the establishment of the special condition like the square in the middle of the bingo card 300, the special condition becomes easy to be established. The special condition is less likely to be established if As described above, the establishment probability of the special condition may be changed according to the position of the placed mass.

  The process of step S4506 is the same as the process of step S3906. If the command received from the main control device 81 in step S4501 is not the hold command, it is determined in the process of step S4507 whether it is a shift command or not as in the process of step S3907. Similarly to the processing in step S3908 and step S3911, the processing for reducing the secondary storage reserve SN in step S4508, and the shift processing in step S4509 are performed. After the processing for increase in hold of step S4506 is performed, or after the shift processing of step S4509 is performed, the process for judgment of hold is performed in step S4510, and then this command handling process is ended. In the hold determination process in step S4510, the presence / absence of a box corresponding to the hold image related to the increased / decreased hold information is determined, and if the corresponding box exists, processing is performed to set it as a satisfied box. .

  In step S4510, when the image for suspension (image for suspension displayed in the display area for execution Gb before reduction) related to the reduced suspension information corresponds to the established mass, the suspension information Even if D is digested, it may be configured to continue as the established mass, or may be configured to return the established mass, in which the holding information is digested, to the original mass other than the established mass. In the former case, special conditions are easily established, and the game of the special hold notice itself is also easy to understand, so even a beginner who is not accustomed to the game can sufficiently enjoy the special hold notice game. Become. Also, in the latter case, it becomes possible not only to be able to concentrate on the game by becoming difficult to establish special conditions, but also to make special conditions to be established before the established squares are no longer established squares. It is conceivable to continue the firing of the gaming ball so as to obtain the holding information, and it is possible to suppress so-called strike-off.

  In particular, when the configuration of the present embodiment is applied to a gaming machine provided with priority means for performing the application judgment and the game play first on holding information acquired later as in the seventh embodiment described above, a trigger for holding notification. It is possible to more effectively utilize the period until the game result related to the hold information that has become notified is notified. That is, it is considered that the player who wants to know that there is a suspension information having a high jackpot expectation degree due to the suspension notice needs to be played earlier according to the suspension information. Therefore, in the case of the configuration provided with the priority means as described above, if the suspension information is further acquired during execution of the suspension announcement, there is a possibility that the game round related to the suspension announcement may be postponed. , And may be motivated not to obtain additional pending information. Therefore, as described above, if it is configured to reflect on the success or failure of the special condition also about the suspension information acquired later in the special suspension notice, it is possible to make the significance of acquiring the suspension information further, so-called punctuation Can be suppressed more suitably.

  In the above embodiment, the hold image is applied to the BINGO game (special effect A). However, points are given according to the type of the hold image during the special hold notice, and a benefit is given according to the points. It may be configured as For example, if the configuration is such that the lower the jackpot anticipation degree is, the higher the points awarded will be, for example, there will be more points where the fifth hold image P5 is given than the first hold image P1, etc. Even if the image for suspension pertaining to the suspension information other than the suspension information that has become the suspension information is the one with low jackpot expectation, it is possible to give another pleasure (many points are given) different from the jackpot result, and the degree of attention Can be well-balanced. The points based on the image for holding may be provided by lottery or the like, and the points may be carried over even after the end of the special holding advance notice.

  In the hold display setting process (step S4503) of the hold control command handling process (FIG. 72), the hold image may be determined by lottery or the like regardless of the execution of the special hold notice. The image for suspension of this time may be determined with reference to the image for suspension of each square in the special suspension notice, or the both may be used properly depending on conditions such as the gaming state.

  In the above embodiment, the configuration relating to the change of the image for holding shown in the other embodiments may be applied. That is, when the image for suspension changes at a predetermined timing, if there is a square corresponding to the image for suspension after the change, the square is switched to the established square. In this way, it is possible to preferably associate the effect using each mass in the present embodiment and the image for holding and the effect regarding the change in the image for holding in the other embodiments. Then, not only the game associated with the holding information in one-to-one correspondence with the holding information that the game result of the holding information corresponding to the holding image is predicted by the change of the holding image but also the holding image after the change It becomes possible to play a multi-step game of giving a privilege by utilizing for other effects (the special hold notice in the present embodiment), and temporarily the game result about the hold information corresponding to the image for hold after change is a game It is possible not to discourage the player even if it is not desirable for the player.

Tenth Embodiment
In the ninth embodiment, the image for holding is reflected in the special condition as information related to the holding information other than the holding information that triggered the special holding advance notice, but in the present embodiment, the holding information being executed is The number will be reflected in the special conditions.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the numbers 1 to 4 are arranged on the bingo card 300. Then, for example, if the number of pending information at the start of the special pending advance notice is “2”, the cell in which “2” is placed is determined as the completed cell. In this case, if there is no addition of the hold information by the game times related to the hold information that has triggered the special hold advance notice, the number of the hold information shifts from “2” to “1” above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), if there is no addition of the hold information, the cell of “1” will also be a completed cell besides the cell of “2”. If there is an addition of suspension information during execution of the special suspension notice (due to entry to the operation port 33, 34) and the number of suspension information becomes "3" or "4," it corresponds to the number The target cell is defined as the established cell. In FIG. 73 (c), after the number of pending information becomes one (from the state of FIG. 73 (b)), two more pending information are added, the number of pending information becomes “3”, and the corresponding cell is It shows that BINGO has been established by changing to established squares.

  In this way, during the execution of the special hold notice, the special hold notice can be enjoyed with a simple configuration such as increase or decrease in the number of hold information. And, as described above, it also makes sense to add the hold information after the start of the special hold notice, and it is possible to suitably increase the attention to the game during the special hold notice.

  Furthermore, since the number of the hold information changes according to the shift of the hold information (digestion of the game times), even after the special hold notification is started, even if there is no addition of the hold information (operation opening 33, Even if the ball does not enter 34, the special condition can be established. That is, for example, in the case where the number of holding information at the start of the special holding advance notice is "3", "3", "2", "1" are arranged in any row of each box of the bingo card 300 If it is a column, special conditions will hold if there is no additional hold information after the start of the special hold advance notice. In this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that the player is annoyed without entry into the operation openings 33 and 34 being easily generated, and the special condition is already established at the start Compared with the effects (for example, the special effects A3 and B3 in the eighth embodiment), the special conditions are satisfied while the special conditions are satisfied (provided that the addition of the hold information is not added). It will be possible to entertain the way you do.

  In addition, as the number of pending information at the start of the special pending advance notice increases, special conditions are more likely to be established (for example, "4", which is the upper limit of the pending information storage, is placed in a plurality of squares, or "4" is bingogo It may be arranged in the center of the card 300). In this way, the user can be motivated to store as much suspension information as possible before the start of the special suspension notice, or can be motivated to add the suspension information even after the start.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the suspension information acquired after the start of the special suspension notice is reflected in the special condition, an acquisition trigger for the suspension information exceeding the storage limit of the suspension information (entry to the operation openings 33 and 34) occurs. In this case, the acquisition of the suspension information may not be performed, but the occurrence of the acquisition trigger may be reflected in the special condition. In this case, the bingo card 300 is arranged with the numbers “5”, “6”,... Exceeding the storage condition.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 74, in the winning process for the operation port on the main control device 81 side, the processes of steps S4601 to S4608 are performed in the same manner as the processes of steps S201 to S208. If it is determined in step S4603 that the pending storage number N is "4" or more, the process proceeds to step S4609. In step S4609, a process of setting an upper limit command indicating that an acquisition trigger for pending information exceeding the storage upper limit has occurred as a transmission target to the effect control device 82 is executed. After the process of step S4609 is performed, the process proceeds to the process for the lower working port of step S4607.

  In the case where winnings in the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 overlap, a plurality of the upper limit commands may be set, or the upper limit command may include the overlapping information. It is also good. The former configuration is preferable from the viewpoint of simplification of the processing configuration, and the latter configuration is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing an increase in the number of input / output of commands.

  As the processing on the side of effect control device 82, in the processing corresponding to the command for suspension control of FIG. 75, the processing when the suspension command is received (steps S4701 to 4706 which is the same processing as steps S4501 to S4506), shift command In addition to the processing when received (steps S4707 to step S4709 similar to steps S4507 to S4509), if the command received from the main control device 81 is not the hold command or the shift command, step S4710 It is judged whether or not it is the above upper limit command. In the case of the upper limit command, in step S4711, for example, the number of minutes over which the storage upper limit is exceeded is processed as a process for reflecting the information for which the acquisition trigger of the suspension information exceeding the storage upper limit has occurred. A process of adding "1" to a counter for storing is executed. Note that this counter is cleared to "0" in the shift process (step S4709).

  Then, after processing in any of step S4706, step S4709, and step S4711, in addition to the image for holding and the number of holdings, the presence or absence of squares for which the storage upper limit has been exceeded as processing for holding determination in step S4712. In addition to the determination, if they exist, processing is performed to change to the established cell.

  In this way, in the configuration that effects are performed using information on pending information other than the pending information that triggered the special pending advance notice, it is suppressed that the interest is extremely lowered due to the fact that the pending information is not acquired. It is possible to

  As a general gaming machine, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a winning or losing lottery is performed based on entering a ball into the operation opening 33, 34, and a winning ball is given based on the entering of ball, pending information for the passing or missing lottery In the situation where the upper limit of the memory is the upper limit of the memory, the winning lottery is not performed based on the entry to the operation openings 33 and 34, and only the winning balls are obtained. In this case, if there are a lot of prize balls based on entry to the operation openings 33, 34, it is considered that the merits of entering the activation openings 33, 34 are considerable even if no lottery is performed. However, there are few prize balls based on entering the ball into this operation opening 33, 34, or there are as many prize balls as entering balls (one prize ball for one entering ball) or there is no prize ball In the case of the configuration, the merit of entering the operation port 33, 34 in the situation of the memory upper limit may be extremely reduced. On the other hand, increasing the number of winning balls or increasing the storage upper limit may be undesirable in terms of management of the game rate of the gaming machine. Therefore, as described above, if a benefit (image data, a game item, etc.) that does not directly participate in the benefit such as a winning ball is easily provided based on entering the ball exceeding the storage upper limit, It is possible to make the player feel merit even if the ball exceeds the upper limit of storage.

<Other Embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations may be individually applied to the above embodiments, or some or all of them may be combined and applied to the above embodiments. Moreover, it is also possible to combine arbitrarily all or one part of the various structure shown to said each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exhibited) of each configuration to be a combination be secured. The following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration including a combination of the embodiments, and some or all of the configurations may be combined and applied.

  (1) In the specification process of the fluctuation display time on the side of the effect control device 82, the fluctuation display time is specified based on the counters C3 and CS and the fluctuation display time table for the suspension information of the suspension number non-correspondence pattern The variable display time may be stored in the storage area for holding 250 in the process at the time of reception of the hold command (for example, step S1208 for increase in hold), or the hold command output from the main control device 81 Information may be included.

  (2) In the timer input process (FIG. 29) at the time specifying pattern, in step S1710, the subtraction start timing of the timer counter T may be changed based on the time specified in steps S1701 to S1709. That is, the special condition becomes difficult to be established by delaying the subtraction start timing, and the special condition is easily established by shortening the subtraction start timing. By changing the subtraction start timing in this manner, by adjusting the probability of success or failure of the special condition, it becomes possible to suitably execute the special hold notification without requiring a change of the specified time.

  Also, in the variable start process (step S1303) of the variable display control process (FIG. 38), the high-speed variable display of the lower figure pattern row Z3 is ended according to the end timing of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice. The effect pattern may be set. In this case, the effect pattern may be set so that the special condition is satisfied, or the effect pattern may be set so as not to be satisfied. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined according to the game result of the current game run, or the success or failure of the special condition may be determined according to the game result of the other hold information. In addition, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined based on the gaming state (the height of the lottery mode or the support mode, the number of the hold information, etc.).

  (3) In the above embodiments, the variable display time is described as including the fixed time in each game time, but it is not included, the fixed time is separately grasped, and the timer counter T is input and subtracted. It is good also as composition which performs etc. For example, this configuration may be applied to a gaming machine having a configuration in which the determined time may change depending on each gaming time or gaming state.

  (4) The display of the time display area GE is not limited to the above, and may be another display. For example, the configuration may be such that the image is displayed in an area (for example, the upper right portion of the display screen G) apart from the image P for suspension regarding the suspension information that is the target of the special suspension notice. Further, for example, the display may be superimposed on the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the entire display screen G. In this case, the time display area GE may be displayed behind each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in order to suppress the decrease in the visibility of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Further, the display of the time display image Gp is not limited to the above, and may be another display. That is, the number of digits of display is not limited to the above, that is, the minimum unit of subtraction is not limited to the above. Further, instead of the Arabic numerals, they may be displayed as Chinese numerals, or they may be displayed not in digital but in analog.

  (5) Although the configuration is such that the type of the image P for holding is changed based on the establishment of the special condition, the determination of the establishment of the special condition may be performed a plurality of times. In other words, in the above embodiment, the special condition is satisfied that the predetermined set time passes and then becomes 0, but it is changed and the predetermined set time passes and it becomes 0 or the predetermined condition A configuration may be adopted in which winning a lottery at a timing is regarded as the establishment of a special condition.

  For example, a plurality of determination timings are set in the remaining time of a predetermined set time (for example, five determination timings of 30 seconds, 20 seconds, 10 seconds, 5 seconds, and 0 seconds remaining) are set. Then, it is judged at each judgment timing whether or not the type of the image P for holding is to be changed, and when it is judged that the type of the image for holding P is to be changed, the image P for holding is changed. That is, the possibility of changing the determination timing by the number provided is high. By doing this, the opportunity for establishing special conditions increases, and the number of times the special hold notice is watched can be increased accordingly.

  (6) The configuration may be such that the change of the image P for holding is gradually performed in accordance with the elapse of a predetermined set time (in accordance with the change in probability of establishment of the special condition). For example, the image data of a plurality of holding images P are provided so that the change from the fourth holding image P4 (yellow) to the third holding image P3 (red) is performed stepwise, and a predetermined setting time is set. The image data of the holding image P may be updated so as to approach the fourth holding image P4 to the third holding image P3 as the value approaches 0. In this case, if the color is different depending on the type of the holding image P as in each of the above embodiments, the color is updated so as to gradually approach the color of the holding image P after the change before and after the change. If the configuration is different depending on the type of the retention image P, the shape may be updated so as to approach the shape of the retention image P after change gradually from before the change to after the change.

  In these cases, the time input to the timer counter T at the start of the special hold notice is divided by the stepwise updating number (for example, 5), and the holding image P is updated each time the divided unit time passes. Configuration.

  By thus changing the color and the shape of the image for holding P step by step, the player can grasp the establishment probability of the special condition based on the color and the shape of the image for holding P. Therefore, the time display image Gp in the time display area GE may not be displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to intuitively grasp the remaining time as compared with the configuration in which the remaining time can be grasped in real time by the time display image Gp, and it is possible to make the presentation easy to understand. Further, by doing this, it becomes possible to make it difficult to realize even if the remaining speed of the set time or the remaining time is changed, and it is also possible to preferably perform adjustment during the production. In addition, the amount of image data stored in advance can be reduced as much as the time display area GE and the time display image Gp are not displayed.

  Also, the effect indicating the establishment probability of the special condition can be changed as follows. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), an effect simulating the sunrise of Mt. Fuji may be executed as an effect indicating the establishment probability of the special condition of the special hold notice. In this case, an image in which the sun starts to appear from Mt. Fuji is displayed at the start timing (FIG. 59 (a1)), and an image in which the day has completely exited from Mt. Fuji is displayed at the end timing (FIG. 59 (a2)). This makes it possible to grasp the establishment probability of the special condition depending on the degree of sunrise. In particular, by applying an effect, such as sunrise, which would potentially recognize that the player can not watch without waiting for a relatively long time, to the effect indicating the establishment probability of the special condition, Even if the effect is unfolded for a long time, it will be possible to look without discomfort.

  Further, the establishment probability of the special condition may be performed by a notifying unit (for example, the display light emitting unit 63 or the like) different from the display screen G. Further, as a different notification means, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the notification may be made on the screen PG of the portable terminal. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, by reading the code of the special condition, the special condition at the time of display of the code may be displayed on the portable terminal, or augmented reality (AR) It is good also as composition which displays like a change of establishment probability on a screen PG of a portable terminal using technology etc. in real time. In this case, the markers AR1 to AR4 for augmented reality may be displayed on the image for special hold notification (for example, the time display area GE), or the image for normal game use (for example, background image or symbol row Z1 to Z3) You may display on. If the markers AR1 to AR4 are updated in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 1 sec cycle), it is possible to display the change of the establishment probability on the portable terminal.

  When displaying using a portable terminal or the like, the establishment probability of the special condition may be displayed directly on the display screen G and abstractly displayed on the screen PG of the portable terminal (FIG. 59 (b1)). Conversely, the display screen G may be displayed abstractly and may be displayed directly on the screen PG of the portable terminal (FIG. 59 (b2)).

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the number for which the special hold notice is redundantly executable is adjusted using the hold notice counter YK. However, this may be changed. That is, in each of the above embodiments, the special hold notice based on the hold information of the out result is executed overlappingly at the upper limit of two, and the special hold notice based on the hold information for the jackpot result is performed at the upper limit (one). Do not overlap) This may be performed redundantly by the number of stored suspension information. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing a drop in the degree of attention or understanding to one special suspension notice due to duplication of special suspension announcements, it is preferable to adjust the number of possible duplicates as in the above embodiment.

  (8) The character PM and the item A are not limited to the above. For example, the character PM may not always be displayed, or the type of a plurality of characters PM may be set, and the player may select which character PM to display. Also, it goes without saying that the position and size at which the character PM is displayed is not limited to the above.

  For the item A given as a benefit based on the establishment of the special condition, for example, the level of the character PM may be used, or the experience value for raising the level may be used.

  (9) The special condition is that the predetermined set time has elapsed and it becomes "00.00", but it is not limited to this as long as the condition establishment probability changes based on the elapsed time. . For example, a setting time may be provided on a game-by-game basis, such as “to allow 30 seconds to pass at next game turn” or “to allow 40 seconds to pass within two game times”.

  In addition, the special condition may be that the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect that may occur during the game time reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the predetermined effect may be reach display, or may be advance notice such as bubble notice or fish school notice during game play, and execution and stop of variable display in one game turn In the gaming machine having an operation button or the like, an operation instruction effect such as the operation button or the like may be performed. As these effects, the number of occurrences may be set to increase as the variable display time becomes longer. Thereby, it can be set as the conditions which establishment probability changes based on progress of time. In this case, as the display of the special condition in the special suspension notice, for example, a character display such as "Let the X effect appear X times! The suspension changes!"

  In this case, as in each of the above embodiments, the number of occurrences of the predetermined effect necessary for the establishment of the condition may be set based on the lottery counter and the number of the hold information, or the change of the hold information The configuration may be such that the effect pattern is grasped based on the value of the type counter CS and the number of occurrences of the predetermined effect is grasped, and then the number of times necessary for condition satisfaction is set. In any case, by making it possible to set the case where the condition is established and the case where the condition is not established, diversification of the special suspension notice can be achieved.

  (10) The special condition (predetermined set time) is always displayed during the execution of the special suspension notice, but even if the special condition is not displayed, any condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the passage of time If it is possible for the player to know that the determination based on the above is performed, the display of the details of the special condition may not be performed.

  Further, even in the case of displaying, it may be displayed so that the player can grasp the special condition at least between the start and the end of the special holding notice. For example, it may be configured to display only at the start of the special hold notice, may be displayed at a predetermined timing in the middle of the special hold notice, and is a structure in which display and non-display are repeated. May be In the non-display mode, the visibility of the special suspension notice may be relatively lower than that in the display mode.

  A method of non-display is a configuration in which the time display image Gp is not simply displayed in the time display region GE (for example, a configuration in which the time display region GE or the display screen G is partially or completely hidden) It may be a configuration that may be hidden by another image (a time display image Gp is displayed on the back), or may be shielded by a movable part or the like so that it is difficult or impossible to view from the front. May be configured.

  In this way, even if it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the time display image Gp, the player can grasp the passage of time with his own sense (counting in the head, etc.). It is possible to create a fun game. In this case, it is possible to add the enjoyment that only the player can grasp the success or failure of the special condition when he / she grasps the time lapse by himself, and can obtain a sense of superiority to surrounding players. it can. In addition, in a configuration in which subtraction other than default subtraction is performed in a situation where the time display image Gp can not be viewed, when it becomes possible to view thereafter, with elapsed time being grasped by one's sense as described above The different times are more likely to be displayed on the time display image Gp. As in each of the above embodiments, in the case of a configuration in which the other than the default subtraction is more likely to occur as the jackpot expectation is higher, a time different from the time that the player was grasping by his sense is displayed Would be expected to come to expect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the pleasure of grasping the time lapse by itself in a situation where the time display image Gp can not be visually recognized.

  (11) The determination timing of the special condition is not limited to the high-speed variation end timing of the lower figure design row Z3, but may be another timing. For example, it may be the start time (time when the image P for holding moves to the display area Gb for execution) of the holding time of the holding information which is the target of the special holding notice, or the holding information which is the target It may be a predetermined timing in the game time before the game time. However, as the determination timing of the special condition is later, more game times can be related to the success or failure of the special condition, so that the degree of attention to the related game times can be suitably increased. Become. In addition, since the determination timing is a branch point of effects during game play (in the above embodiments, a branch point on whether reach display occurs or not in the above embodiments), the determination is performed at a timing when the attention degree is increased. , It can control that a judgment is overlooked.

  (12) The special hold notice may be provided with a pattern to be subtracted by a player's intervention (for example, an operation of the operation unit 75) in addition to or instead of each subtraction pattern (default subtraction, subtraction at shift, etc.). In this case, the degree of subtraction may be different depending on the degree of participation and skill of the player.

  Specifically, a self subtraction pattern is added as a subtraction pattern. When the self-subtraction pattern is selected, a predetermined game effect is performed during execution of the special suspension notice. In the predetermined game effect, for example, points obtained by the operation of the operation unit 75 may be changed, such as a rhythm game, a four-choice quiz, an action game, and a shooting game. Then, based on the obtained points, the degree of subtraction of the timer counter T is changed. That is, in the case of a rhythm game, an effect of matching the instruction timing on the display screen G with the operation timing of the operation unit 75 is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds). If the operation timing matches the instruction timing (if it is a shift within the first predetermined range) subtraction of 4 seconds is performed, and if it deviates more than that (if it is a shift outside the first predetermined range and within the second predetermined range 2) subtraction is performed. Further, if it deviates more than that (if it deviates from the second predetermined range), the subtraction is not performed (the subtraction of 0 sec is performed). In this case, since the number of times of instruction timing (the number of times of game occurrence) can be adjusted on the gaming machine side, the success or failure of the special condition is compared to the configuration in which subtraction is performed based only on the player's operation. It can also manage to some extent.

  (13) The subtraction pattern is not limited to the above. For example, a pattern may be set to be subtracted for a predetermined time in response to the ball entering the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35. In this case, since the hold information is obtained based on entering the ball into the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, the subtraction time and the subtraction probability are set based on the hold information (information such as the game result) It is good also as composition. In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, assuming that the obtained hold information can be the target of the judgment of acceptance prior to the hold information for which the special hold notice is targeted, the game round during the special hold notice. The relationship with the fluctuation display time of

  (14) The player may be able to select a predetermined set time when executing the special hold notification. That is, the player may predict the time required from the start to the end of the special holding advance notice, and if the prediction is made, the holding image P may be changed as a bonus. Specifically, a plurality of time displays (for example, 30 sec, 45 sec, 60 sec) are performed at the start of the special hold notice, and the player selects one time display from among the plurality of time displays. The selection of the time display may be configured based on the operation of the operation unit 75. Then, when the high-speed variation display of the lower figure pattern row Z3 in the target game round is completed within the selected time, subtraction corresponding to the selected time display is performed. For example, if 30 sec is selected, 1 sec of subtraction is performed, if 45 sec, 5 sec of subtraction is performed, and if 60 sec, 10 sec of subtraction is performed. The subtraction probability may be changed according to the selected time. Since the player will be interested as to whether or not the time selected by himself has passed, the degree of attention can be suitably enhanced.

  (15) In the special hold notice, the predetermined set time is set based on the variation display time of the game information of the hold information to be digested earlier than the hold information targeted for the special hold notice. As long as the setting is made based on the holding information other than the target holding information, the setting may be made based on the holding information to be digested later than the target holding information. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game times regarding not only the special holding notice but also other holding information.

  (16) In the shift subtraction process, the predetermined set time is subtracted according to the shift of the hold information, but the predetermined set time may be added at the shift time. As described above, by providing a pattern to be added as well as a pattern to be subtracted after the event, the special hold notice can be focused on to the end. The timing of the addition is not limited to the shift time, and may be another timing.

  Further, the probability of addition and the time of addition may be changed in accordance with the type of hold information (for example, the type of game result and the hold image P) to be shifted to the execution area AR.

  (17) The correction of the predetermined setting time in the special hold notice may be made, for example, height of the lottery mode or support mode, the height of the launch handle 54, in addition to the type of hold information and the number of hold information to be shifted to the execution area AR. It may be configured to be performed according to the operation situation (launch intensity and launch duration time).

  (18) Although the present embodiment is configured to determine presence / absence of subtraction at shift and the subtraction time each time shift of the hold information is performed, it may be configured to be performed at the start of the special hold notification or at another timing. If the configuration is performed at the start, it is possible to set the time in consideration of shift subtraction. However, it is possible to make the player experience that the probability of establishment of the special condition changes according to the game situation, and the result is predicted at the start of the effect as in a so-called "made-up race". It is possible to avoid such inconveniences.

  (19) In the case where the hold image for the change destination from the fourth hold image P4 is determined by lottery or the like based on the special condition satisfaction, it is difficult to establish the special condition at the start (the length of a predetermined set time) According to the configuration, the image for holding of the change destination may be made different. In addition, the image for suspension of change destination is not limited to the image for suspension on the side of high jackpot expectation but may be configured to include a pattern to be the image for suspension on the low side.

  (20) In the special suspension notice, although the predetermined setting time is set by the suspension information different from the suspension information targeted for the special suspension notice, the execution mode in the special suspension notice is set by the different suspension information. As long as the configuration is to be set, the mode to be set by the different hold information is not limited to the above. For example, in the special hold notice, a predetermined set time (special condition) is set based on the variable display time for the different hold information, and the hold image changing based on the special condition is a game result of the different hold information The setting may be made based on

  Further, the special hold notice is set to the same effect as the normal hold notice in each of the above embodiments, and based on the different hold information, it is set which of the hold images P1 to P5 is to be displayed The display image may be set based on the different hold information as the hold notice different from the normal hold notice.

  Even in these cases, the execution mode may be set at the start of the special suspension notice, or may be set after the start. The configuration set after the start can reproduce exactly how it is set according to the game situation, and diversification of execution modes can be achieved.

  (21) The special holding advance notice has a configuration in which the probability of execution increases as the number of holdings at the time of holding acquisition increases, but the probability of execution may decrease as the number of holdings increases. In addition, as the variable display time of the suspension information of suspension or the suspension information of the game play being executed is longer, the probability of execution may be higher or lower. In addition, the setting time of the special hold notice may be set according to the change display time of the hold information on hold or the hold information of the game play being executed.

  (22) In the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the effect control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81, but instead of this, from the main control device 81 The display control device 212 may control the effect control device 82 based on the output command. Further, instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, both the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as control devices on one sub side. Further, the functions of the effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81, and the functions of both the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81. It may be

  (23) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as pachinko machines, pachinko machines equipped with other features, arrange ball machines, ball balls, etc., in which a right is generated and a jackpot is generated.

  Further, although the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the operation openings 33 and 34, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a start lever is provided, and the hold information is acquired based on the operation of the start lever. It may be configured as The point is that the conditions under which the pending information is obtained are arbitrary.

  (24) A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated The player is given a privilege such as the payout of medals if the specific symbol or the combination of the specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of the predetermined time. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines that

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

  The invention described in each of the following features is “for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the hitting gaming state is triggered by the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. For example, on the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the above lottery is performed, and the variation is performed. With respect to the technical background of "display effect of one game cycle is displayed that a stop result according to the above-mentioned lottery result is displayed at the time of final stop display of display (for example, see JP-A-2004-81853)." Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  Also, the inventions described in the following feature groups may be combined individually with different feature groups, and a part or all of the respective inventions may be combined and applied to inventions described in different feature groups. It is also good.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. In a gaming machine capable of giving a privilege (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the result of a game,
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
An application determining unit (a function for executing a process of determining whether or not the main control device 81 performs an award determination process) which determines whether to apply the privilege to the player based on the special information acquired by the information acquiring unit;
Effect setting means (game time control by main control device 81) to set effects (for example, game time effect and suspension notice) to be performed by predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judgment means Function to execute processing),
Production execution means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the production control device 82) for executing the presentation set by the presentation setting means by the predetermined notification means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (hold notice) determined in advance, another special effect (special hold notice) is different from the predetermined notice means or it Special effect execution means (function of executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the notification means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a determination is made as to whether or not a benefit is to be awarded based on the special information, and the award determination In the gaming machine in which the effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the game effect, for example, when the effect is the effect for so-called game times for notifying the result of each giving judgment, the effect for the game times If the period of time until the result of the award determination corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified is long, the player will be kept waiting until that predetermined effect of the is long, and this period is redundant There is a possibility of feeling as something. Also, for example, in a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of special information, if the predetermined effect is a so-called pre-reading effect corresponding to a plurality of special information ahead, addition of other special information to the special information Since the result of the determination is notified, the player is kept waiting until the result of the determination of the application on the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified. Therefore, when such a predetermined effect is set, if a special effect different from that is executed by a predetermined informing means or another informing means, it is determined based on the predetermined effect. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to a sense of protraction until the result is notified. As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, if the special effect is not performed in place of the predetermined effect but performed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-described effect due to the execution of the special effect can be suitably achieved.

  In addition, based on the special effect, it is determined whether or not the player is given a benefit, and if the benefit is given based on the determination result, the degree of attention to the special effect can be further enhanced. It becomes. In this case, if the benefit given based on the above special information is taken as the first benefit and the benefit given based on the special effect is expressed as the second benefit, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two. And if it is set as the composition which performs grant decision about the 2nd privilege given based on special production based on information different from the result of grant decision of the 1st privilege which became a trigger of predetermined production, that predetermined production And the special effects are clearly different effects, and it is possible to preferably enjoy the respective effects.

Feature A2. In a gaming machine capable of giving a privilege (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the result of a game,
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
An application determining unit (a function for executing a process of determining whether or not the main control device 81 performs an award determination process) which determines whether to apply the privilege to the player based on the special information acquired by the information acquiring unit;
Effect setting means (play game control process by the main control device 81 is executed to set effect (game time effect) to be performed by a predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means Function),
Production execution means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the production control device 82) for executing the presentation set by the presentation setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Equipped with
The effect setting means starts a game operation as the effect based on the application determination, and ends the game operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application. , Setting the game circulation operation in each game time,
A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is short and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the game cycle operation. The game circulation operation is performed in a set execution mode,
When the operation mode of the game operation set by the effect setting means is the long-term mode, a special effect (special suspension notice) is given by the predetermined notification means or another notification means A game machine characterized by comprising special effect execution means (function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed.

  Special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a determination is made as to whether or not a benefit is to be awarded based on the special information, and the award determination In the gaming machine in which the operation for playing the game as an effect for playing the game is executed by the predetermined notification means on the basis of the operation mode, the operation period of the operation mode for the operation for playing the game is set long The period of time until the result of the corresponding assignment determination is notified may be long, and this period may be perceived as redundant. Therefore, when such a long-time game circulation operation is set, if the special effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means, the game circulation operation is performed. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the sense of protraction, until the result of the assignment determination is notified based on that. As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  It should be noted that if the special effect is not executed in place of the game operation of the long-term mode, but is executed in parallel with the game operation, the above-mentioned special effect is executed. An effect can be suitably exhibited.

  In addition, based on the special effect, it is determined whether or not the player is given a benefit, and if the benefit is given based on the determination result, the degree of attention to the special effect can be further enhanced. It becomes. In this case, if the benefit given based on the above special information is taken as the first benefit and the benefit given based on the special effect is expressed as the second benefit, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two. And if it is considered as the composition which performs grant decision about the 2nd privilege granted based on special production based on information different from the result of grant decision of the 1st privilege which became a trigger of operation for game circulation, It becomes clear that the game circulation operation and the special effect are different effects, and it is possible to preferably enjoy each effect.

Feature A3. In a gaming machine capable of giving a privilege (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the result of a game,
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number being a predetermined upper limit.
Granting decision means for sequentially deciding whether or not to award the bonus to the player based on the special information stored in the obtained information storage means (function to execute the qualification determination process by the main control device 81 )When,
In the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the additional determination at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the additional determination by the additional determination means Destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the application determination of
Based on the result of the specification by the destination specifying means, the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) performs the rendering at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information becomes the target of the application judgment by the application judging means Effect setting means (a function for executing a process for holding display by the effect control device 82) for setting (hold notice);
Effect executing means (function of executing processing for increasing the hold by the effect control device 82) which executes the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
If the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (for example, the second hold image P2), another predetermined effect (special hold advance notice) is sent to the predetermined notification means Or special effect execution means (function to execute the special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82) which can be executed by another notification means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine, special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a determination is made as to whether or not a benefit is provided based on the special information, The special information can be stored up to a predetermined number which is a plurality of numbers, and information corresponding to the result of the addition determination is specified at a timing earlier than the addition determination is performed for the predetermined special information, The effect based on the specified information, so-called pre-reading effect is performed by a predetermined notification means. And, when this effect is a predetermined effect which is predetermined, a special effect different from that is performed by a predetermined notification means or a notification means different from that. In this case, for example, even if the player predicts or grasps that the result of the award determination corresponding to the effect based on the predetermined effect is the result of being able to obtain the benefit, and wants to obtain the benefit quickly. Since the predetermined effect is performed before the special information becomes the target of the assignment determination, it is necessary to wait until the assignment determination. Therefore, there is a possibility that this period is felt to be redundant. Therefore, when such a predetermined effect is set, if a special effect different from that is executed by a predetermined informing means or another informing means, it is determined based on the predetermined effect. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to a sense of protraction until the result is notified. As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, if the special effect is not executed in place of the predetermined effect but executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-mentioned effect by the execution of another effect can be suitably exhibited. .

  In addition, based on the special effect, it is determined whether or not the player is given a benefit, and if the benefit is given based on the determination result, the degree of attention to the special effect can be further enhanced. It becomes. In this case, if the benefit given based on the above special information is taken as the first benefit and the benefit given based on the special effect is expressed as the second benefit, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two. And if it is set as the composition which performs grant decision about the 2nd privilege given based on special production based on information different from the result of grant decision of the 1st privilege which became a trigger of predetermined production, that predetermined production And the special effects are clearly different effects, and it is possible to preferably enjoy the respective effects.

  Furthermore, if the predetermined effect is an effect having a higher degree of expectation to which the first benefit is given compared to other effects, when this predetermined effect is performed, the determination of giving of the special information corresponding thereto is quicker The player should think so as to be performed, and in this way, it is possible to more suitably exhibit the effect by performing the special rendering as described above.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. In a gaming machine capable of giving a privilege (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the result of a game,
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
An application determining unit (a function for executing a process of determining whether or not the main control device 81 performs an award determination process) which determines whether to apply the privilege to the player based on the special information acquired by the information acquiring unit;
Effect setting means (game time control by main control device 81) to set effects (for example, game time effect and suspension notice) to be performed by predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judgment means Function to execute processing),
Production execution means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the production control device 82) for executing the presentation set by the presentation setting means by the predetermined notification means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (hold notice) determined in advance, another special effect (special hold notice) is different from the predetermined notice means or it Special effect execution means (function of executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the notification means;
Determining means for determining whether or not a special condition in which the establishment probability changes in the special effect executed by the special effect executing means is satisfied based on the passage of a predetermined setting period (timer management process by the effect control device 82 And the ability to perform
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a determination is made as to whether or not a benefit is to be awarded based on the special information, and the award determination In the gaming machine in which the effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the game effect, for example, when the effect is the effect for so-called game times for notifying the result of each giving judgment, the effect for the game times If the period of time until the result of the award determination corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified is long, the player will be kept waiting until that predetermined effect of the is long, and this period is redundant There is a possibility of feeling as something. Further, for example, in a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of special information, if the predetermined effect is a so-called pre-reading effect corresponding to a plurality of special information ahead, it is determined that the special information is added to the special information. Since the result of is notified, the player is kept waiting until the result of the application judgment on the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified. Also, conversely, if the operation period of the predetermined effect is short or the number of stored special information is small, it may be difficult to perform a sufficient effect, which may give the player a feeling of lack of effect.

  Therefore, when this predetermined effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means, and in this special effect, the establishment probability is based on the passage of the predetermined setting period. It is configured that it is determined whether the changing special condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, when the effect is made different depending on the success or failure of the special condition, or when a benefit is given, it is possible to draw attention to the length of the period in which the special effect is performed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the feeling of extension during the period until the result of the addition determination is informed based on the predetermined effect, and to preferably suppress the decrease in interest, and conversely, the operation period of the predetermined effect is short. In this case, if the special rendering is performed, the degree of attention can be expected to be increased by the amount by which the special rendering is performed in addition to the predetermined rendering, and the decrease in interest can be suitably suppressed. As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, if the special effect is not performed in place of the predetermined effect but performed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-described effect due to the execution of the special effect can be suitably achieved.

  In addition, when a special benefit is given based on the establishment of the special condition (determination result of the determination means), the degree of attention to the special effect can be further enhanced. In this case, if the benefit given based on the special information is the first benefit and the benefit given based on the establishment of the special condition is represented as the second benefit, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two. And if it is considered as the composition which performs grant decision about the 2nd privilege granted based on establishment of special conditions based on information different from the result of grant decision of the 1st privilege which became a trigger of the predetermined effect, It becomes clear that the predetermined effect and the special effect are different effects, and it is possible to preferably enjoy each effect.

  If "a special condition in which the probability of establishment changes based on the passage of a predetermined setting period" is "a special condition in which the probability of establishment becomes high based on the passage of a predetermined setting period", the assignment determination based on the predetermined effect is The longer the time until it is performed, the easier it is for the special condition to be established, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of making the time to be felt redundant.

  Further, assuming that "a special condition in which the probability of establishment changes based on the passage of a predetermined set period" is a "special condition in which the probability of establishment becomes low based on the passage of a predetermined set period" The shorter the time to the performance, the easier it will be for the special conditions to be met, and the shorter the time for it will be shorter for the special conditions to be fulfilled even if sufficient rendering (special rendering) can not be performed. Feeling can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when providing means for granting a benefit based on the establishment of the special condition, "if the special condition is determined not to be established by the determination means, no benefit is provided", The degree of attention as to whether or not the special condition holds can be more suitably enhanced.

  And in the special effect executed by the special effect executing means, the special condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the passage of the predetermined setting period is set at the predetermined timing in the predetermined effect. The determination timing of the determination means becomes clearer by making the determination means “determine whether or not it is established”. In addition, if this predetermined timing is "a timing before the end timing of the predetermined effect", the continuation of the predetermined effect can be enjoyed in the situation where the success or failure of the special condition is determined. For example, the establishment of the special condition When the content of the predetermined effect is made different based on the above, it becomes possible to make the superiority of the establishment of the special condition to be clearly felt through the predetermined effect.

In addition, if the effect set by the “effect setting means” is the effect for the game turn, the special effect is performed when the predetermined effect is set among the effects for the game turn, and this predetermined effect is The degree of attention of the game play to be performed can be suitably raised. As a specific configuration in this case, the configurations of "effect executing means" and "special effect executing means"
"The effect execution means starts the game operation as the effect based on the application determination, and ends the game operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application. The game notification operation in each game session is executed by the predetermined notification means.
A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is short and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the game cycle operation. The game circulation operation is performed in a set execution mode,
When the operation mode of the game operation set by the effect setting means is the long-term mode, a special effect (special suspension notice) is given by the predetermined notification means or another notification means It has a special effect execution means (function to execute the special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed.
You should do it.

Further, if the effect set by the “effect setting means” is the effect of so-called pre-reading notice (pending pre-notice), the special effect is performed when the pre-setting effect is set in this pre-reading notice, and the pre-specified effect It is possible to preferably raise the attention level of the period until the game round about the special information that has been triggered is performed. As a specific configuration in this case, “acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers as the upper limit (the main control device 81 And providing the player with the privilege based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, after having the function of executing the process of step S205). Application determination means (function to execute the qualification determination process by the main control device 81) which sequentially determines
Furthermore, “the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is to be subjected to the addition determination at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the addition determination by the addition determination means. Destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the assignment determination in the event of a failure;
Based on the result of the specification by the destination specifying means, the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) performs the rendering at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information becomes the target of the application judgment by the application judging means Effect setting means (a function for executing a process for holding display by the effect control device 82) for setting (hold notice);
Effect executing means (function of executing processing for increasing the hold by the effect control device 82) which executes the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
If the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (for example, the second hold image P2), another predetermined effect (special hold advance notice) is sent to the predetermined notification means Or special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notification setting processing by effect control device 82) that can be executed by another notification means.
You should do it.

  Feature B2. A feature B1 including condition notification means (function of executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different therefrom. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the player grasp the special condition. As a result, the relationship between a predetermined setting period involved in the establishment probability of the special condition and the special effect becomes clear, and the establishment probability of the special condition according to the length of the period of the special effect, that is, the length of the period of the predetermined effect It can be entertaining enough to change.

  Feature B3. The condition notification means includes destination notification means (function of executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) for performing notification of the special condition at a timing prior to the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination of success or failure. Since the special condition changes with the lapse of the period, the probability of the condition changes, and if the special condition is grasped as early as possible, it can be sufficiently entertained whether the special condition is satisfied or not. .

  Feature B4. The destination notification unit is provided with a unit that executes notification of the special condition based on the start of the elapse of the predetermined setting period (a function of executing the special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to the feature B3 characterized by the feature.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed based on the start of the predetermined elapsed period, it is possible to enjoy the success or failure of the period involved in the success or failure of the special condition at the maximum.

  Feature B5. The destination notification means includes means for executing notification of the special condition (the function for executing the special hold notification control process by the effect control device 82) during the progress of the predetermined setting period. The game machine according to feature B3 or feature B4.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed in the middle of the lapse of the predetermined setting period, it is possible to make the player grasp the change of the establishment probability of the special condition. As a result, it is possible to make the player clearly grasp the relationship between the period in which the special effect is performed and the establishment probability of the special condition.

  Feature B6. The condition notification means is provided with a post notification means (function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) which performs notification of the special condition at a timing after the determination by the determination means is performed. A game machine according to any one of features B2 to B5, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the special condition can be grasped even after the determination by the determination means. That is, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped even after the determination timing. By doing this, it is possible to leave an interest as to whether or not the special condition holds, even after the application timing, as an afterglow, and to suppress an extreme decrease in the attention degree after the determination. it can.

  Feature B7. The gaming machine according to the feature B6, wherein the post notification means performs notification of the establishment probability at the time of determination of the determination means as notification of the special condition.

  According to the above configuration, since notification on the establishment probability at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success or failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not established, it is possible to grasp how long it is established later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not established. .

Feature B8. Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number as the upper limit. ,
The assignment determination unit sequentially performs the assignment determination on the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit,
Destination specifying means for specifying information about predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing prior to the predetermined special information becoming the target of the addition determination (for holding by main controller 81 Function to execute confirmation processing),
Condition setting means for setting the special conditions based on the result of specification by the destination specifying means (function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82);
A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information of the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, the game of predicting predetermined special information from the special condition is added, and diversification of the game is achieved. That is, by associating the special condition with the special information that triggers the assignment determination by the assignment determination unit, it is possible to suitably increase the attention degree regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

  The "special condition" set by the condition setting means can be simply rephrased as "predetermined set period", or can be reworded as "special condition at the start of the predetermined set period".

Feature B9. Based on the fact that the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed, the predetermined notification means or the notification means different therefrom starts the operation for playing the game, and the game as the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination The game time control means (function to execute the game time control process by the main control device 81) is provided, in which the game operation is ended once as the game time, and the game operation is performed.
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The destination specifying means is a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means as the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means. A destination operation period specifying unit (function to execute an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82),
The condition setting means is provided with a first setting means (function to execute timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specification result of the preceding operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature B8, characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, the setting of the special condition is performed based on the information of the operation period specified by the preceding operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in the game can be further enhanced, and it becomes possible to associate the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied with the length of the operation period. Therefore, an effect can be suitably performed.

  Feature B10. The condition setting means is provided with a second setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature B9, characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period can not be specified first by the first operation period specifying unit, for example, even if the operation period is determined only at the start of the game, the second setting unit sets the special condition. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, an effect can be suitably performed.

Feature B11. In the game state, a special game state in which the operation period can be specified by the destination operation period specifying means is set to any special information,
The gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10, wherein the special condition is set during the special game state.

  According to the above configuration, if in the special game state, even if any special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the information of the operation period can be specified earlier, and the special condition is set in such a state If this is done, the inconvenience that the information of the operation period can not be identified does not occur. As a result, it is possible to preferably achieve an effect using a special condition.

Feature B12. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number corresponding pattern) reflecting the gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) in the case where the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed; And a second operation period (pending number non-corresponding pattern) which is not included.
The preceding operation period specifying unit is provided with a unit for specifying an operation period for the special information to be the second operation period (a function for executing an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82) The game machine according to any one of features B9 to B11, which is characterized by the features.

  Since the game situation at the time of acquisition of the special information and the game situation at the time of award determination may be different, even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the award determination, The operation period of time may be different from the operation period at the time of determination of assignment. Therefore, in the above configuration, the second operation period is not the first operation period in which such a game situation is reflected, but the second operation period is specified based on the timing before the target of the award determination, so the operation based on the difference in the game conditions It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of prior identification of the period. Thereby, it is possible to preferably perform the rendering using the operation period.

  Note that, if the present configuration is applied to the feature B9, “the first setting unit sets the special information based on the operation period specified by the operation information specifying unit for the special information to be the second operation period. It is preferable to set the condition.

  Feature B13. The preceding operation period specifying means specifies a temporary operation period as an operation period for the special information when the operation period for the special information to be specified is the first operation period. A game machine according to feature B12, further comprising temporary specifying means (a function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment).

  As in the above configuration, even if the operation period may be different based on the difference in the game situation, if it is specified as the temporary operation period, it is possible to perform effects based on at least the success or failure of the special condition. That is, even when the operation period can not be specified in advance, monotonization of the effect can be suppressed by leaving room for performing the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature B10, the second setting unit may set the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit.

Feature B14. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the predetermined set period passes.
The temporary specifying means is characterized in that a period which is shorter than or equal to the shortest period of the first operation period which can be set by the operation period setting means is specified as the temporary operation period. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily identified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration relating to the tentative identification can be simplified. In addition, since the temporary specific period is equal to or less than the shortest period of the period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is also set to be higher than the highest establishment probability. Here, if the probability of establishment of the special condition becomes extremely low, the player may get used to the situation where the special condition is not established in another effect different from the special effect in the first place, and interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by setting the special condition to be easily established, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to the fact that the probability of establishment becomes low due to temporary specification.

Feature B15. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the predetermined set period passes.
The temporary specifying means specifies, as the temporary operation period, a period which is longer than or equal to the longest period of the first operation period which can be set by the operation period setting means.
A unit that corrects the special condition at a timing after the timing at which the specification by the temporary specification unit is performed and before the determination by the determination unit is performed (in the fourth embodiment) A game machine according to feature B13 or B14, characterized in that it has a function of executing subtraction processing at the time of shift by the effect control device.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily identified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration relating to the tentative identification can be simplified. Further, since the temporary specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period among the periods that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is also set to be lower than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to the fact that the probability of occurrence becomes low due to temporary specification by correcting the special conditions after that.

  Note that “correction” may be, for example, a configuration of “shortening / extending the predetermined setting period”, and more specifically, “the temporary operation period and the operation for the predetermined setting period” A configuration may be considered in which the difference between the operation period set by the period setting means and the operation period is shortened / extended.

Feature B16. Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number as the upper limit. ,
The assignment determination unit sequentially determines whether to grant the bonus to the player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit.
In the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the additional determination at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the additional determination by the additional determination means A destination specifying unit (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the application determination of
The effect setting means is based on the identification result by the destination identification means, rather than the predetermined special information being a target of the application determination by the application determination means by a predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) It sets the effect (hold notice) to be performed at the earlier timing,
The effect executing means, based on the fact that the identification result by the point identification means becomes a predetermined result, gives the case where the predetermined special information which is the object of the identification becomes an object of the determination of the addition. The predetermined notification means or the notification means other than the special notification (hold notice) corresponding to the result of the determination at a timing prior to the notification of the result of the addition determination for the predetermined special information To carry out
The special effect executing unit is configured to notify the special effect to the predetermined notifying unit or another notification based on the fact that the content of the special notification to be executed by the effect executing unit corresponds to the predetermined effect. A game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B15, characterized in that the game machine is implemented by means.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification may be performed before the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit becomes the target of the determination of the addition. As a result, it becomes possible to play a game in which the predetermined special information that has been identified by the destination identification means is predicted before being notified of the result of the determination of the application of the predetermined special information. Diversification is achieved. Thus, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. In the case of performing such special notification, in the case of a special notification that makes it easy for a player to be given a privilege, the degree of attention to the special information increases while the attention to effects for other special information is increased. There is a possibility of decline. Moreover, if it is a special alerting | reporting which is hard to be provided with a privilege, the attention to the presentation not only for the special alerting | reporting but it may fall extremely. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined effect is set as the special notification, if the special effect is configured to be performed by the predetermined notification means or the notification means different therefrom, the degree of attention may be reduced by performing the special notification. It is possible to pay attention to the special effect side, and to preferably avoid the decline in interest.

Feature B17. Based on the fact that the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed, the predetermined notification means or the notification means different therefrom starts the operation for playing the game, and the game as the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination The game time control means (function to execute the game time control process by the main control device 81) is provided, in which the game operation is ended once as the game time, and the game operation is performed.
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The destination specifying means is a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means as the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means. A destination operation period specifying unit (function to execute an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82),
The apparatus further comprises condition setting means (a function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, in the special effect to be executed based on the content of the special notification being the predetermined effect, the special condition is set based on the information of the operation period. Thereby, it is possible to associate the special notification performed based on the predetermined special information and the information of the operation period.

  In this case, for the special notification, notification regarding predetermined special information is performed, and the special condition in the special effect performed based on the special notification is set based on the operation period other than the predetermined special information. It may be set up based on the operation period of predetermined special information. In the case of the former, it is possible to increase the degree of attention for predetermined special information by the special notification, and to increase the degree of attention for other special information by the special effect. Further, in the latter case, the special notification and the special effect can be more closely associated with each other. For example, when performing an effect that indicates that it is difficult to give a benefit in the special notification, the special condition is established in the special effect. It is possible to diversify the effects by, for example, adopting a configuration that provides easy effects.

  Feature B18. The condition setting unit is the target of the determination of the provision prior to the predetermined special information that is the target of the special notification in the special notification that triggered the execution of the special effect by the special effect execution unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B17, wherein the special condition is set based on the operation period specified by the preceding operation period specifying means for the special information.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the operation period of the special information that is the target of the addition determination before the special information that is the target of the special notification. It is possible to increase interest in the operation period of the game round about the special information to be subjected to the determination of giving prior to the information, and to avoid the lowering of the attention to the other game round effect by performing the special notification. Is possible.

Feature B19. Based on the fact that the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed, the predetermined notification means or the notification means different therefrom starts the operation for playing the game, and the game as the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination The game time control means (function to execute the game time control process by the main control device 81) is provided, in which the game operation is ended once as the game time, and the game operation is performed.
The first operation (reach occurrence) and the first operation with the first operation (reach occurrence) before the notification of the result of the application determination of the application judging means to the game operation by the game time control means The branch timing (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the pattern row Z3 in the figure below) is set to branch to the second operation (reach non-occurrence) where the application probability of becomes low.
The determination means is configured to determine whether the special condition has succeeded or not at the branch timing in the game operation for the special information that has triggered the special condition. Features B1 to B18 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, determination of success or failure of the special condition is performed at the branch timing of the first operation and the second operation. In addition, at this branch timing, the probability that the benefit will be given is increased if the operation for game use is branched to the first operation, while the branch probability to the second operation is lower than that. In this case, it is conceivable to further add a branch effect associated with the high and low of the award probability for the benefit, but if the effect is too complicated, there is a concern that the player's comprehension declines, and as a result, interest in the game is also increased. It is thought that it fades. Therefore, by using a configuration in which a special condition different from a benefit is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to preferably execute a plurality of branch effects relating to benefit grant while suppressing complication of the game.

  Feature B20. Changing means capable of changing the elapsed speed of the predetermined setting period from the elapsed speed until that, or changing the remaining period of the predetermined setting period from the remaining period until that (subtraction value adjustment by the effect control device 82 A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed or remaining period of the predetermined set period changes. Thereby, even if, for example, the special condition is not likely to be established, the special condition can be established by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and also, for example, when the special condition is likely to be established. Even if the special condition is not established by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period. That is, the process of success or failure of the special condition can be diversified, and the degree of attention to the effect can be suitably increased.

Feature B21. Based on the fact that the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed, the predetermined notification means or the notification means different therefrom starts the operation for playing the game, and the game as the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination The game time control means (function to execute the game time control process by the main control device 81) is provided, in which the game operation is ended once as the game time, and the game operation is performed.
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The gaming machine according to feature B20, wherein the changing unit changes the operation period according to the operation period set by the operation period setting unit.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further enhance the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition to the operation period, and it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience based on the length of the operation period of the game.

Feature B22. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the predetermined set period passes.
The gaming machine according to feature B21, wherein the changing unit is configured to increase the elapsed speed to be changed or shorten the remaining period to be changed as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period in which the predetermined setting period elapses is also short, and therefore the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be low. In such a case, the elapsed speed is increased or remaining If the period is changed to be short, it is possible to suppress thinning of interest by predicting that the special condition will not be established due to the short operation period.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number being a predetermined upper limit.
Assigning determination means (main control device 81) sequentially determining whether or not to grant the player a benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means Function to execute the success / failure judgment process by
Privilege giving means for giving the player the privilege (based on the main control device 81) based on the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means being the giving correspondence result corresponding to giving the privilege to the player Function to execute the game state transition process),
Based on the fact that the application judgment is made by the application judgment means, a predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) starts an operation for playing the game, and the game times as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Ending the game operation is one game cycle, and the game time control means (the function for executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) controls the predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed )When,
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the result of the addition determination when the predetermined special information becomes the target of the addition determination, the predetermined special information of the addition determination Destination result specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) specified at a timing earlier than the target;
Corresponds to the result of the assignment determination in the case where the predetermined special information that has become the target of the particular becomes the target of the assignment determination based on the fact that the identification result by the previous result identification means becomes a predetermined result. Special notification execution means (function to execute a command control process for suspension control by the effect control device 82) which executes special notification to be performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means therefor;
Equipped with
The special notification execution means is a setting means capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the special information different from the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game machine having the function of executing subtraction processing at the time of shift in the embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification may be performed before the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit becomes the target of the determination of the addition. As a result, it becomes possible to play a game in which the predetermined special information that has become the target of specification by the destination result specifying means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, and diversification of the game is possible. It is possible. Thus, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such a game run and a special notification are performed in parallel, the attention to the special notification can be enhanced if the effect is made flashy with respect to the special notification, but on the other hand, the running game is running. This may reduce the level of attention. Therefore, in this gaming machine, the special notification is provided with setting means capable of setting the execution mode of the special notification based on the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification. Thus, based on the special notification, it is possible to associate not only predetermined special information but also other special information, and the degree of attention of other special information can be increased. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  It should be noted that "setting means for setting the execution mode of the special notification" can be paraphrased as "changing means for changing the execution mode of the special notification".

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the setting unit is capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification after the start of the special notification.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the execution mode of the special notification on the basis of the other special information while the special notification on the predetermined special information is being executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to execute the special notification taking into consideration not only the situation at the start of the special notification (the presence or absence of other special information, the type, etc.) but also the condition after the start. Diversification of aspects can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the special notification.

The above configuration can be paraphrased as follows.
"The special notification execution means includes execution mode setting means for setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the result of the addition determination when the predetermined special information becomes a target of the addition determination, and The special notification is executed based on the execution mode set by the execution mode setting means,
The setting means is capable of changing the execution mode set by the execution mode setting means after the start of the special notification.

  Feature C3. The setting unit is configured to execute the special notification on the basis of the special information to be subjected to the addition determination before the predetermined special information among the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or the feature C2, comprising means capable of setting (function of executing the processing of step S2802 and step S2803 by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, the execution mode is set based on the special information to be subjected to the addition determination prior to the predetermined special information. The special information to be subjected to the grant determination prior to the predetermined special information is the special information to be subjected to the grant determination after the start of the special notification, and based on the special information on the game times to be executed during the special notification. The execution mode of the special notification is set. By doing this, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention not only to the special notification but also to the game round in which the special notification is being executed.

Feature C4. The assignment determination unit is configured to perform the assignment determination on the one special information acquired by the information acquisition unit with respect to the other special information acquired by the information acquisition unit prior to the one special information. A destination determination unit (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control apparatus 81 in the seventh embodiment) performed prior to the determination;
The setting means may set an execution mode of the special notification based on the special information for which the addition determination is performed prior to the predetermined special information by the destination determination means. The gaming machine described in C3.

  According to the above configuration, since the number of special information to be subjected to the addition determination increases during the execution of the special notification, the opportunity and the target for setting by the setting means also increase. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the special notification.

  In addition, if the present configuration is applied to the feature C3, setting by the setting unit can be performed based on the special information acquired after the start of the special notification and before the setting by the setting unit. Therefore, even after the start of the special notification, the significance of acquiring the special information arises, and it is possible to urge the continuation of the launch of the game ball.

  Feature C5. Memory information notification means (rendering information (playing effect) that executes the storage notification (notification by the image P for suspension) corresponding to the special information stored by the acquired information storage means by the predetermined notification means or another notification means The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, further comprising: a function of executing a suspension display setting process by the control device.

  According to the above configuration, storage notification by the stored information notification unit is performed for the special information which is stored in the acquired information storage unit and can be a trigger of setting of the execution mode of the special notification by the setting unit. Therefore, for example, the game of predicting from the storage notification by the storage information notification means whether or not the execution mode of the special notification is set is added, and the special being executed based on the predetermined result. Not only for notification, but also for other stored special information, it is possible to increase the degree of attention.

  In addition, if it is configured that “the storage notification by the storage information notification means is performed based on the identification result by the destination result identification means”, the storage notification is performed to grasp the identification result by the destination result identification means It is possible to clarify the significance of predicting the execution mode of the special notification from the storage notification.

Feature C6. The stored information notification means is a means for setting notification mode information corresponding to the target special information from a plurality of notification mode information (function to select the image P for suspension in the suspension display setting process by the effect control device 82) To execute the storage notification using the notification mode information set by the setting unit;
The special notification execution means executes the special notification using the notification mode information,
The setting means is a target of the special notification based on the notification mode information about the special information to be subjected to the addition determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information being the target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to the feature C5, characterized in that the notification mode information about the predetermined special information is set to different notification mode information.

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the notification mode information is respectively notified and one of the notification mode information is the target of the special notification. Based on the notification mode information corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the addition determination before the notification mode information to be the target of the special notification, the notification mode information to be the target of the special notification differs from that. The notification mode information can be set. By doing this, in the situation where a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, each special information is not stored merely as a waiting for the order of the assignment determination, but its order or special information Kinds of aspect information) are associated with the special notification, and it becomes possible to make each special information have an interest.

  Feature C7. Selection means for selecting the special information to be a trigger for setting the execution mode of the special notification from the special information different from the predetermined special information (the operation corresponding subtraction by the effect control device 82) A game machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the above configuration, when there is a plurality of special information different from the predetermined special information, it is selected by the selection means based on which special information the execution mode of the special notification is to be set. By doing this, the setting can be more advanced than in the configuration in which the execution mode of the special notification is set based on the special information different from the predetermined special information. That is, for example, assuming that the execution mode of the special notification is set to be preferable to the player for the special information other than the special information for one, it is assumed that the one special information is selected by the selection means The player will want, for example, if there is only special information that may be set as objectionable to the player, let the game ball enter the ball so that other special information is stored. Is considered. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably raise the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature C8. And an operation unit (operation unit 75) on which an operation by a player is performed;
The gaming machine according to the feature C7, wherein the selection means enables selection of special information which is a trigger for setting an execution mode of the special notification based on an operation of the operation means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to reflect the player's intention in the setting of the execution mode of the special notification. As a result, it is possible for the player to be involved in the effect rather than the effect to be performed unilaterally from the gaming machine side, and it is possible to immerse in the game.

  Feature C9. The setting unit is capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the above configuration, it is clear that the configuration is such that the execution mode of the special notification is set including the predetermined special information as well as the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the special notification. Become.

  Feature C10. The setting means is configured to be able to set an execution mode of the special notification based on the ball entry information of the game ball generated in the ball entry unit after the start of the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball is fired even after the special notification is performed by using the ball entering information to the ball entering part generated after the start of the special notification for setting the execution mode of the special notification. Can bring about the significance of continuing the

  As described above, while the interest of the special notification can be enhanced by enhancing the interest of the game, the more attention to the special notification, the lower the attention to the effect on the game side may be. Then, there is a possibility that the player may stop the firing of the game ball and watch the effect (stop the game) so much as noticing the special notification started.

  In the gaming machine configured to shorten the length of the game times when the number of stored special information is large, when the firing of the game ball is repeatedly stopped during the game, the smooth progress of the game is hindered for the player. It will be a gain. In addition, if the game ball is repeatedly stopped from being fired during the game, it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to identify the fraudulent action (the act of firing the game ball at an incorrect timing, etc.), and as a result, the game is illegal. There is a possibility that it may be difficult to find an action. Therefore, as described above, if it is possible to set the execution mode of the special notification based on the ball entry information to the ball entry unit generated after the start of the special notification, the degree of attention to the special notification can be increased This makes it possible to continue the firing of the game balls, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game while avoiding the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  Feature C11. The setting means uses the ball entry information of the game ball generated in the ball entry section in a situation where the predetermined number of the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the execution mode of the special information is It is a structure which can be set, The game machine as described in the feature C10 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the above configuration, even when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means is stored, the significance of causing the game ball to enter the ball entry part arises. In particular, when the special information is stored at the upper limit number, it is not possible to obtain the assignment judgment even if more balls enter the ball (the special information is not obtained / stored), so in general, It is considered that the player also wants to stop the firing of the game ball. On the other hand, even in such a situation, as described above, there may still be a disadvantage that it becomes difficult for the gaming hall to detect fraud if the game ball is repeatedly stopped from being fired. Therefore, with the above-described configuration, it is significant for the player to continue the firing of the game ball even in the situation where the number of memories of the special information has reached the upper limit. The degree of attention can be improved.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number being a predetermined upper limit.
Assigning determination means (main control device 81) sequentially determining whether or not to grant the player a benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means Function to execute the success / failure judgment process by
Privilege giving means for giving the player the privilege (based on the main control device 81) based on the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means being the giving correspondence result corresponding to giving the privilege to the player Function to execute the game state transition process),
Based on the fact that the application judgment is made by the application judgment means, a predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) starts an operation for playing the game, and the game times as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Ending the game operation is one game cycle, and the game time control means (the function for executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) controls the predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed )When,
Equipped with
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game circulation operation is performed over a long operation period,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting unit when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is targeted by the game times by the game number control unit A destination operation period specifying unit (a function for executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82) specifying the predetermined special information at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the game run;
Special notification execution that can be executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from that, the special notification (special hold advance notice) started at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information becomes the target of the game round Means (function of executing special hold notification setting processing in the effect control device 82),
Equipped with
The special notification execution means sets execution period of the special notification based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means (execution period setting means (timer input at time specification pattern in presentation control device 82) A gaming machine comprising: a function of executing a process) and executing the special notification based on an execution period set by the execution period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification in which the execution period is set based on the operation period specified by the first operation period specifying means is a row of game times related to the special information specified as the identification target by the destination operation period specifying means. It may be started earlier than it will be. That is, there is a possibility that the effects of the operation period corresponding to one piece of special information may be performed at different start timings for the game play and the special notification. As described above, if a plurality of presentation start timings for one special information are provided, for example, if there is a disadvantage in performing the special information, the inconvenience is avoided by making the start timings different. be able to. As a disadvantage, for example, in a situation where a plurality of special information is acquired and special information is easily acquired, it is necessary to smoothly perform an effect corresponding to each special information. If the length of the game is increased, the operating time of the game will be extended to prevent the game from being interrupted if the digest can not catch up with the acquisition of the special information, or the number of special information stored is conversely small. Then, if the probability of awarding a privilege is high, the player may misunderstand, and the like. In this case, for example, a configuration may be considered in which only the result of the assignment determination is notified after different start timings, but only the convenience of the rendering is given priority, and the rendering of one special information is sufficiently obtained. It is not desirable to deviate from the original fun of the gaming machine to do. In that respect, in the above configuration, even if the start timings are different, the operation period corresponds, so it can be said that the effect on the special information is sufficiently performed. Thereby, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game while avoiding the inconvenience in presentation.

Feature D2. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number corresponding pattern) reflecting the gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) in the case where the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed; And a second operation period (pending number non-corresponding pattern) which is not included.
The previous operation period identification unit is a temporary identification unit (fourth embodiment) for specifying a temporary operation period when the operation period for the special information to be identified is the first operation period. The gaming machine according to the feature D1, further comprising a function of executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82 in a mode.

  As in the above configuration, even if the operation period may be different based on the difference in the game situation, if it is specified as a temporary operation period, the special notification is started earlier than the game times for at least the special information. be able to. By doing so, even when it is difficult to specify the operation period ahead, it is possible to increase the opportunity to execute the special notification by leaving room for the special notification.

  Feature D3. The special notification execution means is provided with a correction means capable of correcting the execution period of the special notification after the start of the special notification (function to execute the processing of step S3310 to step S3313 by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or the feature D2 that is the feature.

  According to the above configuration, when an inconvenience occurs in the execution period of the special notification side, for example, when the previously identified operation period and the actual operation period are different, the period can be corrected, and the inconvenience is It can be avoided.

  Note that "correction" can be reworded as "shortening or extending the execution period".

Feature D4. The preceding operation period specifying means includes means for specifying information on the operation period regarding special information other than the predetermined special information (function to execute the processing of step S1701 to step S1703 by the effect control device 82),
The special notification execution means sets the special notification execution period as the execution period of the special notification including information on the operation period specified by the information on the operation period for special information other than the predetermined special information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3 comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1704 by the control device.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the execution period of the special notification by the special notification execution means as a period including the operation period for special information other than the predetermined special information specified as the identification target by the previous operation period identification means. it can. That is, in the configuration in which the special notification is started earlier than the game round of the predetermined special information, the game of the other special information to be performed from the start of the special notification to the start of the game round of the predetermined special information The special notification can be continued even during the trip. In other words, even when special information is included in addition to the predetermined special information, the special notification can be continued until the game round for the predetermined special information. By doing this, it is possible to make the player clearly grasp the relationship between the special notification and the game time, and to suppress the special notification from ending before the game time and losing interest. it can.

Feature D5. In the game state, a special game state in which the operation period can be specified by the destination operation period specifying means is set to any special information,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4, wherein the special notification execution means can execute the special notification during the special game state.

  According to the above configuration, if in the special game state, even if any special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the information of the operation period can be specified earlier, and in such a state, the operation period is There is no inconvenience that information can not be identified. As a result, it is possible to preferably realize an effect that specifies the ahead of the operation period.

Feature D6. The special notification by the special notification execution means is executed so as to end at a predetermined timing during the game cycle for the predetermined special information,
It is characterized by having a means (function which performs processing of Step S1710 by production control device 82) which adjusts a start timing of the special information based on information specified by the preceding operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

  According to the above configuration, by adjusting the start timing, it becomes possible to perform the special notification according to the previously specified operation period without requiring the correction of the operation period and the change of the end timing thereof. Thereby, the special notification which notifies the length of the operation period of game times can be suitably realized.

Feature D7. The special notification by the special notification execution means is executed so as to end at a predetermined timing during the game cycle for the predetermined special information,
The game time control means is means for adjusting the game time operation at the predetermined timing during the game time for the predetermined special information in response to the special notification (step S2503 by the effect control device 82 The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, which has a function of executing processing.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the effect at the end of the special notification with the game operation, by adjusting the game operation at the end timing, without correcting the previously specified operation period. . Thereby, the length of the operation period of the game can be accurately notified while being associated with the operation for the game.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
Assignment determination unit (main control device) that determines whether or not to grant the first benefit (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit 81) a function of executing a success / failure determination process by
First benefit granting means for awarding the first benefit to the player based on the result of the awarding determination by the assignment judging means being an awarding correspondence result corresponding to awarding the first benefit to the player (Function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81),
Based on the fact that the application judgment is made by the application judgment means, a predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) starts an operation for playing the game, and the game times as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Ending the game operation is one game cycle, and the game time control means (the function for executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) controls the predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed )When,
Equipped with
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game circulation operation is performed over a long operation period,
Special notification execution means (function to execute the special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition Equipped
The special notification execution means is
Period presenting means (a function for executing various timer input processes by the effect control device 82) for presenting a predetermined setting period;
Second benefit giving means (performing control device 82) for providing the player with a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the continuation of one or more of the game operations for the predetermined set period or longer Function to execute processing for pending display),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired based on the game ball having entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and based on this special information, it is determined whether or not the first benefit is to be granted. In a gaming machine in which effects (operations for game operations) for game operations are executed by predetermined notification means based on the grant determination, if the effects for game operations are performed in a flashy manner, that amount will While the degree of attention is increased, the period of waiting until the first benefit is given is extended, which may cause the player to feel bothersome. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when one or a plurality of game operation operations continue for a predetermined set period or more, a second benefit different from the first benefit is provided to provide a game benefit It is possible to avoid the inconvenience due to the long operation period of In particular, since the predetermined setting period is presented by the predetermined notification means or another notification means, it is possible to make the player clearly grasp the relationship between the operation period of the game times and the predetermined setting period. It is possible to associate and enjoy the provision of the second benefit and the provision of the first benefit based on the effect of the game play. As a result of the above, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably enhanced.

  Feature E2. The special notification execution means is configured to execute the special notification when the operation period set by the operation period setting means is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period of the game is equal to or more than the predetermined period, the predetermined setting period is presented, and if the game circulation operation is continued for the setting period or more, the second benefit Is granted. In this way, the special notification is performed even if the operation period of the game is short, and the second benefit is not easily given. If the operation period of the game is long without any inconvenience. Can be efficiently avoided.

Feature E3. Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number as the upper limit. ,
The assignment determination unit sequentially performs the assignment determination on the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting unit when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is targeted by the game times by the game number control unit A target operation period specifying unit (function to execute the effect setting process when the time specification is possible by the effect control device 82) specifying the predetermined special information at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the game round,
The special notification execution means executes the special notification when the operation period of the predetermined special information specified by the previous operation period specifying means is equal to or more than a predetermined period. The game machine according to Feature E1 or Feature E2, which is characterized by

  According to the above configuration, the presentation of the predetermined setting period is performed when the operation period of the game round for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or more than the predetermined period determined in advance. If one or more game use operations continue over the set period, the second benefit is awarded. By doing in this way, it is possible to make a special notification target also for the game circulation operation of the game round before the start, and it is possible to anticipate an increase in the execution opportunity of the special notification.

Feature E4. Summation means (for example, the effect control device 82) for summing up the operation period for one piece of the predetermined special information specified by the previous operation period specifying means and the operation period for the other predetermined special information Function to execute the process of step S1704),
The gaming machine according to the feature E3, wherein the special notification execution unit executes the special notification when the period summed by the summing unit is equal to or longer than the predetermined period.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification can be performed based on the operation period of the plurality of game times before the start. As a result, the sum of the operation periods is likely to be equal to or longer than the predetermined period, and it is possible to anticipate an increase in the execution opportunity of the special notification.

Feature E5. Remaining period grasping means (function to execute the processing of step S1708 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the remaining operation period in the gaming times being executed by the gaming number control means,
The game according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the special notification execution means performs the special notification in consideration of the remaining operation period grasped by the remaining period grasping means. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, since the remaining operation period of the currently running game is also taken into consideration, it is possible to add the running game operation as the one or more game operations targeted in the special notification. . By doing this, the probability of becoming equal to or more than a predetermined set period also increases, and the start of the special notification is not limited to the start of the game round, and the execution timing can be diversified.

  Note that, “applying the remaining operation period” is applied to a configuration in which special notification is performed according to the length of the operation period as in the feature E2, a configuration in which the special notification is performed when the remaining operation period is long. It may be By doing this, it is possible to prevent such a disadvantage that the special notification is performed and the second benefit is hardly given when the remaining operation period of the game play is short.

  In addition, “adding the remaining operation period” means that the previously specified operation period and the remaining operation period are added together if the operation period is applied to the configuration specifying the operation period first like feature E3. It may be In this way, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a predetermined setting period is exceeded, including the number of games being executed.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, wherein the special notification execution means executes the special notification based on the result of the determination of the provision by the determination means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the result of the assignment determination with the execution of the special notification. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the first benefit is easy to be given / is hard to be given if the special notification is given, and it is possible to entertain the player along with the operation for the game cycle.

Feature E7. Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the result of the addition determination when the predetermined special information becomes the target of the addition determination, the predetermined special information of the addition determination It has a destination specifying means (function to execute a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) specified at a timing earlier than the target,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, wherein the special notification execution means executes the special notification based on the specification result by the destination specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the information on the special information before the determination on the assignment determination and the execution of the special notification. Thereby, if the special notification is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which the first benefit is likely to be given / is hard to be given based on the special information determined thereafter, and predict the result of the giving determination from the special notification. You can enjoy the game.

  Particularly when this configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature E3, special notification can be performed by associating the information of the result of the addition determination with respect to the special information before the determination of the addition determination and the information of the operation period, thereby aiming to improve attention. And more preferred.

Feature E8. Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number as the upper limit. ,
The assignment determination unit sequentially performs the assignment determination on the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting unit when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is targeted by the game times by the game number control unit A target operation period specifying unit (function to execute the effect setting process when the time specification is possible by the effect control device 82) specifying the predetermined special information at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the game round,
The period presenting means according to any one of the features E1 to E7, wherein a predetermined setting period is presented based on the information of the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, presentation of the predetermined setting period is performed based on the information of the previously identified operation period, so it is grasped in advance whether one or more game operations will continue for the predetermined setting period or more. It is possible to give special notice while doing. In this way, whether or not the second benefit should be awarded can be managed in advance by the gaming machine side, so that effects consistent with it, for example, effects suggesting that the second benefit is likely to be / is difficult to be granted, are performed. Is possible.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number being a predetermined upper limit.
Assigning determination means (main control device 81) sequentially determining whether or not to grant the player a benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means Function to execute the success / failure judgment process by
Privilege giving means for giving the player the privilege (based on the main control device 81) based on the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means being the giving correspondence result corresponding to giving the privilege to the player Function to execute the game state transition process),
Based on the fact that the application judgment is made by the application judgment means, a predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) starts an operation for playing the game, and the game times as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Ending the game operation is one game cycle, and the game time control means (the function for executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) controls the predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed )When,
Destination specifying means for specifying information about predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing prior to the predetermined special information becoming the target of the addition determination (for holding by main controller 81 Function to execute confirmation processing),
Corresponding to the result of the assignment determination in the case where the predetermined special information that has become the target of the particular has become the target of the assignment determination based on the fact that the identification result by the prior identification means has become a predetermined result. Special notification execution means (function to execute a command corresponding process for suspension control by the effect control device 82) which executes special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means therefor;
Based on the special notification being performed by the special notification execution means, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round related to the special information different from the predetermined special information that has triggered the execution of the special notification. Predetermined effect execution means (function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification may be performed before the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit becomes the target of the determination of the addition. As a result, it becomes possible to play a game in which the predetermined special information that has become the identification target by the destination identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, and diversification of the game is illustrated. Be Thus, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. Here, in the gaming machine in which such special notification is performed, the more the special notification is made more flashy and the more attention is given to the predetermined special information, the lower the attention to the game round about the other special information is lowered. There is a possibility of For this reason, the game play to be performed is simply a digesting game, and it is difficult to enjoy the game sufficiently in that period. Therefore, if a predetermined effect is given in the game round about the other special information, the interest in the game round about the other special information is suitably provided if interest is given to the predetermined effect. It can be enhanced.

  In addition, if it is set as the structure which performs "predetermined effect" based on the said special information different from the said predetermined special information which triggered execution of the said special alerting ", not only the execution timing of a predetermined effect but The content can also be associated with the above-mentioned different special information, and the interest in the different special information can be suitably enhanced. Further, the predetermined effect may be expressed as "a predetermined effect different from the special notification".

  Feature F2. The predetermined effect executing means is configured to execute the predetermined effect in the game round related to the special information to be subjected to the addition determination before the predetermined special information. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, it is easy to become the digest game, especially the game times up to the game times for the predetermined special information that is the target of the special information, so in such a game time By performing a predetermined effect, it is possible to draw attention to the game even while the game is being performed, which is likely to be reduced in attention as a digested game.

Feature F3. Condition setting means (performing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82 to set special conditions whose establishment probability may differ depending on the game situation under execution of the predetermined effect without taking into consideration that the special conditions are established Function),
Condition determination means (a function for executing special hold notification processing at the time of stopping by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is established;
A game machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when a predetermined effect is performed, it is possible to draw attention to the game situation being executed. That is, it is possible to enhance the relevancy of the predetermined effect and the game situation being executed, and to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game, rather than merely performing each effect or game. And since special conditions that may differ depending on the game situation are set without considering success or failure, it is possible to avoid an event such as a so-called "made-up race" in which the result is understood from other information on the way it can. Therefore, it becomes possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner.

  If the condition determination unit determines that the special condition is established, the provision unit (a function for executing the addition process of the effect control device 82) for giving a benefit has a degree of attention to the success or failure of the special condition. Can be raised more. In this case, by setting the bonus awarded based on the special condition satisfaction to a bonus different from the privilege awarded based on the award determination by the award determination means, an effect of the game round on the award determination side and a predetermined effect execution It is possible to clearly indicate that the determinations are different from one another while associating the predetermined effect on the means side. Note that "depending on the gaming situation" can be reworded as "related to the gaming situation" or "by the gaming situation".

  Feature F4. The game according to the feature F3 characterized in that the condition judging means judges whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on one or more of the game time operations by the game time control means. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to associate the special notification based on the identification of the special information and the game operation operation sequentially performed based on the special information through a predetermined effect. By doing this, it is possible to maintain a balance between the degree of attention of the special notification and the game circulation operation, and to increase the interest in the game.

  It should be noted that "based on the game operation" means "based on the operation period (length) of the game operation" or "operation mode of the game operation (operation content, effect content It may be rephrased as "on the basis of. In these cases, assuming that "operation period setting means for setting the operation period of the game operation" and "operation mode setting means for setting the operation mode of the game operation" are provided by those setting means. The success or failure of the special conditions may be determined based on the set operation period or operation mode of the game operation, or, alternatively, these operation period or operation mode may be changed in the middle of the game operation. In the configuration obtained, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined based on the changed operation period or operation mode.

  Feature F5. The special condition is characterized in that the probability of being established may be higher as the operation period of the game circulation operation in the game times relating to the special information different from the predetermined special information is longer. The gaming machine according to feature F4.

  According to the above configuration, the longer the operation period of the game round relating to the special information different from the predetermined special information that is the trigger of the special notification, the more special conditions in the predetermined effect become established, so the different special information Even in a situation where the operation period of the game game according to the present invention is prolonged and it can be felt that it is redundant, it becomes possible to draw attention to a predetermined effect side, and keep the attention to the effect balanced.

Feature F6. The predetermined notification means is display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns,
The game number control means controls the display means to start the variable display of the plurality of patterns as the game operation, stop the respective patterns, and notify the determination result by the application determining means. To be
The condition judging means is for judging whether the special condition is satisfied or not based on the pattern stopped and displayed by the game times control means, in any one of the features F3 to F5. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to relate the pattern to be stopped and displayed as a result of the award determination in each game run to the success or failure of the special condition in the predetermined effect performed based on the special notification. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to each game while increasing the degree of attention to the special notification.

  In particular, in the situation where the special notification is performed as described above, while the game results of the game times relating to the special information that triggered the special information are strongly interested, the game results of the other game times are There may be less interest. This is considered to be a problem that occurs because the player predicts that the game result of the other game times is out of order (a result that the privilege is not given) by performing the special notification. However, if the possibility that the game result of these other game times is a hit is too high, there may be a problem that the degree of attention to the special notification side is reduced. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to change the game result itself of the other game times by using the configuration to determine the success or failure of the special condition using each pattern notified as the game result of the other game times. However, even if the result is an outlier, the special condition can be established only by the change on the presentation. In this way, in the configuration in which the special notification and the predetermined effect are performed in parallel, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the both in a well-balanced manner.

  Feature F7. Condition presenting means (variation by the effect control device 82) presenting the special condition set by the condition setting means at a timing before the first picture of the plurality of pictures in the game-use operation is stopped A game machine according to feature F6, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing a start process.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on the stop pattern, the special condition is presented at a timing prior to the stop of the first pattern in the game. Therefore, the player does not know the success or failure of the special condition after stopping the pattern, but in a configuration in which the variable display decelerates to a certain degree before stopping and the pattern can be recognized to a certain degree before stopping. The success or failure of the special condition can be recognized at the timing. By doing this, it is possible to bring attention to the variable display of the pattern and to preferably raise the degree of attention.

  Feature F8. The condition presenting means presents the special condition by presenting correspondence information (bingo card 300, lotto card 320) corresponding to the pattern variably displayed in the game operation. The gaming machine according to feature F7.

  According to the above configuration, since the pattern to be variably displayed is associated with the special condition, it becomes easy for the player to understand. As a result, it is possible to more easily enjoy the predetermined effect for the player.

  Feature F9. In the game-use operation, the correspondence information corresponding to the stop-displayed pattern is compared with the first mode from the first mode (the mass before establishment) which is the state before the stop display. The game according to the feature F8, characterized in that it comprises switching means (function to execute the processing of step S4204 by the effect control device 82) for switching to the second mode (the established space) distinguishable by the player. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, the player can clearly grasp the success or failure of the special condition. This makes it possible to more easily enjoy the predetermined effect.

  Feature F10. The condition determining means determines that the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that the correspondence information in the second mode has a predetermined result (bingo, lot). The gaming machine according to feature F9, characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the above configuration, the player notes that the correspondence information is in the second mode and that it has a predetermined result. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the special condition in the predetermined effect is established, and it is possible for the player to fully enjoy the game.

  Feature F11. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F8 to F10, wherein the condition presenting unit presents a plurality of pieces of correspondence information.

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of pieces of correspondence information are presented, and therefore, it is assumed that the pattern corresponding to the single piece of correspondence information is not stopped in the middle of the variable display as compared with the configuration in which a single piece of correspondence information is presented. Even when predicted / understood, if special conditions are satisfied by correspondence information corresponding to other patterns, it can be thought that it is possible to maintain the level of attention to a predetermined effect .

Feature F12. The condition presenting means is a means for presenting special conditions including different correspondence information as the correspondence information (a function for executing the special effect A1 or the special effect B1 in the effect control device 82), and the special information including the same correspondence information And means for presenting a condition (a function for executing the special effect A2 or the special effect B2 in the effect control device 82);
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the switching unit is configured to be able to switch a plurality of pieces of correspondence information corresponding to the stop display of one of the patterns to the second mode.

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the special condition including the same correspondence information is presented, if the symbol corresponding to the correspondence information is stopped and displayed, those correspondence information is switched to the second mode. The degree of contribution to special conditions for pattern stops can be increased, and interest in pattern stops can be increased. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise attention to a game.

  Feature F13. The condition presenting means is configured to be able to present special correspondence information (a satisfied mass "F") corresponding to a plurality of the patterns as one piece of the correspondence information. Features F8 to F12 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to contribute to the establishment of the special condition regardless of which pattern is stopped and displayed as long as it is a pattern corresponding to the special correspondence information. Therefore, the special conditions are easily established, and the player can look forward to the subsequent development.

  Feature F14. The game according to any one of the features F6 to F13, wherein the condition judging means judges whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the plurality of the symbols displayed in a stopped state. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game as to whether or not the special condition is established by the plurality of symbols. For example, in a configuration in which each symbol is stopped and displayed at different times in one game, each symbol is stopped and displayed if the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on a plurality of symbols as described above. It becomes possible to enjoy the success or failure of the special condition at the timing. In addition, if it is configured to determine the success or failure of the special condition by a plurality of symbols stopped across the game times, even if the special conditions are not satisfied in one game time, it may be established in the next game time As such, the sense of expectation can be sustained, and attention to games can be more suitably enhanced.

Feature F15. Symbol storage means capable of storing the information of the symbol displayed stopped in the game run and holding the stored information over a plurality of times of the game run (special hold when stopped by the effect control device 82 Equipped with a function to execute the process for
The game machine according to Feature F14, wherein the condition judging means judges whether the special condition is satisfied by using the memory information stored in the pattern memory means.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on a plurality of patterns, success or failure of the special condition can be enjoyed over a plurality of game rounds, and interest in success or failure of the special condition It is possible to prolong the period of

Feature F16. The said game times control means, said display means so that a specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed in the game times based on the judgment result by the above-mentioned grant judgment means being a result corresponding to granting the above-mentioned privilege Control the
The game machine according to any one of the features F6 to F15, wherein the special condition is more easily established if the specific symbol combination is not displayed in a stopped state.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the display means in anticipation that the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in each game round, but it is easier for the special condition not to be stopped and displayed. . Therefore, it can be avoided that the degree of attention is extremely reduced even if a specific symbol combination is not displayed in a stopped state while expecting to give a benefit.

  In addition, as a specific configuration for “the special condition is more easily established if the specific pattern combination is not displayed to be stopped”, for example, the special condition is displayed to be stopped. Assuming that the more the types of patterns, the more easily the specific pattern combination is the combination corresponding to the case where the privilege is not given, the number of types of the patterns is smaller than the combination. Configuration is conceivable.

Feature F17. The said game times control means, said display means so that a specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed in the game times based on the judgment result by the above-mentioned grant judgment means being a result corresponding to granting the above-mentioned privilege Control the
In the operation for playing the game by the game time control means, the specific symbol as an effect suggesting that the specific symbol combination is in a state where it is easy to stop and display the specific symbol combination prior to the stop displaying While stopping a part of the patterns constituting the combination (the symbols forming the reach line, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, and the left and right symbol rows Y1 and Y3), the other symbols constituting the specific pattern combination A specific effect (reach display) is displayed, in which the group of symbols including (the middle symbol row Z2, Y2 displayed variably during reach) is variably displayed.
In any one of the features F6 to F16, the condition judging means judges the success or failure of the special condition based on stop display of the part of the pattern and the other pattern. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, in the specific effect in which a part of the specific pattern combination is stopped and the other patterns are displayed in a variable manner, the other portions are displayed in a variable manner with the part of the symbols displayed in the stopped state. The success or failure of the special condition is determined by the symbol of. Therefore, for example, assuming that a part of the special conditions is satisfied by the above-mentioned part of the patterns, in addition to the fun such as whether or not the specific pattern combination is stopped in the pleasure of looking at other patterns in the variable display. Also, fun is added as to whether or not special conditions hold. Thus, unlike the conventional game in which the symbol is variably displayed and it is simply informed whether the benefit is given or not, it is possible to see the fluctuation display of the symbol from a more multifaceted viewpoint, to the game It becomes possible to preferably raise the degree of attention.

  Feature F18. In the specific effect, the special condition is more effective when the symbol which does not form the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed than when the symbol which forms the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as the other symbol. The gaming machine according to Feature F17, which is set to be easily established.

  According to the above configuration, in the specific effect, if the symbol forming the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as another symbol, the player can obtain the privilege, and the symbol not forming the specific symbol combination is stopped. If displayed, the special condition is satisfied. As described above, even if the player is usually disappointed in the specific effect, the interest in the effect is extremely reduced by giving the player some merit. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature F19. The game times control means is a stop process for temporarily stopping the pattern during the variable display of the pattern as a step before the variable display of the pattern is stopped and displayed according to the determination result by the application determination means. Stop means (function of executing the processing of step S4115 and step S4116 in the effect control device 82) capable of
The game machine according to any one of the features F6 to F18, wherein the condition judging means judges the success or failure of the special condition including the pattern stopped by the stopping means.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the pattern can be temporarily stopped before it is finally displayed as the stop result corresponding to the result of the addition determination, the success or failure of the special condition including the temporarily stopped pattern is determined. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the fluctuation / stop of the pattern of each game time, and as a result, to increase the degree of attention to the success or failure (predetermined effect) of the special condition. That is, by reflecting a part of the effects of the series of effects on the game side on the success or failure of the special condition, it is possible to more closely associate the two and to increase the attention of both synergistically. .

  Feature F20. Second benefit granting means (effect control) that grants a second benefit (such as a rare image) different from the benefit given by the benefit giving means when it is determined that the special condition is established by the condition determining means The gaming machine according to any one of the features F3 to F19, comprising: a function of executing a privilege giving process in the device 82.

  According to the above configuration, since the second benefit different from the benefit based on the award determination by the award determination unit is awarded based on the special condition satisfaction, the effect of the game determination on the award determination side by the award determination unit and the predetermined effect execution It is possible to clearly indicate that the determinations are different from one another while associating the predetermined effect on the means side. As a result, it is possible to preferably enjoy the effects of the game turn and the predetermined effects.

Feature F21. A situation grasping means for grasping the situation of the game circulation operation by the game number control means (function of executing the processing of step S4301, step S4302, step S4304 to step S4305 by the effect control device 82);
Third privilege giving means (perform processing of step S4306 by the effect control device 82 can be made to differ the timing of giving the second benefit based on the situation of the game operation grasped by the situation grasping means The gaming machine according to feature F20, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature F20, the timing at which the second benefit is awarded may differ depending on the status of the game circulation operation in the game circulation. Here, the presentation on the game side is for notifying the result of the award determination by the award determination means, and depending on the situation, there is also a situation where priority is given to notifying the result of the award determination than the success or failure of the special condition. obtain. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by making it possible to differ the application timing depending on the status of the game operation, in the configuration in which the game circulation effect and the effect by the predetermined effect execution means coexist, both are present. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience due to the competition.

  Feature F22. The third benefit awarding means is configured to be capable of awarding the second benefit at a game time different from the game time determined by the condition judgment means that the special condition is established. The gaming machine according to feature F21.

  According to the above configuration, for example, when the special condition is established at the final stage of the game round, the period from when the special condition is satisfied to when the second benefit is awarded is short, or the first game round 2) Special conditions have been established in cases such as when giving priority to rendering for game use over granting benefits (for example, when the awarding decision by the awarding decision means is the result corresponding to awarding an award), etc. If the second benefit is given at a game time different from the game time, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above.

  Feature F23. The predetermined effect execution means sets execution of the predetermined effect based on the special information different from the predetermined special information which has triggered the execution of the special notification by the special notification execution means. A setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S4001 to step S4003 by the effect control device 82) is provided, and the predetermined effect is executed based on the setting by the execution setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F22.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the predetermined effect is to be performed is set based on the special information different from the special information that is the trigger of the execution of the special notification, and if it is set to be performed, the different special It is performed in the game time which concerns on information. That is, even when a predetermined effect is not to be performed, for example, the trigger for the execution of the predetermined effect is not only the special notification but also the configuration based on the special information related to the game round to be performed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of executing a predetermined effect.

  Here, in the configuration in which a predetermined effect is performed based on the execution of such a special notification, whether or not the predetermined effect is also executed when setting whether or not to execute the special notification, unlike the above configuration. A configuration for setting the This configuration also seems preferable from the viewpoint of simplification of the processing configuration. However, since the predetermined effect is the game round related to the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification, it is sufficient to grasp the predetermined special information for the special notification. Therefore, it is necessary to grasp a predetermined presentation about special information different from that. Therefore, when the special notification is executed, if it is set whether or not the predetermined effect is to be executed, it becomes necessary for the special notification to grasp unnecessary special information, and the processing configuration for the conventional special notification There is a concern that the processing load of the special notification itself may increase significantly. Therefore, as in the present configuration, if it is configured to set the presence or absence of execution for the predetermined effect by the execution setting means, a new effect that the predetermined effect is performed while avoiding the inconvenience for the processing on the special notification side. It is possible to add a configuration.

  Feature F24. The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect even if the game is related to the special information acquired later than the predetermined special information that has triggered the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F23, which is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is started in response to the special notification, and even if the special information is acquired during the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect can be continued until the game round related to the special information. it can. Therefore, after the predetermined effect is started, it is possible to change the content (execution period) of the predetermined effect by acquiring the special information, so that active participation in the game can be expected, and the game is devoted to more It can be done.

  Feature F25. The assignment determination unit is configured to perform the assignment determination on the one special information acquired by the information acquisition unit with respect to the other special information acquired by the information acquisition unit prior to the one special information. The game according to any one of the features F1 to F24 characterized by further comprising destination judgment means (function to execute data setting processing by the main control device 81 in the seventh embodiment) performed prior to the judgment. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the special information is acquired in the situation where the predetermined effect is performed, the special information acquired above the special information about the special notification that is the trigger of the predetermined effect is obtained. A determination may be made of Therefore, since the period until the result of the grant determination related to the special information on the special notification is notified may be longer, for the player who wants to know the result of the grant determination earlier, these periods are more redundant. There is a possibility of feeling as a thing. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature F1 to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the predetermined number of games for the special information which is acquired later than the predetermined special information and which is to be subjected to the provision determination is given first. It becomes possible to perform an effect, and it is possible to increase attention to a game in a well-balanced manner while avoiding the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  Feature F26. The predetermined effect execution means reflects information based on entering the ball in the ball entry into the predetermined effect based on the game ball entering the ball after the start of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F25, which is configured to be capable of.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to cause the meaning to cause the ball to enter the gaming ball after the start of the predetermined effect. Since the predetermined effect is executed triggered by the special notification based on the identification result by the point specifying means, when it is desired to know the result of the determination of the addition of the special information about the special notification, the player newly plays the game ball. There is a possibility that the firing of the game ball may be stopped until the game cycle related to the special notification without entering the ball. Therefore, by causing the significance of entering the ball after the start of the predetermined effect as in the above-described configuration, it is possible to urge the continuation of the firing of the gaming ball.

  Feature F27. The predetermined effect execution means causes the predetermined effect to reflect the information that the game ball has entered into the ball entry section, even when the predetermined information is stored in the acquired information storage means. A game machine according to Feature F26, characterized in that the configuration is possible.

  According to the above configuration, even if the special information has reached the predetermined number, the information is reflected on the predetermined effect side if the ball is entered into the ball entry part, so suppressing so-called strike-off be able to. Here, as a configuration for prompting the continuation of the launch of the game ball, a configuration may be considered in which the upper limit of the predetermined number is increased or the upper limit is removed. However, in the case of such a configuration, for example, since the time difference between the game ball entry timing and the game execution timing becomes large, it is possible for the game hall manager to play the game ball without entering the game ball. There may be inconveniences such as making it difficult to detect fraudulent acts that make a decision (grant decision). Therefore, as described above, if it is configured not to reflect the game turn side effect related to the award determination directly linked to the player's profit but to reflect predetermined ball entry information on a predetermined effect side, as described above. It is possible to enjoy a predetermined presentation sufficiently while avoiding any inconvenience. Therefore, the attention degree to a game can be raised suitably.

Feature F28. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number being a predetermined upper limit.
Assigning determination means (main control device 81) sequentially determining whether or not to grant the player a benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means Function to execute the success / failure judgment process by
Privilege giving means for giving the player the privilege (based on the main control device 81) based on the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means being the giving correspondence result corresponding to giving the privilege to the player Function to execute the game state transition process),
Based on the fact that the application judgment is made by the application judgment means, a predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) starts an operation for playing the game, and the game times as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Ending the game operation is one game cycle, and the game time control means (the function for executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) controls the predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed )When,
Destination specifying means for specifying information about predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing prior to the predetermined special information becoming the target of the addition determination (for holding by main controller 81 Function to execute confirmation processing),
Based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means has become a predetermined result, the predetermined notification at a timing before the predetermined special information that has become the object of the identification becomes an object of the assignment determination. Special notification execution means (function to execute a command control process for suspension control by the effect control device 82) for executing special notification by means or means different therefrom.
Means (10th, 11th) for reflecting the ball entering information to the ball entering portion generated after the ball entering the game ball relating to the predetermined special information which has triggered the special notification A game machine having a function of executing a command for processing for holding control in the embodiment).

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification may be performed before the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit becomes the target of the determination of the addition. As a result, it becomes possible to play a game in which the predetermined special information that has become the identification target by the destination identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, and diversification of the game is illustrated. Be Thus, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. Here, in the gaming machine in which such special notification is performed, the more special attention is made as a flashy thing, the more attention is given to the predetermined special information, and the more the game is played until the game round related to the special notification. There is a possibility that the interest may decrease, and when the special notification occurs, the player waits until the game round related to the special notification is performed by stopping the firing of the game ball or the like (stops the game) ) There is also a possibility. Therefore, in the special notification, if the ball entry information to the ball entering part generated later than that is reflected in the special notification, the game ball continues to be fired even after the special notification is given. Can give rise to As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number being a predetermined upper limit.
Assigning determination means (main control) sequentially determining whether to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means A function of executing a success / failure determination process by the device 81),
First benefit granting means for awarding the first benefit to the player based on the result of the awarding determination by the assignment judging means being an awarding correspondence result corresponding to awarding the first benefit to the player (Function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81),
Based on the fact that the application judgment is made by the application judgment means, a predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) starts an operation for playing the game, and the game times as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Ending the game operation is one game cycle, and the game time control means (the function for executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) controls the predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed )When,
Equipped with
The game number control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of variation display time by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game circulation operation in each game period, and the operation period The predetermined notification means is controlled such that the game circulation operation is performed over the operation period set by the setting means.
A destination operation period in which information on the operation period set by the operation period setting unit is specified at a timing prior to the game generation control unit to be set by the operation period setting unit being executed by the game generation control unit Specifying means (function of executing an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82);
Second benefit granting means (effect control device capable of giving the player a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the result specified by the previous operation period identifying means being a predetermined result 82) function to execute special hold notification setting processing by
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the second benefit different from the first benefit may be provided based on the fact that the operation period of the game play has reached the predetermined result. Therefore, it is possible to raise the interest about the operation period. In this case, since the information of the operation period is specified prior to the execution of the game play, the second benefit can also be given before the execution of the game play. By doing in this way, the length of the game is compared with a configuration in which the final length can be determined only at the end of the game cycle, as the game cycle operation period is merely a period in which the game cycle operation is performed. Since it is possible to grasp the size in advance and to receive the second benefit according to the length, it is possible to draw more attention to the operation period.

Feature G2. A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is short and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the game cycle operation. The game circulation operation is performed in a set execution mode,
The second benefit granting means is more effective when the operation period specified by the preceding operation period specifying means is the operation period with the long-term mode than the operation period with the short-term mode. (2) The gaming machine according to the feature G1, characterized in that the configuration is such that it is easy to give a benefit.

  According to the above configuration, the benefit is more easily given when the long operation period is specified than when the short operation period is specified. By doing this, the player desires a long operation period, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of extension during the game by extending the operation period.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means (means for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry part;
Acquisition information storage means (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a predetermined number being a predetermined upper limit.
Assigning determination means (main control device 81) sequentially determining whether or not to grant the player a benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means Function to execute the success / failure judgment process by
Privilege giving means for giving the player the privilege (based on the main control device 81) based on the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means being the giving correspondence result corresponding to giving the privilege to the player Function to execute the game state transition process),
Based on the application judgment by the application judging means, the game notification operation is started by the predetermined notification means, and the game operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Game time control means (function to execute the game time control process by the main control device 81) which controls the predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed.
Destination specifying means for specifying information about predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing prior to the predetermined special information becoming the target of the addition determination (for holding by main controller 81 Function to execute confirmation processing),
Corresponding to the result of the assignment determination in the case where the predetermined special information that has become the target of the particular has become the target of the assignment determination based on the fact that the identification result by the prior identification means has become a predetermined result. Special notification execution means (function to execute a command corresponding process for suspension control by the effect control device 82) which executes special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means therefor;
Executable state setting means (special hold notification by effect control device 82) which sets the specification by the destination specifying means to an executable state based on the specification result by the destination specifying means being a predetermined result Function to execute setting process),
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the executable state can be continued even after the predetermined special information which has triggered the setting becomes a target of the provision determination.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification may be performed before the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit becomes the target of the determination of the addition. As a result, it becomes possible to play a game in which the predetermined special information that has become the identification target by the destination identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, and diversification of the game is illustrated. Be Thus, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. Then, an executable state in which destination identification by the destination identification means can be executed is set based on the identification result of the destination identification means, and after the predetermined special information that has triggered the setting becomes the target of the assignment determination Even its feasible state can be carried over. That is, the configuration is set to an executable state based on the identification result by the destination identification unit, and special notification based on other special information can be performed after the special information that triggered the setting is digested. Therefore, the special notification can be diversified, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Information acquisition means (operation by main control device 81) for acquiring information for grant determination (hold information) based on predetermined acquisition condition establishment (for example, ball entry of gaming ball to upper operation opening 33 or lower operation opening 34) Means for executing a mouth winning process),
An assignment determination unit (mainly determines whether or not to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A function of executing a yes / no determination process by the control device 81),
First effect setting means (function to execute game times control process by the main control device 81) to set the first effect to be performed by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means )When,
First effect executing means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the effect control device 82) which executes the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
First benefit giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for giving the first benefit based on the assignment determination by the assignment determining means;
In a gaming machine provided with
The predetermined notification means or the notification means different from the predetermined notification means is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, corresponding to the execution of the special suspension notice in the special suspension notice table). 2) Second effect execution means (a function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the effect (special hold notification);
Condition setting means (a function for executing a special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting special conditions having different establishment probabilities according to the length of the period in which the second effect is performed;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function of executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the information for determination of assignment is acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the determination of whether or not the first benefit is to be granted is performed based on the information for determination of assignment, and the assignment is performed. In the gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification means is generated by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition established in advance. The presentation is performed. Therefore, diversification of the effect is achieved by performing the second effect in addition to the first effect performed based on the assignment determination.

  Here, the first benefit is awarded according to the result of the assignment determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for the game session) is performed by the predetermined notification means based on the assignment determination. In the case where it is possible to expect that the first benefit may be obtained if the first effect based on the assignment determination is continued for a long time, it is possible to expect, for example, whether or not the first benefit is obtained. For the player who is only focusing on the player, or for the player who has grasped the result of the award determination to some extent by some circumstances (for example, presence or absence of advance notice effect, strength, etc.), the first effect performed by the predetermined notification means is If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the assignment determination is short, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is not necessarily as long as it is long, but it may be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, if a special condition having a different establishment probability according to the length of the period in which the second effect is performed is set, and determination means for determining the success or failure of the special condition is provided, It is possible to have a scale different from the scale such as the length of a simple first effect, and even if such inconvenience may occur in the first effect on the assignment determination side, the special condition is If it becomes easy to be established, it can be made to expect and it will become possible to keep the attention level to a game in a well-balanced manner.

  Feature I2. The determination means includes means for determining the success or failure of the special condition regardless of the result of the addition determination by the addition determination means at the time of determination (function to execute the process for holding display by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to lower the relativity between the success or failure of the special condition in the second effect and the first effect on which the result of the assignment determination is reflected. By doing this, it is possible to purely enjoy whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the second effect, for example, the effect that the first benefit is hard to be provided in the first effect on the assignment determination side is performed Even in such a case, the success or failure of the special condition is determined regardless of it, so that the degree of attention can be prevented from being extremely reduced.

The above configuration is, for example,
“The determination means includes means for performing the determination regardless of conditions other than the special condition at the time of determination”, or
"The special condition has a different establishment probability based on the passage of a predetermined period in the second effect,
The determination means is provided with means for determining the lapse of the predetermined period regardless of the result of the addition determination.
It can be paraphrased.

  Feature I3. Second benefit giving means for giving the player a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the determination that the special condition is established by the determination means (processing for holding display by the effect control device 82 A game machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, characterized in that it has a function of performing

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the user more concerned about whether or not the special condition is satisfied, that is, the determination result of the determination means. In particular, by making the second benefit different from the first benefit, it becomes possible to realize a different game from the conventional game in which the acquisition condition is simply established and the first benefit is obtained, so that various types of games can be realized. Can be implemented.

  Further, by applying the present configuration to the feature I2, it is possible to intensify the impressions that are different determinations.

  Feature I4. In any one of the features I1 to I3, the condition setting means sets the special condition such that the special condition is more easily established as the period in which the second effect is performed is longer. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, as the period during which the second effect is performed is longer, the special condition is more easily established. By doing this, the player expects the second effect to be performed for a long time.

  As described in the feature I1, the effect on the assignment determination side has a possibility that the longer it is, the longer the attention degree is not increased, and it may make it feel redundant. Therefore, by providing the present configuration, even if there is a possibility that the first effect on the assignment determination side may be felt to be redundant, it is expected that the special condition is satisfied on the second effect side. Can maintain a well-balanced level of attention to the game.

  Feature I5. The condition setting means is provided with a means for setting the special condition according to the length of the first effect set by the first effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1501 in the effect control device 82) A game machine according to any one of features I1 to I4 characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side with the ease of establishment of the special condition on the second effect side. By doing in this way, even if the inconvenience is caused by the length of the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect side is made to absorb the inconvenience, and the degree of attention to the game is extreme. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  If this configuration is applied to the feature I2, the setting is made to relate to the first effect on the assignment determination side at the time of setting the special condition, and at the determination of the special condition, the determination is performed regardless of the result of the assignment determination. By doing this, it is possible to create a novel game in which it is possible to change the result of determination by changing the game situation from setting of special conditions to determination. The change in the game situation may be, for example, a change in the number of the stored information for awarding determination in a configuration capable of storing a plurality of information for awarding determination.

  Feature I6. Feature I1 characterized by comprising condition notification means (function to execute special suspension notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notification means or notification means different therefrom. The gaming machine according to any one of I5.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the player grasp the special condition. As a result, it can be sufficiently enjoyed that the probability that the special condition is satisfied will differ according to the period in which the second effect is performed.

  Feature I7. The condition notification means includes destination notification means (function of executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) for performing notification of the special condition at a timing prior to the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to feature I6, characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination of success or failure. Since the special condition is different depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed, if the special condition is grasped as early as possible, it is fun to see if the special condition is satisfied. Can not.

  Feature I8. The destination notification means is characterized by including means for executing notification of the special condition based on the start of the second effect (function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to feature I7.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed based on the start of the second effect, it is possible to enjoy the success or failure of the period involved in the success or failure of the special condition at the maximum.

  Feature I9. The destination notification means is characterized by including means for executing notification of the special condition (function for executing special hold notification control processing by the effect control device 82) while the second effect is being performed. The gaming machine according to the feature I7 or the feature I8.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed while the second effect is being performed, the player can be made to grasp that the probability of establishment of the special condition is different. As a result, it is possible to make the player clearly grasp the relationship between the period in which the second effect is performed and the establishment probability of the special condition.

  Feature I10. The condition notification means is provided with a post notification means (function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) which performs notification of the special condition at a timing after the determination by the determination means is performed. The game machine according to any one of Features I6 to I9, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the special condition can be grasped even after the determination by the determination means. That is, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped even after the determination timing. By doing this, it is possible to leave an interest as to whether or not the special condition holds, even after the application timing, as an afterglow, and to suppress an extreme decrease in the attention degree after the determination. it can.

  Feature I11. The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the post notification means performs notification regarding the establishment probability of the special condition at the time of determination of the determination means as notification of the special condition.

  According to the above configuration, since notification on the establishment probability of the special condition at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success or failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not established, it is possible to grasp how long it is established later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not established. .

Feature I12. Acquisition information storage means for storing the information for the assignment determination acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers as the upper limit (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) Equipped with
The assignment determination unit sequentially performs the assignment determination on the assignment determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit,
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying the predetermined assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit at a timing prior to the predetermined assignment determination information being the target of the assignment determination Function to execute the confirmation process of
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I11, wherein the condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the destination specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the predetermined addition determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit. Therefore, the game of predicting the predetermined information for grant determination from the special condition is added, and diversification of the game is achieved. That is, by associating the special condition with the information for determination as a trigger for the determination by the determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature I13. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means or the notification means different from that to start the game circulation operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the application determination means, and the result of the determination As the notification result corresponding to the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, the game cycle control means (the game cycle control process by the main control device 81 is executed so that the game cycle operation is performed Function),
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The destination specifying means is a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means as the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means. A destination operation period specifying unit (function to execute an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82),
The condition setting means is provided with a first setting means (function to execute timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specification result of the preceding operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature I12, which is characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, the setting of the special condition is performed based on the information of the operation period specified by the preceding operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in the game can be further enhanced, and it becomes possible to associate the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied with the length of the operation period. Therefore, an effect can be suitably performed.

  Feature I14. The condition setting means is provided with a second setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature I13, which is characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period can not be specified first by the first operation period specifying unit, for example, even if the operation period is determined only at the start of the game, the second setting unit sets the special condition. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, an effect can be suitably performed.

Feature I15. In the gaming state, a special state in which the operation period can be specified by the destination operation period specifying means is set to any of the information for awarding determination,
The gaming machine according to feature I13 or I14, wherein the special condition is set during the special state.

  According to the above configuration, if in the special state, the information of the operation period can be specified earlier even if any of the assignment determination information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the special condition is set in such a state. If the setting is made, the inconvenience that the information of the operation period can not be identified does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to preferably realize the second effect using the special condition.

Feature I16. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number corresponding pattern) reflecting the gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) in the case where the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed; And a second operation period (pending number non-corresponding pattern) which is not included.
The preceding operation period specifying unit is provided with a unit for specifying an operation period for the provision determination information to be the second operation period (a function for executing an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of features I13 to I15, characterized in that

  In a configuration in which a plurality of information for award determination are stored and an award determination for the award determination information is sequentially performed, the game situation at the time of obtaining the award determination information and the game situation at the award decision may be different. Even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination, the operation period at the time of specification by the previous operation period specifying means may be different from the operation period at the time of the addition determination. Therefore, in the above configuration, the second operation period is not the first operation period in which such a game situation is reflected, but the second operation period is specified based on the timing before the target of the award determination, so the operation based on the difference in the game conditions It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of prior identification of the period. Thereby, it is possible to preferably perform the rendering using the operation period.

  Note that, if the present configuration is applied to the feature I13, “the first setting unit determines, based on the operation period specified by the operation period specifying unit, the application determination information to be the second operation period, Preferably, the special condition is set.

  Feature I17. The preceding operation period specifying means operates a temporary operation period for the provision determination information when the operation period for the provision determination information which is the identification target is the first operation period. A game machine according to feature I16, further comprising temporary specifying means (a function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment) for specifying as a period.

  As in the above configuration, even if the operation period may be different based on the difference in the game situation, if it is specified as the temporary operation period, it is possible to perform effects based on at least the success or failure of the special condition. That is, even when the operation period can not be specified in advance, monotonization of the effect can be suppressed by leaving room for performing the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature I14, it is preferable that “the second setting unit sets the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit”.

Feature I18. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second effect is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies, as the temporary operation period, a period which is shorter than or equal to the shortest period of the first operation period which can be set by the operation period setting means. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily identified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration relating to the tentative identification can be simplified. In addition, since the temporary specific period is equal to or less than the shortest period of the period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is also set to be higher than the highest establishment probability. Here, if the probability of establishment of the special condition becomes extremely low, the player gets used to the fact that the special condition is not established in another effect different from the second effect, and interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is sex. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by setting the special condition to be easily established, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to the fact that the probability of establishment becomes low due to temporary specification.

Feature I19. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second effect is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies, as the temporary operation period, a period which is longer than or equal to the longest period of the first operation period which can be set by the operation period setting means.
A unit that corrects the special condition at a timing after the timing at which the specification by the temporary specification unit is performed and at a timing before the determination by the determination unit is performed (in the fourth embodiment , A game machine according to the feature I17 or I18, which is characterized by having a function of executing subtraction processing at the time of shift by the effect control device.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily identified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration relating to the tentative identification can be simplified. Further, since the temporary specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period among the periods that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is also set to be lower than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to the fact that the probability of occurrence becomes low due to temporary specification by correcting the special conditions after that.

  Note that “correction” may be, for example, a configuration that “shortens / extends a period in which the second effect is performed”, and more specifically, “provisionally regarding the period in which the second effect is performed, A configuration is conceivable in which the difference between the operation period and the operation period set by the operation period setting means is shortened / extended.

Feature I20. Acquisition information storage means for storing the information for the assignment determination acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers as the upper limit (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) Equipped with
The assignment determination unit sequentially determines whether to grant the first benefit to the player based on the assignment determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit.
For the predetermined assignment determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit, the target of the assignment determination at a timing before the predetermined assignment determination information becomes the target of the assignment determination by the assignment determination unit. Provision of destination specifying means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the assignment determination in the event of
The first effect setting means is a target of the application judgment by the application judging means for the predetermined information for application judging by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the specification result by the destination specifying means. It sets the effect (hold notice) to be performed at the timing earlier than it becomes
The first effect execution means, on the basis of the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means has become a predetermined result, the predetermined information for provision determination which is the object of the identification becomes the object of the addition determination. Special notification (hold notice) corresponding to the result of the application determination in the case, at a timing prior to the notification of the result of the application determination for the predetermined special information, separately from the predetermined notification means or To be executed by the notification means of
The second effect execution unit is configured to, based on the fact that the content of the special notification performed by the first effect execution unit is a predetermined content (for example, content corresponding to the fourth image P4 for holding). The game machine according to any one of the features I1 to I19, wherein the effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification may be performed before the predetermined additional determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit is to be the target of the additional determination. In this way, it is possible to play a game in which the predetermined additional determination information specified by the destination identification means is predicted before the result of the additional determination of the predetermined additional determination information is notified. The game is diversified. Thus, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. In the case of performing such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be granted the first benefit, the degree of attention to the special notification is increased while the effect on information for other determination judgments is given The degree of attention may be reduced. Further, in the case of a special notification where it is difficult to give the first benefit, not only the special notification but also the degree of attention to the subsequent effects may be extremely reduced. Therefore, if, for example, a predetermined content is set as the special notification, the second notification may be performed by the predetermined notification means or the notification means different from that, the degree of attention may be reduced by performing the special notification. In the situation, it is possible to make the second effect side pay attention and to preferably avoid a decrease in the attention level.

Feature I21. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means or the notification means different from that to start the game circulation operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the application determination means, and the result of the determination As the notification result corresponding to the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, the game cycle control means (the game cycle control process by the main control device 81 is executed so that the game cycle operation is performed Function),
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The destination specifying means is a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means as the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means. A destination operation period specifying unit (function to execute an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to feature I20, wherein the condition setting unit sets the special condition based on a specification result by the preceding operation period specifying unit.

  According to the above configuration, in the second effect performed based on the content of the special notification being the predetermined content, the special condition is set based on the information of the operation period. Thereby, it is possible to associate the special notification performed on the basis of the predetermined determination information and the information of the operation period.

  In this case, for the special notification, notification regarding the predetermined information for provision determination is performed, and the special condition in the second effect executed based on the special notification is based on the operation period other than the predetermined provision determination information. It may be configured to be set or may be configured to be set based on the operation period of the predetermined information for assignment determination. In the case of the former, it is possible to increase the degree of attention for the other information for assignment determination by the second effect while enhancing the degree of attention for the predetermined information for assignment determination by the special notification. Further, in the latter case, the special notification and the second effect can be more closely associated with each other. For example, in the special notification, when performing an effect that suggests that the first benefit is difficult to be provided, the special effect in the second effect is special. It is possible to diversify the effects by, for example, adopting a configuration in which effects are easily established.

  Feature I22. The condition setting unit is configured to determine the provision determination before the predetermined provision determination information which is a target of the special notification in the special notification which triggered the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution unit. The gaming machine according to feature I21, wherein the special condition is set on the basis of the operation period specified by the preceding operation period specifying means for the information for the provision determination to be a target of.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the operation period of the assignment determination information to be subjected to the assignment determination before the assignment determination information to be the target of the special notification. It is possible to increase the interest in the operation period of the game round about the information for the determination of assignment, which is the target of the determination of addition before the information for the determination of assignment, and to the effect of the other game routine by performing the special notification. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention.

Feature I23. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means or the notification means different from that to start the game circulation operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the application determination means, and the result of the determination As the notification result corresponding to the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, the game cycle control means (the game cycle control process by the main control device 81 is executed so that the game cycle operation is performed Function),
The first operation (reach occurrence) and the first operation are performed before the notification of the result of the application determination of the application determining means in the game operation by the game time control means. The branch timing (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the pattern row Z3 in the figure below) is set to branch to the second operation (reach non-occurrence) where the grant probability of 1 benefit is low.
The determination means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied at the branch timing in the game operation with respect to the information for application determination for which the application determination is performed in a situation where the second effect is performed The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I22, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, determination of success or failure of the special condition is performed at the branch timing of the first operation and the second operation. In addition, at this branch timing, the probability that the first benefit is awarded is increased if the game circulation operation is branched to the first operation, while the assignment probability becomes lower than that if it is branched to the second operation. In this case, it is conceivable to further add a branch effect associated with the high / low of the award probability for the first benefit, but if the effect is too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be lowered. It is possible that interest will also fade. Therefore, by using a configuration in which a special condition different from the first benefit is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects relating to benefit grant while suppressing complication of the game.

  Feature I24. Special setting means capable of making the elapsed speed of the period corresponding to the special condition set by the condition setting means different from the elapsed speed so far or making the remaining period of the period different from the remaining period so far The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I23, comprising (a function of executing subtraction value adjustment processing by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, when the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the period corresponding to the special condition changes, the establishment probability of the special condition changes. Thus, for example, even if the special condition is not likely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and for example, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even if the special condition is not satisfied by making the elapsed speed or the remaining period different. That is, the process of success or failure of the special condition can be made diverse, and the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased.

Feature I25. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means or the notification means different from that to start the game circulation operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the application determination means, and the result of the determination As the notification result corresponding to the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, the game cycle control means (the game cycle control process by the main control device 81 is executed so that the game cycle operation is performed Function),
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The gaming machine according to feature I24, wherein the special setting means makes the difference according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further enhance the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition to the operation period, and it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience based on the length of the operation period of the game.

Feature I26. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period in which the second effect is performed passes.
The gaming machine according to feature I25, wherein the special setting means is configured to increase the different elapsed speed or shorten the remaining difference period as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period in which the predetermined setting period elapses is also short, and therefore the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be low. Therefore, in such a case, if the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining period is shortened, it is expected that special conditions will not be established due to the short operation period to suppress interest from being dimmed. Is possible.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Information acquisition means (operation by main control device 81) for acquiring information for grant determination (hold information) based on predetermined acquisition condition establishment (for example, ball entry of gaming ball to upper operation opening 33 or lower operation opening 34) Means for executing a mouth winning process),
An assignment determination unit (mainly determines whether or not to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A function of executing a yes / no determination process by the control device 81),
First effect setting means (function to execute game times control process by the main control device 81) to set the first effect to be performed by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means )When,
First effect executing means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the effect control device 82) which executes the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
First benefit giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for giving the first benefit based on the assignment determination by the assignment determining means;
In a gaming machine provided with
The predetermined notification means or the notification means different from the predetermined notification means is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, corresponding to the execution of the special suspension notice in the special suspension notice table). 2) Second effect execution means (a function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the effect (special hold notification);
Condition setting means (a function for executing a special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition having a different establishment probability depending on the length of the period in which the first effect is performed;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function of executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the information for determination of assignment is acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the determination of whether or not the first benefit is to be granted is performed based on the information for determination of assignment, and the assignment is performed. In the gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification means is generated by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition established in advance. The presentation is performed. Therefore, diversification of the effect is achieved by performing the second effect in addition to the first effect performed based on the assignment determination.

  Here, the first benefit is awarded according to the result of the assignment determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for the game session) is performed by the predetermined notification means based on the assignment determination. In the case where it is possible to expect that the first benefit may be obtained if the first effect based on the assignment determination is continued for a long time, it is possible to expect, for example, whether or not the first benefit is obtained. For the player who is only focusing on the player, or for the player who has grasped the result of the award determination to some extent by some circumstances (for example, presence or absence of advance notice effect, strength, etc.) If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the assignment determination is short, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is not necessarily as long as it is long, but it may be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, if a special condition having a different establishment probability according to the length of the period during which the first effect is performed is set, and the determination means for determining the success or failure of the special condition is provided, the first effect It becomes possible to make a judgment different from the addition judgment in which the is set by the length of this first effect, and the special condition is satisfied even in the case where the above-mentioned inconvenience in the first effect may occur. If it becomes easy, it can be made to expect and it will become possible to keep the attention to a game in a well-balanced manner.

Note that “the first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means or the notification means different therefrom to start an operation for playing the game based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the addition determination means, and the provision is performed As the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, the game cycle control means (the game cycle control by the main control device 81) performs the game cycle operation so that the game cycle operation is finished once. Function to execute processing)
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means If the feature is applied to a game machine, the game circulation operation is performed over a long operation period,
According to the length of the period when the first effect is performed,
It can be reworded as "based on the length of the operation period set by the operation period setting means".

Feature J2. Information acquisition means (operation by main control device 81) for acquiring information for grant determination (hold information) based on predetermined acquisition condition establishment (for example, ball entry of gaming ball to upper operation opening 33 or lower operation opening 34) Means for executing a mouth winning process),
An assignment determination unit (mainly determines whether or not to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A function of executing a yes / no determination process by the control device 81),
First effect setting means (function to execute game times control process by the main control device 81) to set the first effect to be performed by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means )When,
First effect executing means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the effect control device 82) which executes the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
First benefit giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for giving the first benefit based on the assignment determination by the assignment determining means;
In a gaming machine provided with
The predetermined notification means or the notification means different from the predetermined notification means is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, corresponding to the execution of the special suspension notice in the special suspension notice table). 2) Second effect execution means (a function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the effect (special hold notification);
Condition setting means (a function for executing a special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting special conditions having different establishment probabilities in the relationship between the first effect and the second effect;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function of executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the information for determination of assignment is acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the determination of whether or not the first benefit is to be granted is performed based on the information for determination of assignment, and the assignment is performed. In the gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification means is generated by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition established in advance. The presentation is performed. Therefore, diversification of the effect is achieved by performing the second effect in addition to the first effect performed based on the assignment determination.

  Here, the first benefit is awarded according to the result of the assignment determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for the game session) is performed by the predetermined notification means based on the assignment determination. In the case of the player, the degree of attention is enhanced by the contents of the first effect, but for the player who has grasped the result of the award determination to some extent by some circumstances (for example, presence or absence of advance effect, strength, etc.) You may feel redundant.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, if special conditions having different establishment probabilities according to the relationship between the first effect and the second effect are set, and determination means for determining the success or failure of the special conditions is provided, simple on the assignment determination side It is possible to enjoy the rendition from a viewpoint different from the first rendition, and it is easy to establish the special condition even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first rendition of the assignment judgment side. Then, it can be made to expect and it becomes possible to keep the attention to a game in a well-balanced manner.

  In addition, "the establishment probability differs according to the relationship between the first effect and the second effect" means that "the establishment probability differs according to the length of each period of the first effect and the second effect" In other words, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience due to the period during which the first effect is performed (the inconvenience due to being too long or the inconvenience due to being too short) in relation to the second effect.

Feature J3. Information acquisition means (operation by main control device 81) for acquiring information for grant determination (hold information) based on predetermined acquisition condition establishment (for example, ball entry of gaming ball to upper operation opening 33 or lower operation opening 34) Means for executing a mouth winning process),
An assignment determination unit (mainly determines whether or not to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A function of executing a yes / no determination process by the control device 81),
First effect setting means (function to execute game times control process by the main control device 81) to set the first effect to be performed by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means )When,
First effect executing means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the effect control device 82) which executes the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
First benefit giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for giving the first benefit based on the assignment determination by the assignment determining means;
In a gaming machine provided with
The predetermined notification means or the notification means different from the predetermined notification means is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, corresponding to the execution of the special suspension notice in the special suspension notice table). 2) Second effect execution means (a function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the effect (special hold notification);
Second effect setting means (a function for executing a special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting the type of the second effect according to the first effect set by the effect setting means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the information for determination of assignment is acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the determination of whether or not the first benefit is to be granted is performed based on the information for determination of assignment, and the assignment is performed. In the gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification means is generated by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition established in advance. The presentation is performed. Therefore, diversification of the effect is achieved by performing the second effect in addition to the first effect performed based on the assignment determination.

  Here, the first benefit is awarded according to the result of the assignment determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for the game session) is performed by the predetermined notification means based on the assignment determination. In the case of the player, the degree of attention is enhanced by the contents of the first effect, but for the player who has grasped the result of the award determination to some extent by some circumstances (for example, presence or absence of advance effect, strength, etc.) You may feel redundant.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, by setting the type of the second effect according to the first effect, the effect can be enjoyed from another viewpoint different from the simple first effect on the assignment determination side, temporarily Even in the case where the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first effect on the determination side, effects such as compensating for the inconvenience can be performed in the second effect, and attention to the game is kept in a well-balanced manner. It becomes possible.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Information acquisition means (operation by main control device 81) for acquiring information for grant determination (hold information) based on predetermined acquisition condition establishment (for example, ball entry of gaming ball to upper operation opening 33 or lower operation opening 34) Means for executing a mouth winning process),
An assignment determination unit (mainly determines whether or not to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A function of executing a yes / no determination process by the control device 81),
First effect setting means (function to execute game times control process by the main control device 81) to set the first effect to be performed by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means )When,
First effect executing means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the effect control device 82) which executes the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
First benefit giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for giving the first benefit based on the assignment determination by the assignment determining means;
In a gaming machine provided with
Second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect (special hold advance notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined informing means or another informing means (special hold advance notice setting process by the effect control device 82 And the ability to perform
The first condition setting unit (in the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) sets a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of a period in which the second effect is performed without taking into consideration that the special condition is established. Function to execute timer input processing),
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied after the setting of the special condition by the first condition setting means (a function of executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the information for determination of assignment is acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the determination of whether or not the first benefit is to be granted is performed based on the information for determination of assignment, and the assignment is performed. In the gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification means is generated by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition established in advance. The presentation is performed. Therefore, diversification of the effect is achieved by performing the second effect in addition to the first effect performed based on the assignment determination.

  Here, the first benefit is awarded according to the result of the assignment determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for the game session) is performed by the predetermined notification means based on the assignment determination. In the case where it is possible to expect that the first benefit may be obtained if the first effect based on the assignment determination is continued for a long time, it is possible to expect, for example, whether or not the first benefit is obtained. For the player who is only focusing on the player, or for the player who has grasped the result of the award determination to some extent by some circumstances (for example, presence or absence of advance notice effect, strength, etc.) If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the assignment determination is short, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is not necessarily as long as it is long, but it may be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed is set without considering that the special condition is established, and after the setting, the special condition is set. Is provided with a measure other than the measure such as the length of the simple first effect on the assignment determination side, and the above-mentioned concern is temporarily given in the first effect on the assignment determination side. It can be expected that special conditions are likely to be satisfied even if such inconveniences may occur.

  In particular, since the special condition set by the first condition setting means is set without considering that the special condition is established, the result may be understood on the way from other information as in a so-called finished race. An event can be avoided. Therefore, it becomes possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be reworded as “in relation to the length of the period” or “by the length of the period”. In addition, “without taking account of establishing the special condition” can be reworded as “without taking into consideration whether the special condition is established”.

  Feature K2. A second condition setting unit (function to execute a timer input process at a time specific pattern by the effect control device 82) is set based on whether or not the special condition is established based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the feature K1.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be managed to some extent on the gaming machine side, for example, according to the game situation. Specifically, when the special condition is to be established for the effect or the special condition is not to be established, if the special condition is set based on that, the special condition It is possible to eliminate the sense of discomfort in the rendering based on the success or failure, and in this way, it is possible to suitably execute the rendering as designed.

  In particular, by applying the present configuration to the gaming machine of the feature K1, the special condition by the first condition setting means is set without considering whether or not it is established, and the special condition by the second condition setting means is that It is set based on whether it is established or not. Therefore, it does not know in the middle like a so-called race whether the special condition is satisfied or not, and the special condition is satisfied regardless of the condition that the special condition should be satisfied according to the gaming state. It is also possible to avoid such inconveniences. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K3. Information acquisition means (operation by main control device 81) for acquiring information for grant determination (hold information) based on predetermined acquisition condition establishment (for example, ball entry of gaming ball to upper operation opening 33 or lower operation opening 34) Means for executing a mouth winning process),
An assignment determination unit (mainly determines whether or not to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A function of executing a yes / no determination process by the control device 81),
First effect setting means (function to execute game times control process by the main control device 81) to set the first effect to be performed by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means )When,
First effect executing means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the effect control device 82) which executes the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
First benefit giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for giving the first benefit based on the assignment determination by the assignment determining means;
In a gaming machine provided with
Second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect (special hold advance notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined informing means or another informing means (special hold advance notice setting process by the effect control device 82 And the ability to perform
The first condition setting unit (in the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) sets a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of a period in which the second effect is performed without taking into consideration that the special condition is established. Function to execute timer input processing),
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied after the setting of the special condition by the first condition setting means (a function of executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
Second condition setting means (function to execute timer input processing at the time of a specific pattern by the effect control device 82) which sets the special condition based on whether the special condition is satisfied or not;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the information for determination of assignment is acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the determination of whether or not the first benefit is to be granted is performed based on the information for determination of assignment, and the assignment is performed. In the gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification means is generated by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition established in advance. The presentation is performed. Therefore, diversification of the effect is achieved by performing the second effect in addition to the first effect performed based on the assignment determination.

  Here, the first benefit is awarded according to the result of the assignment determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for the game session) is performed by the predetermined notification means based on the assignment determination. In the case where it is possible to expect that the first benefit may be obtained if the first effect based on the assignment determination is continued for a long time, it is possible to expect, for example, whether or not the first benefit is obtained. For the player who is only focusing on the player, or for the player who has grasped the result of the award determination to some extent by some circumstances (for example, presence or absence of advance notice effect, strength, etc.) If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the assignment determination is short, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is not necessarily as long as it is long, but it may be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed is set without considering that the special condition is established, and after the setting, the special condition is set. Is provided with a measure other than the measure such as the length of the simple first effect on the assignment determination side, and the above-mentioned concern is temporarily given in the first effect on the assignment determination side. It can be expected that special conditions are likely to be satisfied even if such inconveniences may occur.

  In particular, the special condition by the first condition setting means is set without considering whether it is satisfied, and the special condition by the second condition setting means is set based on whether it is satisfied. Therefore, it does not know in the middle like a so-called race whether the special condition is satisfied or not, and the special condition is satisfied regardless of the condition that the special condition should be satisfied according to the gaming state. It is also possible to avoid such inconveniences. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be reworded as “in relation to the length of the period” or “by the length of the period”. In addition, “without taking account of establishing the special condition” can be reworded as “without taking into consideration whether the special condition is established”.

  Feature K4. The second condition setting means is grasped to grasp special information (for example, information such as the number of pending storages N, the result of the acceptance / rejection determination, the variable display time, etc.) set based on the information for assignment determination or the information for assignment determination. A feature K2 or a feature characterized by comprising means (function of executing grasping processing of suspension information by the effect control device 82), and setting the special condition based on the information grasped by the grasping unit. The game machine described in K3.

  According to the above configuration, the second condition setting unit sets the special condition based on the information on the first effect side (the information for the determination of addition or the special information set based on the information for the determination of addition). Therefore, it is possible to relate the second effect to the first effect, and it is possible to draw the interest to the first effect side while making the second effect interested, and it is possible to more suitably raise the attention to the game It becomes possible.

  Feature K5. The second condition setting means is provided with means for setting the special condition so that the special condition is satisfied (a function of executing timer input processing at the time of a specific pattern by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to the feature K4.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition may be set so that the special condition in the second effect is satisfied based on the information on the first effect side, so for example, the attention degree drops only on the first effect side If the special condition in the second effect is satisfied in a situation where it is obtained, the second effect side compensates for the decrease in the degree of attention on the first effect side. In this way, the attention degree can be enhanced in a well-balanced manner by using the first effect and the second effect.

  Feature K6. The determination means includes means for determining the success or failure of the special condition regardless of the result of the addition determination by the addition determination means at the time of determination (function to execute the process for holding display by the effect control device 82) A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to lower the relativity between the success or failure of the special condition in the second effect and the first effect on which the result of the assignment determination is reflected. By doing this, it is possible to purely enjoy whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the second effect, for example, the effect that the first benefit is hard to be provided in the first effect on the assignment determination side is performed Even in such a case, the success or failure of the special condition is determined regardless of it, so that the degree of attention can be prevented from being extremely reduced.

The above configuration is, for example,
“The determination means includes means for performing the determination regardless of conditions other than the special condition at the time of determination”, or
"The special condition has a different establishment probability based on the passage of a predetermined period in the second effect,
The determination means is provided with means for determining the lapse of the predetermined period regardless of the result of the addition determination.
It can be paraphrased.

  Feature K7. Second benefit giving means for giving the player a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the determination that the special condition is established by the determination means (processing for holding display by the effect control device 82 A game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K6, characterized in that it has a function of performing

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the user more concerned about whether or not the special condition is satisfied, that is, the determination result of the determination means. In particular, by making the second benefit different from the first benefit, it becomes possible to realize a different game from the conventional game in which the acquisition condition is simply established and the first benefit is obtained, so that various types of games can be realized. Can be implemented.

  Also, by applying the present configuration to the feature K7, it is possible to intensify the impressions that are separate determinations.

  Feature K8. In any one of the features K1 to K7, the condition setting unit sets the special condition such that the special condition is more easily established as the period in which the second effect is performed is longer. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, as the period during which the second effect is performed is longer, the special condition is more easily established. By doing this, the player expects the second effect to be performed for a long time.

  As described in the feature K1, the effect on the assignment determination side has a possibility that the longer it is, the longer the attention is not increased, and that it may be felt as being redundant. Therefore, by providing the present configuration, even if there is a possibility that the first effect on the assignment determination side may be felt to be redundant, it is expected that the special condition is satisfied on the second effect side. Can maintain a well-balanced level of attention to the game.

  Note that the condition setting means in this configuration can be applied to any of the first condition setting means and the second condition setting means, or the above effect can be achieved even if only one of them is applied.

Feature K9. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means to start the game operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the addition determination means, and as the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, The game cycle control means (a function to execute the game cycle control process by the main control device 81) is provided, wherein the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, and the game cycle operation is performed.
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The second condition setting means is provided with a means for setting the special condition based on the length of the operation period set by the operation period setting means (function to execute the process of step S1501 in the effect control device 82). A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K8 characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game circulation operation in the game round is performed as the first effect, the length of the operation period of the game round is associated with the easiness of establishment of the special condition on the second presentation side. It becomes possible. By doing in this way, even if inconvenience occurs due to the length of the operation period in the game times temporarily performed based on the award determination, the second effect side absorbs the inconvenience and the degree of attention to the game It is possible to suppress an extreme drop.

  Feature K10. A feature K1 characterized by including condition notification means (function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different therefrom. To the game machine according to any one of K9.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the player grasp the special condition. As a result, it can be sufficiently enjoyed that the probability that the special condition is satisfied will differ according to the period in which the second effect is performed.

  Feature K11. The condition notification means is a destination notification means for executing notification of the special condition at a timing closer to the start of the second effect than the end of the second effect (a function for executing the special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82 A game machine according to feature K10, characterized in that it comprises

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a relatively early timing. Since the special condition is different depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed, if the special condition is grasped as early as possible, it is fun to see if the special condition is satisfied. Can not.

  Feature K12. The destination notification means is characterized by including means for executing notification of the special condition based on the start of the second effect (function for executing special hold notification setting processing by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to feature K11.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed based on the start of the second effect, it is possible to enjoy the success or failure of the period involved in the success or failure of the special condition at the maximum.

  Feature K13. The destination notification means is characterized by including means for executing notification of the special condition (function for executing special hold notification control processing by the effect control device 82) while the second effect is being performed. The gaming machine according to the feature K11 or the feature K12.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed while the second effect is being performed, the player can be made to grasp that the probability of establishment of the special condition is different. As a result, it is possible to make the player clearly grasp the relationship between the period in which the second effect is performed and the establishment probability of the special condition.

  Feature K14. The condition notification means is provided with a post notification means (function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) after executing notification of the special condition at a timing after the end of the second effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K13.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition can be grasped even after the end of the second effect. In this way, an interest as to whether or not the special condition is established can be left as a lingering tone even after the application timing, and the attention degree may be extremely reduced after the end of the second effect. It can be suppressed.

  Feature K15. The gaming machine according to Feature K14, wherein the post notification means performs notification regarding the establishment probability of the special condition at the time of determination of the determination means as notification of the special condition.

  According to the above configuration, since notification on the establishment probability of the special condition at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success or failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not established, it is possible to grasp how long it is established later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not established. .

Feature K16. Acquisition information storage means for storing the information for the assignment determination acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers as the upper limit (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) Equipped with
The assignment determination unit sequentially performs the assignment determination on the assignment determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit,
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying the predetermined assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit at a timing prior to the predetermined assignment determination information being the target of the assignment determination Function to execute the confirmation process of
The game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K15, wherein the second condition setting unit sets the special condition based on a specification result by the destination specification unit.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the predetermined addition determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit. Therefore, the game of predicting the predetermined information for grant determination from the special condition is added, and diversification of the game is achieved. That is, by associating the special condition with the information for determination as a trigger for the determination by the determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature K17. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means to start the game operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the addition determination means, and as the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, The game cycle control means (a function to execute the game cycle control process by the main control device 81) is provided, wherein the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, and the game cycle operation is performed.
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The destination specifying means is a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means as the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means. A destination operation period specifying unit (function to execute an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82),
The second condition setting unit is a first setting unit that sets the special condition based on the specification result of the preceding operation period specifying unit (function to execute timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to feature K16, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the setting of the special condition is performed based on the information of the operation period specified by the preceding operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in the game can be further enhanced, and it becomes possible to associate the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied with the length of the operation period. Therefore, an effect can be suitably performed.

  Feature K18. The second condition setting means is a second setting means (function for executing timer input processing at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the preceding operation period specifying means. A game machine according to feature K17, comprising the game machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period can not be specified first by the first operation period specifying unit, for example, even if the operation period is determined only at the start of the game, the second setting unit sets the special condition. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, an effect can be suitably performed.

Feature K19. In the gaming state, a special state in which the operation period can be specified by the destination operation period specifying means is set to any of the information for awarding determination,
The gaming machine according to the feature K17 or the feature K18, wherein the special condition is set during the special state.

  According to the above configuration, if in the special state, the information of the operation period can be specified earlier even if any of the assignment determination information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the special condition is set in such a state. If the setting is made, the inconvenience that the information of the operation period can not be identified does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to preferably realize the second effect using the special condition.

Feature K20. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number corresponding pattern) reflecting the gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) in the case where the provision determination by the provision determination means is performed; And a second operation period (pending number non-corresponding pattern) which is not included.
The preceding operation period specifying unit is provided with a unit for specifying an operation period for the provision determination information to be the second operation period (a function for executing an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of features K17 to K19, which is characterized in that

  In a configuration in which a plurality of information for award determination are stored and an award determination for the award determination information is sequentially performed, the game situation at the time of obtaining the award determination information and the game situation at the award decision may be different. Even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination, the operation period at the time of specification by the previous operation period specifying means may be different from the operation period at the time of the addition determination. Therefore, in the above configuration, the second operation period is not the first operation period in which such a game situation is reflected, but the second operation period is specified based on the timing before the target of the award determination, so the operation based on the difference in the game conditions It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of prior identification of the period. Thereby, it is possible to preferably perform the rendering using the operation period.

  Note that, if the present configuration is applied to the feature K17, “the first setting unit determines, based on the operation period specified by the operation period specifying unit, the application determination information to be the second operation period, Preferably, the special condition is set.

  Feature K21. The preceding operation period specifying means operates a temporary operation period for the provision determination information when the operation period for the provision determination information which is the identification target is the first operation period. A game machine according to Feature K20, further comprising temporary specifying means (a function for executing the special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment) for specifying as a period.

  As in the above configuration, even if the operation period may be different based on the difference in the game situation, if it is specified as the temporary operation period, it is possible to perform effects based on at least the success or failure of the special condition. That is, even when the operation period can not be specified in advance, monotonization of the effect can be suppressed by leaving room for performing the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature K18, it is preferable that “the second setting unit sets the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit”.

Feature K22. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second effect is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specification means specifies, as the temporary operation period, a period which is shorter than or equal to the shortest period of the first operation period which can be set by the operation period setting means. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily identified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration relating to the tentative identification can be simplified. In addition, since the temporary specific period is equal to or less than the shortest period of the period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is also set to be higher than the highest establishment probability. Here, if the probability of establishment of the special condition becomes extremely low, the player gets used to the fact that the special condition is not established in another effect different from the second effect, and interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is sex. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by setting the special condition to be easily established, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to the fact that the probability of establishment becomes low due to temporary specification.

Feature K23. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second effect is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies, as the temporary operation period, a period which is longer than or equal to the longest period of the first operation period which can be set by the operation period setting means.
A unit that corrects the special condition at a timing after the timing at which the specification by the temporary specification unit is performed and at a timing before the determination by the determination unit is performed (in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine according to a feature K21 or a feature K22, which is provided with a function of executing subtraction processing at the time of shift by the effect control device 82;

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily identified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration relating to the tentative identification can be simplified. Further, since the temporary specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period among the periods that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is also set to be lower than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to the fact that the probability of occurrence becomes low due to temporary specification by correcting the special conditions after that.

  Note that “correction” may be, for example, a configuration that “shortens / extends a period in which the second effect is performed”, and more specifically, “provisionally regarding the period in which the second effect is performed, A configuration is conceivable in which the difference between the operation period and the operation period set by the operation period setting means is shortened / extended.

Feature K24. Acquisition information storage means for storing the information for the assignment determination acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers as the upper limit (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) Equipped with
The assignment determination unit sequentially determines whether to grant the first benefit to the player based on the assignment determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit.
For the predetermined assignment determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit, the target of the assignment determination at a timing before the predetermined assignment determination information becomes the target of the assignment determination by the assignment determination unit. Provision of destination specifying means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the assignment determination in the event of
The first effect setting means is a target of the application judgment by the application judging means for the predetermined information for application judging by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the specification result by the destination specifying means. It sets the effect (hold notice) to be performed at the timing earlier than it becomes
The first effect execution means, on the basis of the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means has become a predetermined result, the predetermined information for provision determination which is the object of the identification becomes the object of the addition determination. Special notification (hold notice) corresponding to the result of the application determination in the case, at a timing prior to the notification of the result of the application determination for the predetermined special information, separately from the predetermined notification means or To be executed by the notification means of
The second effect execution unit is configured to, based on the fact that the content of the special notification performed by the first effect execution unit is a predetermined content (for example, content corresponding to the fourth image P4 for holding). A game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K23, wherein the effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification may be performed before the predetermined additional determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit is to be the target of the additional determination. In this way, it is possible to play a game in which the predetermined additional determination information specified by the destination identification means is predicted before the result of the additional determination of the predetermined additional determination information is notified. The game is diversified. Thus, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. In the case of performing such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be granted the first benefit, the degree of attention to the special notification is increased while the effect on information for other determination judgments is given The degree of attention may be reduced. Further, in the case of a special notification where it is difficult to give the first benefit, not only the special notification but also the degree of attention to the subsequent effects may be extremely reduced. Therefore, if, for example, a predetermined content is set as the special notification, the second notification may be performed by the predetermined notification means or the notification means different from that, the degree of attention may be reduced by performing the special notification. In the situation, it is possible to make the second effect side pay attention and to preferably avoid a decrease in the attention level.

Feature K25. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means to start the game operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the addition determination means, and as the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, The game cycle control means (a function to execute the game cycle control process by the main control device 81) is provided, wherein the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, and the game cycle operation is performed.
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The destination specifying means is a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means as the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means. A destination operation period specifying unit (function to execute an effect setting process when time specification is possible by the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to the feature K24, wherein the second condition setting unit sets the special condition based on a specification result by the preceding operation period specifying unit.

  According to the above configuration, in the second effect performed based on the content of the special notification being the predetermined content, the special condition is set based on the information of the operation period. Thereby, it is possible to associate the special notification performed on the basis of the predetermined determination information and the information of the operation period.

  In this case, for the special notification, notification regarding the predetermined information for provision determination is performed, and the special condition in the second effect executed based on the special notification is based on the operation period other than the predetermined provision determination information. It may be configured to be set or may be configured to be set based on the operation period of the predetermined information for assignment determination. In the case of the former, it is possible to increase the degree of attention for the other information for assignment determination by the second effect while enhancing the degree of attention for the predetermined information for assignment determination by the special notification. Further, in the latter case, the special notification and the second effect can be more closely associated with each other. For example, in the special notification, when performing an effect that suggests that the first benefit is difficult to be provided, the special effect in the second effect is special. It is possible to diversify the effects by, for example, adopting a configuration in which effects are easily established.

  Feature K26. The second condition setting unit is configured to execute the second notification prior to the predetermined notification for which the second notification is to be executed, the second notification being triggered by the second effect executing unit. The gaming machine according to the feature K25, wherein the special condition is set on the basis of the operation period specified by the preceding operation period specifying means, with respect to the information for the provision judgment, which is the target of the application judgment. .

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the operation period of the assignment determination information to be subjected to the assignment determination before the assignment determination information to be the target of the special notification. It is possible to increase the interest in the operation period of the game round about the information for the determination of assignment, which is the target of the determination of addition before the information for the determination of assignment, and to the effect of the other game routine by performing the special notification. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention.

Feature K27. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means to start the game operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the addition determination means, and as the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, The game cycle control means (a function to execute the game cycle control process by the main control device 81) is provided, wherein the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, and the game cycle operation is performed.
The first operation (reach occurrence) and the first operation are performed before the notification of the result of the application determination of the application determining means in the game operation by the game time control means. The branch timing (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the pattern row Z3 in the figure below) is set to branch to the second operation (reach non-occurrence) where the grant probability of 1 benefit is low.
The determination means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied at the branch timing in the game operation with respect to the information for application determination for which the application determination is performed in a situation where the second effect is performed A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K26, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, determination of success or failure of the special condition is performed at the branch timing of the first operation and the second operation. In addition, at this branch timing, the probability that the first benefit is awarded is increased if the game circulation operation is branched to the first operation, while the assignment probability becomes lower than that if it is branched to the second operation. In this case, it is conceivable to further add a branch effect associated with the high / low of the award probability for the first benefit, but if the effect is too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be lowered. It is possible that interest will also fade. Therefore, by using a configuration in which a special condition different from the first benefit is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects relating to benefit grant while suppressing complication of the game.

  Feature K28. Special setting means capable of making the elapsed speed of the period corresponding to the special condition set by the condition setting means different from the elapsed speed so far or making the remaining period of the period different from the remaining period so far A game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K27, comprising (a function of executing subtraction value adjustment processing by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, when the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the period corresponding to the special condition changes, the establishment probability of the special condition changes. Thus, for example, even if the special condition is not likely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and for example, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even if the special condition is not satisfied by making the elapsed speed or the remaining period different. That is, the process of success or failure of the special condition can be made diverse, and the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased.

  Note that the condition setting means in this configuration can be applied to any of the first condition setting means and the second condition setting means, or the above effect can be achieved even if only one of them is applied.

Feature K29. The first effect execution means causes the predetermined notification means or the notification means different from that to start the game circulation operation based on the fact that the addition determination is performed by the application determination means, and the result of the determination As the notification result corresponding to the game cycle operation is ended once as the game cycle, the game cycle control means (the game cycle control process by the main control device 81 is executed so that the game cycle operation is performed Function),
The game time control means includes operation period setting means (function to execute setting processing of fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the operation period of the game circulation operation, and is set by the operation period setting means The game circulation operation is performed over the normal operation period,
The gaming machine according to Feature K28, wherein the special setting means changes the operation period according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further enhance the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition to the operation period, and it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience based on the length of the operation period of the game.

Feature K30. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period in which the second effect is performed passes.
A game machine according to feature K29, wherein the special setting means is configured to increase the different elapsed speed or shorten the remaining difference period as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period in which the predetermined setting period elapses is also short, and therefore the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be low. Therefore, in such a case, if the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining period is shortened, it is expected that special conditions will not be established due to the short operation period to suppress interest from being dimmed. Is possible.

Feature K31. Information acquisition means (operation by main control device 81) for acquiring information for grant determination (hold information) based on predetermined acquisition condition establishment (for example, ball entry of gaming ball to upper operation opening 33 or lower operation opening 34) Means for executing a mouth winning process),
An assignment determination unit (mainly determines whether or not to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A function of executing a yes / no determination process by the control device 81),
First effect setting means (function to execute game times control process by the main control device 81) to set the first effect to be performed by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means )When,
First effect executing means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the effect control device 82) which executes the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
First benefit giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for giving the first benefit based on the assignment determination by the assignment determining means;
In a gaming machine provided with
Second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect (special hold advance notice) (function to execute special hold advance notice setting processing by effect control device 82) by the predetermined notification means or another notification means therefor;
Condition setting means (a function for executing a special hold notification setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition in which the establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the information for determination of assignment is acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the determination of whether or not the first benefit is to be granted is performed based on the information for determination of assignment, and the assignment is performed. In the gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification means is generated by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition established in advance. The presentation is performed. Therefore, diversification of the effect is achieved by performing the second effect in addition to the first effect performed based on the assignment determination.

  Here, the first benefit is awarded according to the result of the assignment determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for the game session) is performed by the predetermined notification means based on the assignment determination. In the case where it is possible to expect that the first benefit may be obtained if the first effect based on the assignment determination is continued for a long time, it is possible to expect, for example, whether or not the first benefit is obtained. For the player who is only focusing on the player, or for the player who has grasped the result of the award determination to some extent by some circumstances (for example, presence or absence of advance notice effect, strength, etc.) If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the assignment determination is short, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is not necessarily as long as it is long, but it may be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, if a means for setting a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, a scale such as the length of the simple first effect on the assignment determination side It is possible to give a measure other than that, and it is expected that special conditions are likely to be satisfied even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first effect on the assignment determination side. It is possible to maintain a well-balanced degree of attention to the game. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be reworded as “in relation to the length of the period” or “by the length of the period”.

Feature K32. Information acquisition means (operation by main control device 81) for acquiring information for grant determination (hold information) based on predetermined acquisition condition establishment (for example, ball entry of gaming ball to upper operation opening 33 or lower operation opening 34) Means for executing a mouth winning process),
An assignment determination unit (mainly determines whether or not to grant the player a first benefit (for example, an open / close execution mode or a high frequency support mode) based on the assignment determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A function of executing a yes / no determination process by the control device 81),
First effect setting means (function to execute game times control process by the main control device 81) to set the first effect to be performed by the predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 41) based on the application judgment by the application judging means )When,
First effect executing means (function to execute fluctuation display control processing by the effect control device 82) which executes the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
First benefit giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for giving the first benefit based on the assignment determination by the assignment determining means;
In a gaming machine provided with
Second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect (special hold advance notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined informing means or another informing means (special hold advance notice setting process by the effect control device 82 And the ability to perform
Second condition setting means (time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) which sets special conditions whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, based on whether the special conditions are satisfied A game machine characterized by having a function of executing timer input processing at the same time.

  According to the above configuration, the information for determination of assignment is acquired based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the determination of whether or not the first benefit is to be granted is performed based on the information for determination of assignment, and the assignment is performed. In the gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification means is generated by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition established in advance. The presentation is performed. Therefore, diversification of the effect is achieved by performing the second effect in addition to the first effect performed based on the assignment determination.

  Here, the first benefit is awarded according to the result of the assignment determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for the game session) is performed by the predetermined notification means based on the assignment determination. In the case where it is possible to expect that the first benefit may be obtained if the first effect based on the assignment determination is continued for a long time, it is possible to expect, for example, whether or not the first benefit is obtained. For the player who is only focusing on the player, or for the player who has grasped the result of the award determination to some extent by some circumstances (for example, presence or absence of advance notice effect, strength, etc.) If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the assignment determination is short, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is not necessarily as long as it is long, but it may be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, a second condition setting unit is provided which sets a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of a period during which the second effect is performed, based on whether the special condition is satisfied. Then, it is possible to give a measure other than the measure such as the length of the simple first effect on the assignment determination side, and temporarily cause the above-mentioned inconvenience in the first effect on the assignment determination side. Even if it exists, it can be expected that special conditions are likely to be established.

  In particular, the special condition set by the second condition setting means is set based on whether the special condition is satisfied or not. It can be managed to some extent. Specifically, when the special condition is to be established for the effect or the special condition is not to be established, if the special condition is set based on that, the special condition It is possible to eliminate the sense of discomfort in the rendering based on the success or failure, and in this way, it is possible to suitably execute the rendering as designed. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be reworded as “in relation to the length of the period” or “by the length of the period”.

  When the characteristic configurations described in the features K1 to K30 are applied to the feature K31 or the feature 32, respectively, it is possible to synergistically achieve the effects of the characteristic features to be applied.

  Hereinafter, basic configurations of various game machines to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  Ball-use belt-type gaming machine: A variable display means is provided for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbol row at the final stop, and the variation of symbols is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means for the game or by the elapse of a predetermined time, the special gaming state (bonus advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device for generating a game, etc., and further providing a ball saucer to take in game balls from the ball saucer, and a payout device for paying out gaming balls to the ball saucer; A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is inserted.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... upper operation port, 34 ... lower operation port, 41 ... symbol display device, 54 ... firing handle, 63 ... display light emission part, 75 ... operation part, 81 ... main control device, 82 ... presentation control device .

Claims (2)

Launching means for launching the game ball into the game area;
A ball entry unit provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry section;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers as an upper limit;
An assignment determination unit that sequentially determines whether to award a bonus to the player for the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit;
Privilege giving means for giving the player the privilege, based on the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means being a giving correspondence result corresponding to giving the player the privilege;
Based on the application judgment by the application judging means, the game notification operation is started by the predetermined notification means, and the game operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the application judgment. Game time control means for controlling the predetermined notification means such that the game time operation is performed, where
Destination specifying means for specifying information about predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing prior to the predetermined special information becoming the target of the addition determination;
Corresponding to the result of the assignment determination in the case where the predetermined special information that has become the target of the particular has become the target of the assignment determination based on the fact that the identification result by the prior identification means has become a predetermined result. Special notification execution means for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means;
Based on the special notification being performed by the special notification execution means, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round related to the special information different from the predetermined special information that has triggered the execution of the special notification. Predetermined effect execution means capable of
Condition setting means capable of setting a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of a period in which the predetermined effect is executed, without considering that the special condition is established;
Condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is established;
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first means for performing a first effect, which is a notification corresponding to performing the predetermined effect based on the special notification being performed by the special notification execution means;
Second means for starting the predetermined effect after the first effect is performed by the first means;
A game machine characterized by comprising: It comprises a launch operation means by which a player performs a launch operation,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the launcher launches a game ball based on the launch operation of the launch operation unit being performed.

Images